Corometrics 170 series фетальный монитор инструкция

GE Corometrics 170 Series Operator's Manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Related Manuals for GE Corometrics 170 Series

Summary of Contents for GE Corometrics 170 Series

  • Page 1
    Corometrics 170 Series ® OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL P/N 2003023-001 REV. D…
  • Page 3
    Corometrics 170 Series ® OPERATOR’S MANUAL MANUAL P/N 2003023-001 REV. D…
  • Page 4
    Corometrics and Marquette are registered trademarks of GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. GE is a registered trademark of General Electric Company. All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
  • Page 5
    CE Marking Information CE Marking Information 0459 Compliance A Corometrics brand 170 Series Monitor bears CE mark CE-0459 indicating its conformity with the provisions of the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices and fulfills the essential requirements of Annex I of this directive. The device is manufactured in the United States;…
  • Page 6
    CE Marking Information Be aware that adding accessories or components, or modifying the medical device or system may degrade the EMI performance. Consult with qualified personnel regarding changes to the system configuration. CE-2 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 7: Table Of Contents

    Contents Safety ……… 1-1 General Information .

  • Page 8
    Model 171 ……….. 3-4 Models 172, 173, and 174 .
  • Page 9
    Setup Procedures ……. 4-1 Loading Strip Chart Paper ……….4-2 Turning the Monitor On .
  • Page 10
    Intermittent Signal Loss ……..5-13 Silencing an Audio Alarm .
  • Page 11
    Troubleshooting ……. . 9-1 General Troubleshooting ……….9-2 Ultrasound Troubleshooting .
  • Page 13: Safety

    This chapter describes how the terms Danger, Warning, Caution, Important, and Note are used throughout the manual. In addition, GE Medical Systems Information Technologies’ standard equipment symbols are defined. This section includes the following important information: General Information .

  • Page 14: General Information

    170 Series Monitor. Responsibility of the Manufacturer GE Medical Systems Information Technologies is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability, and performance if: assembly operations, extensions, readjustments, modifications, or repairs are carried out by persons authorized by GE Medical Systems Information Technologies;…

  • Page 15: Definitions Of Terminology

    Safety: Definitions of Terminology Definitions of Terminology Six types of special notices are used throughout this manual. They are: Danger, Warning, Caution, Contraindication, Important, and Note. (See Table 1-1.) The warnings and cautions in this Safety section relate to the equipment in general and apply to all aspects of fetal monitoring.

  • Page 16: Monitor Safety Information

    Safety: Monitor Safety Information Monitor Safety Information Warnings WARNINGS ACCIDENTAL SPILLS—In the event that fluids are accidentally spilled on the monitor, take the monitor out of operation and inspect for damage. APPLICATION—This monitor is not designed for direct cardiac connection. CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS—Avoid making any conductive connections to applied parts (patient connection) which are likely to degrade safety.

  • Page 17
    Safety: Monitor Safety Information operator may result. INSTRUCTIONS—For continued and safe use of this equipment, it is necessary to follow all listed instructions. However, the instructions provided in this manual in no way supersede established medical procedures concerning patient care. The monitor does not replace observation and evaluation of the patient, at regular intervals, by a qualified care provider who will make diagnoses and decide on treatments and interventions.
  • Page 18: Cautions

    ANNUAL SERVICING—For continued safety and performance of the monitor, it is recommended that the calibration, accuracy, and electrical safety of the monitor be verified on an annual basis by a GE Medical Systems Information Technologies Service Representative. DAILY TESTING—It is essential that the monitor and accessories be inspected every day.

  • Page 19
    Turn equipment in the vicinity off and on to isolate the offending equipment. Reorient or relocate the other receiving device. Increase the separation between the interfering equipment and this equipment. If assistance is required, contact your GE Service Representative. Revision D 170 Series Monitor…
  • Page 20: Definitions Of Symbols

    Definitions of Symbols NOTE: Refer to “Controls, Indicators, The following is a list of symbols used on products manufactured by GE Medical and Connectors” on page 3-1 for Systems Information Technologies. Some symbols may not appear on your unit. additional information.

  • Page 21
    Safety: Definitions of Symbols For your notes Revision D 170 Series Monitor 2003023-001…
  • Page 22
    Safety: Definitions of Symbols 1-10 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 23: Introduction

    Chapter 2 Introduction This section lists the indications for use for monitors in the 170 Series as well as provides an explanation of the different patient monitoring modalities. This section summarizes the clinical applications of monitors in the 170 Series: Indications for Use .

  • Page 24: Indications For Use

    Introduction: Indications for Use Indications for Use Models 171 and 172 Models 171 and 172 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use: in antepartum testing of fetal well-being, particularly in the high-risk pregnancy; and for routine non- invasive monitoring throughout labor and delivery. Models 173 and 174 Models 173 and 174 Fetal Monitors can be used for routine non-invasive and invasive monitoring throughout labor and delivery.

  • Page 25: Risk Conditions

    Introduction: Risk Conditions Risk Conditions NOTE: There may be other factors or The goal of electronic fetal monitoring for antepartum testing is to differentiate the conditions that place a patient at risk. fetus who is tolerating the intrauterine environment well, from the fetus who may be compromised and require further evaluation or delivery.

  • Page 26: Monitoring Methods

    Introduction: Monitoring Methods Monitoring Methods The following is a summary of all the clinical monitoring methods found in the 170 Series. Refer to “‘Preface, Overview” for information about which modalities apply to your monitor. Fetal Heart Rate External Method, Pulsed Doppler Ultrasound Ultrasound monitoring is available on all 170 Series Monitors.

  • Page 27: Controls, Indicators, And Connectors

    Chapter 3 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors This section describes all possible controls, indicators, and connectors in the 170 Series. This section contains the following information: Front Panel Controls……..Front Panel Displays and Indicators.

  • Page 28: Front Panel Controls

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls Front Panel Controls Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls (Model 172 shown) Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls Symbol Name Power Record Paper Advance Mark/Offset Setup Volume UA Reference Alarm Silence 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…

  • Page 29: Power Button And Indicator

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls Power Button and Indicator Pressing the blue Power button turns the monitor on and illuminates the green indicator to the left of the button. Pressing the button again puts the monitor in standby and extinguishes the indicator. Record Button and Indicator Pressing the Record pushbutton activates the recorder, provided paper is installed;…

  • Page 30: Setup Button

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls Setup Button Pressing and holding this button while the monitor is on enters a user setup mode for configuring the monitor. Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for instructions. Pressing and holding this button during power up enters a service setup mode. Refer to the “170 Series Service Manual”…

  • Page 31: Ua Reference Button

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls UA Reference Button The UA Reference button is used to set the uterine activity pressure reference. This button is also used during setup. Setting a Baseline for External Monitoring (Tocotransducer) Briefly pressing the UA Reference button sets the pressure baseline at a preset default.

  • Page 32: Front Panel Displays And Indicators

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators Front Panel Displays and Indicators Fetal Heart Rate Display(s) and Indicator(s) FHR Display A three-digit yellow numeric display indicates the fetal heart rate in beats per minute. The value flashes during an alarm condition. Heartbeat Indicator A yellow heart shaped indicator flashes with each detected valid heartbeat for the fetal heart.

  • Page 33: Alarms Disabled Indicator

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators Alarms Disabled Indicator This yellow indicator illuminates when all alarms have been disabled. The indicator is unlit when alarms are enabled. Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” information on enabling/disabling alarms. Audio Alarm Indicator Active Patient Alarms For active patient alarms, this yellow indicator flashes;…

  • Page 34: Front Panel Connectors

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Front Panel Connectors Model 171 Connectors Figure 3-2. Model 171 Connectors Ultrasound Connector The ultrasound connector is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the fetal heart rate display.

  • Page 35: Model 172 Connectors

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Model 172 Connectors Figure 3-3. Model 172 Connectors Primary Ultrasound Connector The primary ultrasound connector is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart rate display.

  • Page 36: Model 173 Connectors

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Model 173 Connectors Figure 3-4. Model 173 Connectors Ultrasound Connector The ultrasound connector is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart display.

  • Page 37: Model 174 Connectors

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Model 174 Connectors Figure 3-5. Model 174 Connectors Combi-Connector (Primary Ultrasound or FECG) The combi-connector is a blue connector with a dark grey inner center. This round receptacle is mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug or a Corometrics FECG cable/legplate plug.

  • Page 38: Strip Chart Recorder

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder Strip Chart Recorder Figure 3-6. Strip Chart Recorder The strip chart recorder is located on the right side of the front panel. Latches on each side of the recorder open the paper drawer. Two styles of paper are available: 30-240 BPM scale and 50-210 BPM scale.

  • Page 39: Uterine Activity Grid

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder Uterine Activity Grid The uterine activity trend prints in black on the bottom (or right) grid of the strip chart paper. Read “Chapter 6, Uterine Activity Monitoring” “Chapter 7, Strip Chart Recorder” for more information about uterine activity trends and annotations. Annotation Area An annotation area is provided between the fetal heart rate and uterine activity grids.

  • Page 40: Rear Panel Connectors

    AC wall outlet. The connector is labeled . The power supply is a CONNECT TO GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY universal AC-to-DC converter which can accept an AC input in the range 100–230 VAC.

  • Page 41: Rs-232C Connectors

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Rear Panel Connectors RS-232C Connectors Two RS-232C connectors are provided for interfacing to peripheral equipment such a maternal non-invasive blood pressure monitor a Nellcor Model N-400 Fetal Oxygen Saturation Monitor a central information system that uses Hewlett-Packard’s Digital Series Interface Protocol Contact your Service Representative for more information.

  • Page 42
    For your notes 3-16 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 43: Setup Procedures

    Chapter 4 Setup Procedures This section contains information about configuring a 170 Series Monitor to meet the individual needs of your clinic or hospital. Use of the monitor will vary according to the accessories attached to it, the clinical applications in which it is used, and the personal preferences of the users.

  • Page 44: Loading Strip Chart Paper

    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Loading Strip Chart Paper The required paper for use with the 170 Series Monitor is: catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/CAO (HR scale of 30–240 BPM); or catalog number (REF) 4305BAO/DAO (HR scale of 50–210 BPM). Refer to “Chapter 7, Strip Chart Recorder”…

  • Page 45
    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper To install Corometrics catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/BAO/CAO/DAO chart paper in the 170 Series Monitor, follow these steps: CAUTION LOADING PAPER—Paper loading instructions for a 170 or 120 Series Monitor are different than other Corometrics monitors with which you may be familiar.
  • Page 46
    GE Medical Systems Information Technologies name and page recorder has approximately 20 minutes numbers are on the left side of the pack.
  • Page 47
    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Unfold two sheets from the top of the pack so that they extend toward you. Figure 4-5. Creating a Paper Leader Place the pack in the drawer so that the pack is laying flat in the bottom of the paper tray.
  • Page 48
    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Pull the paper leader taut at an angle between remaining pack and the paper guides. The balance of the paper pack should stay flat in the drawer as shown in Figure 4-7. (The paper guides are shown in Figure 4-8.) Pull paper…
  • Page 49: Turning The Monitor On

    Series Monitor. Connect the AC adapter into the power supply connector labeled: CONNECT TO GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY Figure 4-9. Connecting the AC Adapter Connect one end of the detachable line cord to the AC adapter; connect the other end into a hospital grade grounded wall outlet.

  • Page 50: Monitor Self-Test Routines

    Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines Monitor Self-Test Routines NOTE: Ensure paper is installed in the Each 170 Series Monitor contains a self-test routine which checks the internal recorder in order to verify a successful circuitry of the monitor, the displays and indicators, and the strip chart recorder. recorder test.

  • Page 51
    Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS 4305CAO 41153 PAGES REMAING 30-240 HR Scale TEST: ARE ALL DOTS PRINTED? mm Hg Figure 4-11. Recorder Test Revision D 170 Series Monitor 2003023-001…
  • Page 52: Customizing The Monitor

    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Customizing the Monitor The monitor includes a user setup mode where you can: enable/disable alarm functionality set the high alarm limit for the fetal heart rate set the low alarm limit for the fetal heart rate set the alarm volume set the time and date (A 170 Series Monitor is Year 2000 compliant.)

  • Page 53
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor NOTE: If an alarm occurs while in You can enter the user setup mode during a monitoring session. The fetal heart rate user setup mode, the heart rate display and uterine activity trends print without interruption; however you will be unable to will not flash;…
  • Page 54
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Table 4-2. Summary of User Setup Codes Code Setting or Value (UA Display) (Primary FHR Display) Code Description FHR Alarms 0 = off (disabled) 1 = on (enabled) FHR High Alarm Limit 140–210 (BPM, in increments of 5 BPM) FHR Low Alarm Limit 50–140 (BPM, in increments of 5 BPM) FHR Alarm Volume…
  • Page 55
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Table 4-3. Summary of Factory Defaults Setup Option Factory Default Hospital/Clinic Setting FHR Alarms FHR High Alarm Limit 160 BPM FHR Low Alarm Limit 120 BPM FHR Alarm Volume Eastern Standard Time or Daylight- Time/Date Saving Time—whichever is applicable *ECG Artifact Elimination…
  • Page 56: Mounting The Strain Gauge For Iup Monitoring

    Setup Procedures: Mounting the Strain Gauge for IUP Monitoring Mounting the Strain Gauge for IUP Monitoring IUP monitoring is an intrapartum monitoring method available on Models 173 and 174 Fetal Monitors only. There is no provision for mounting the strain gauge directly on the monitor. It is recommended that you use a standard IV (intravenous) pole and mount it according to your hospital protocol.

  • Page 57: Preparing The Monitor For Patient Use

    Setup Procedures: Preparing the Monitor for Patient Use Preparing the Monitor for Patient Use The following steps should be performed prior to each patient monitoring session: Ensure an adequate supply of paper is in the recorder. The recorder automatically stops when paper runs out. If the recorder requires paper, refer to “Loading Strip Chart Paper”…

  • Page 58
    For your notes 4-16 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 59
    Chapter 5 Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring This section provides a brief overview of fetal heart rate monitoring using a 170 Series Fetal Monitor. Refer to the “Maternal/Fetal Monitoring Operator’s Manual” for additional information. The 170 Series offers the following: 171: singleton ultrasound 172: dual ultrasound 173: ultrasound and FECG 174: FECG/ultrasound or dual ultrasound…
  • Page 60: Ultrasound (External Method)

    The fetal heart rate is displayed in BPM and continuously plotted on the strip chart recorder paper. GE Medical Systems Information Technologies offers two styles of ultrasound transducers: loop-style and button-style. Both styles are discussed in the “Maternal/ Fetal Monitoring Operator’s…

  • Page 61: Strip Chart Annotations

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Ultrasound (External Method) Strip Chart Annotations When fetal movement detection is enabled, the mode annotation is printed on the center margin. The annotation only provides an indication that the feature is enabled—it does not indicate detection. When fetal movement is detected, a solid line is automatically marked on the bottom of the heart rate grid for the duration of the detected movement.

  • Page 62: Fecg (Internal Method)

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: FECG (Internal Method) FECG (Internal Method) Methodology This method uses an electrode attached directly to the fetal presenting part. The electrode is connected to the cable/legplate secured to the mother. The fetal heart rate is computed based upon the interval between successive R-wave peaks of the fetal QRS complex.

  • Page 63: Fetal Heart Rate Offset

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Offset Fetal Heart Rate Offset The Model 172 monitors twins using dual ultrasound. The Model 173 (with only one ultrasound channel) monitors twins using FECG and ultrasound. The Model 174 (with a combi-connector) can monitor twins using FECG/ultrasound or dual ultrasound.

  • Page 64: Activating The Fetal Heart Rate Offset Mode

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Offset Activating the Fetal Heart Rate Offset Mode When you activate the heart rate offset mode, the secondary FHR trend is shifted +20 BPM. (See Figure 5-2.) Ensure the recorder is on. Press and hold the t button for two seconds.

  • Page 65: Heartbeat Coincidence

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Heartbeat Coincidence Heartbeat Coincidence Heartbeat coincidence is available on Models 172, 173, and 174 (dual heart rate monitors) to alert you when you may be monitoring a duplicate signal. Heartbeat coincidence is indicated when two heartbeats have a consistent phase relationship for equal to or greater than 60% of the detected beats for about 60 seconds;…

  • Page 66: Strip Chart Annotation

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Heartbeat Coincidence Strip Chart Annotation When heartbeat coincidence detection is enabled, and both heart rate channels are active, the annotation prints in the center margin of the strip chart paper following the active FHR modes. (Refer to Figure 5-3.) As soon as heartbeat coincidence is detected, two overlaid hearts…

  • Page 67: Fetal Heart Rate Alarms

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Alarms Fetal Heart Rate Alarms FHR Threshold Alarms NOTE: The alarm enable/disable A fetal heart rate threshold alarm occurs when any fetal heart rate falls outside of setting controls all FHR alarms: high, the pre-defined alarm limits—greater than the high limit setting or less than the low low, and signal quality.

  • Page 68: Latching Alarms

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Alarms Latching Alarms Fetal heart rate threshold alarms are “latching.” This means that a clinician must acknowledge the alarm using the monitor’s button in order to clear the Alarm Silence alarm. Active Threshold Alarm: Press the Alarm Silence button to cancel the audio…

  • Page 69: Fhr Low Alarm

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Alarms FHR Low Alarm The simplest example of a low FHR alarm occurs when the FHR value is continuously less than the threshold (low limit) for 30 seconds. When data consistently violates the limit, the time-to-alarm is 30 seconds. See Figure 5-6.

  • Page 70: Signal Quality Alarms

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Alarms Signal Quality Alarms A fetal heart rate signal quality alarm occurs if the monitor is unable to detect an acceptable FHR signal. Active Signal Quality Alarm Signal quality alarms are indicated both visually and audibly. The Alarm indicator illuminates and dashes “–…

  • Page 71: Intermittent Signal Loss

    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Alarms Intermittent Signal Loss In the clinical environment, a partial loss of signal is seen more frequently than a complete loss of signal. The time-to-alarm will vary related to the percentage of signal loss. Figure 5-9 shows an example where there is 70% signal loss resulting in a signal quality alarm after 5 minutes.

  • Page 72
    Fetal Heart Rate Monitoring: Fetal Heart Rate Alarms For your notes 5-14 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 73: Uterine Activity Monitoring

    Chapter 6 Uterine Activity Monitoring This section provides a brief overview of the uterine activity monitoring methods available on 170 Series Fetal Monitors. Refer to the “Maternal/Fetal Monitoring Operator’s Manual” for additional information. The 170 Series offers the following: 171/172: TOCO 173/174: TOCO and IUP This section summarizes the uterine activity monitoring methods available in the 170 Series:…

  • Page 74: Tocotransducer (External Method)

    0–100. Uterine activity is continuously plotted on the bottom (or right) of the strip chart paper as a plain black line. GE Medical Systems Information Technologies offers two models of tocotransducers: Nautilus and Trimline. Each model is available in a loop-style and button-style.

  • Page 75: Initial Referencing

    When you adjust the belt on the patient, regardless of transducer type, you want to ensure a comfortable fit; you also want to ensure that the transducer is held securely in place. GE Medical Systems Information Technologies recommends adjusting the belt tension so that, between contractions, the UA display shows approximately 25 relative units above the initial baseline.

  • Page 76: More About Referencing

    Uterine Activity Monitoring: Tocotransducer (External Method) More About Referencing Out of Range Condition After you press the button, if there is insufficient range to provide at UA Reference least 100 relative units above the reference level (probably because the belt is too tight), the UA display area flashes “–…

  • Page 77: Intrauterine Pressure Monitoring (Internal Method)

    Uterine Activity Monitoring: Intrauterine Pressure Monitoring (Internal Method) Intrauterine Pressure Monitoring (Internal Method) Methodology A catheter inserted transcervically into the uterine cavity measures intrauterine pressure. You can monitor using either a fluid-filled catheter or a transducer-tipped catheter. The uterine activity value is displayed in mmHg from 0–100 and the trend is continuously plotted on the bottom (or right) grid of the strip chart paper as a plain black line.

  • Page 78
    For your notes 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 79
    Chapter 7 Strip Chart Recorder This chapter discusses the different types of strip chart paper as well as the trends and annotations which are printed. This section includes the following information: Strip Chart Paper ……..Trends.
  • Page 80: Strip Chart Paper

    “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures”. This chapter discusses the two kinds of strip chart paper available from GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. The two kinds of paper are: z-fold chart paper with pre-printed 30–240 BPM heart rate scale (Refer to Figure 7-1.)

  • Page 81
    Strip Chart Recorder: Strip Chart Paper 4305CAO GE MARQUETTE MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC. GE MARQUETTE MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC. 02377 02378 PAGES AING REMAING TOP GRID PRE-PRINTED HR SCALE 1 CM PRIMARY ANNOTATION AREA 3 CM PRE-PRINTED UA SCALE BOTTOM GRID mm Hg mm Hg Figure 7-1.
  • Page 82
    Strip Chart Recorder: Strip Chart Paper GE MARQUETTE MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC. 4305DAO GE MARQUETTE MEDICAL SYSTEMS, INC. 02377 02378 PAGES REMAING FHR-bpm FHR-bpm TOP GRID PRE-PRINTED HR SCALE PRIMARY ANNOTATION AREA 1 CM 3 CM PRE-PRINTED UA SCALE BOTTOM GRID…
  • Page 83: Trends

    Strip Chart Recorder: Trends Trends NOTE: A fourth trend can be printed if Up to three trends can be simultaneously printed on the strip chart paper— the monitor is interfaced to a fetal depending on your model monitor and the active modalities. oxygen saturation monitor.

  • Page 84: Annotations

    Strip Chart Recorder: Annotations Annotations Several standard annotations are made by the monitor to help analyze the strip chart data and to complete the patient record. Most annotations print in the area between the top and bottom grids on the strip chart paper; however, there are some annotations that print in either grid.

  • Page 85
    Strip Chart Recorder: Annotations prints on any of the first three annotation lines—as soon as a printing line is available. A solid diamond marker prints on the bottom two lines of the heart rate grid, marking the time of the reading. (See Figure 7-3.) FSpO…
  • Page 86: Annotations From A Central Information System

    Strip Chart Recorder: Annotations Annotations from a Central Information System The 170 Series Monitor can be configured via a service setup mode to print annotations received from a central information system. These annotations print on any available line except the first. (The first annotation line is usually reserved for maternal blood pressure readings.) A computer marker prints on the bottom two lines of the heart rate grid to mark the time of the annotation and to indicate the…

  • Page 87
    Strip Chart Recorder: Annotations Table 7-2. Summary of Recorder Messages Annotation Explanation Time and date are both printed on the bottom annotation line twenty seconds after the recorder is turned on and when the date changes after midnight. A time stamp automatically prints approximately every ten minutes—at the Time and Date ten-minute mark.
  • Page 88
    Strip Chart Recorder: Annotations Table 7-2. Summary of Recorder Messages (Continued) Annotation Explanation This annotation prints at startup indicating the fetal heart rate alarm status Fetal Heart Rate Alarm Status/Limits. For and limits. The bell icon indicates that the alarm function is enabled. HI example: represents the high alarm limit in BPM;…
  • Page 89
    Strip Chart Recorder: Annotations Table 7-2. Summary of Recorder Messages (Continued) Annotation Explanation This annotation prints on the bottom two lines of the heart rate grid indicating that active telemetry signals are being received. The annotation re-prints every ten minutes along with the modes. This annotation prints once on the bottom two lines of the heart rate grid indicating that telemetry signals are no longer being received.
  • Page 90: Paper Error Conditions

    Strip Chart Recorder: Paper Error Conditions Paper Error Conditions A 170 Series Monitor indicates when the recorder is completely out of paper and when the strip chart paper is incorrectly loaded. Paper-Out Condition When the recorder runs out of paper, the monitor automatically ejects the paper and then turns off the recorder.

  • Page 91: Removing Unused Paper From The Recorder

    Strip Chart Recorder: Removing Unused Paper from the Recorder Removing Unused Paper from the Recorder If you need to remove unused paper from the recorder: Slide the monitor forward so that the front is aligned with the edge of the cart or table on which it stands.

  • Page 92
    Strip Chart Recorder: Removing Unused Paper from the Recorder For your notes 7-14 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 93: Cleaning

    Chapter 8 Cleaning All equipment, no matter how reliable, needs to be maintained on a regular basis. This chapter describes general care and cleaning instructions for the 170 Series Monitor and its accessories. If an accessory is not listed, consult the manufacturer’s instructions.

  • Page 94: Monitor Exterior (Including Displays)

    Cleaning: Monitor Exterior (Including Displays) Monitor Exterior (Including Displays) To clean the exterior of the monitor: Wipe any fluids from the surface of the monitor. Dampen a cloth or paper towel with isopropyl alcohol and gently rub soiled area until clean. 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…

  • Page 95: Tocotransducer, Ultrasound Transducer, And Legplate

    Cleaning: Tocotransducer, Ultrasound Transducer, and Legplate Tocotransducer, Ultrasound Transducer, and Legplate CAUTIONS ABRASION—Do not use abrasive cloth, sharp objects, or abrasive cleaners. ALCOHOL—Do not use Alcohol in cleaning solutions. DISCONNECTION—Detach the transducers/cables/legplate from the monitor. IMMERSION—Do not immerse transducers/cables/legplate or hold under running water.

  • Page 96: Ua Strain Gauge

    Cleaning: UA Strain Gauge UA Strain Gauge Remove the plastic dome. If desired, wash the transducer with sterile water or saline solution. Carefully clean the diaphragm seal with a cotton swab to remove deposits. Avoid excessive pressure since this may damage the diaphragm. If there are excessive stains on the diaphragm or sides of the transducer, remove with a cotton swab and solvents of increasing strength.

  • Page 97: Troubleshooting

    Chapter 9 Troubleshooting This section of the manual provides a troubleshooting guide for the most basic 170 Series Monitor operational problems. If the response to a specific question is not found, contact your Service Representative: Call 1-800-558-5120. Inside the United States: Outside the United States: Call 414-355-3790;…

  • Page 98: General Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting: General Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting Table 9-1. General Troubleshooting Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution Power cord (AC or DC) not connected or is Check cord connections from monitor to No monitoring functions and green Power defective. converter and from converter to AC line indicator does not illuminate when Power power.

  • Page 99: Ultrasound Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting: Ultrasound Troubleshooting Ultrasound Troubleshooting Table 9-2. Ultrasound Troubleshooting Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution Transducer not properly connected to Ensure that transducer is firmly attached to monitor. monitor. Transducer placement. Wait before moving transducer; FHR often returns. Reposition transducer. Too little gel applied to transducer. Apply more gel.

  • Page 100: Fecg Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting: FECG Troubleshooting FECG Troubleshooting Table 9-3. FECG Troubleshooting Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution Transducer not properly connected to Ensure transducer is firmly attached to the monitor. monitor. Legplate not firmly secured to legplate post. Secure legplate to patient. Electrode wire not secure in legplate post. Inspect legplate connection.

  • Page 101: External Ua Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting: External UA Troubleshooting External UA Troubleshooting Table 9-4. External UA Troubleshooting Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution Transducer not properly connected to Ensure that transducer is firmly attached to monitor. monitor. Transducer not properly placed. Reposition transducer. Transducer not secured to patient. Secure or re-apply transducer to patient.

  • Page 102: Internal Ua Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting: Internal UA Troubleshooting Internal UA Troubleshooting Table 9-5. Internal UA Troubleshooting Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution Ensure transducer is securely attached to Transducer not properly connected to monitor. monitor. Flush dome and catheter. Air bubble in dome; or catheter blocked. Dome is cracked.

  • Page 103: Supplies And Accessories

    Chapter 10 Supplies Accessories This section provides an overall listing of supplies and accessories for use with 170 Series Monitors. To place an orderl: Call 1-800-558-5120. Inside the United States: Outside the United States: Call 414-355-3790; or contact your local distributor. Table 10-1.

  • Page 104
    Supplies Accessories: Model 3116 LDR/LDRP Bedroom Style Mobile Cart—Unfinished 3116BAO Model 146 Fetal Acoustic Stimulator 0146AAY Z-Fold Chart Paper Pack, 30–240 BPM Heart Rate Scale (40/carton) 4305CAO Z-Fold Chart Paper Pack, 50–210 BPM Heart Rate Scale (40/carton) 4305DAO Chart Guard Label Packet 4914BAO Loop-Style Ultrasound Transducer (Nautilus), 8-foot Cord 5700LAX…
  • Page 105
    Supplies Accessories: Corometrics Saflex Intermediate Cable 1336AAO Holder Assembly for Disposable Pressure Transducer 4518BAO Revision D 170 Series Monitor 10-3 2003023-001…
  • Page 106
    Supplies Accessories: 10-4 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001…
  • Page 107: Technical Specifications

    Chapter 11 Technical Specifications This section contains a detailed list of the technical specifications for the 170 Series Monitor. This chapter lists specifications for the following: General Monitor ……..11-2 Operating Modes .

  • Page 108: General Monitor

    Technical Specifications: General Monitor General Monitor Table 11-1. General Monitor Specifications Category Technical Specifications Power Requirements Nominal Line Voltage: 100–230 VAC Line Frequency: 50/60 Hz (operates over 47–63 Hz) Power Consumption (maximum): ≤30 VA Monitor DC Input: 12 Vdc at 2.5 A Physical Characteristics Height: 5.75 in (14.6 cm)

  • Page 109: Operating Modes

    Technical Specifications: Operating Modes Operating Modes Table 11-2. Operating Mode Specifications FECG Mode Technique: Peak detecting, beat-to-beat cardiotachometer Heart Rate Counting Range: 30–240 BPM Heart Rate Resolution: 1 BPM Artifact Elimination: Service selectable, ±25 BPM artifact rejection Countable Input Signal Range: 15 µV to 2 mV peak-to-peak Offset Voltage Tolerance (Differential): ±300 mVdc maximum…

  • Page 110: Strip Chart Recorder

    Technical Specifications: Strip Chart Recorder Strip Chart Recorder Table 11-3. Strip Chart Recorder Specifications Heart Rate Scale Domestic International 7 cm 8 cm Chart Width: 30 BPM/cm 20 BPM/cm Scaling: 30–240 BPM 50–210 BPM Range: 1 BPM 1 BPM Resolution: Uterine Activity Scale Strain Gauge Tocotransducer…

  • Page 112
    Asia Headquarters World Headquarters GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems Information Technologies GmbH Information Technologies Asia; GE (China) Co., Ltd. Information Technologies, Inc. Munzinger Straße 3-5 24th Floor, Shanghai MAXDO Center, 8200 West Tower Avenue D-79111 Freiburg…

GE Corometrics 170 Series Service Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. GE Manuals
  4. Medical Equipment
  5. Corometrics 170 Series
  6. Service manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Corometrics

170 Series

®

SERVICE MANUAL

MANUAL P/N 2000947-004 REV. C

loading

Related Manuals for GE Corometrics 170 Series

Summary of Contents for GE Corometrics 170 Series

  • Page 1
    Corometrics 170 Series ® SERVICE MANUAL MANUAL P/N 2000947-004 REV. C…
  • Page 3
    Corometrics 170 Series ® SERVICE MANUAL MANUAL P/N 2000947-004 REV. C…
  • Page 4
    Corometrics and Marquette are registered trademarks of GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. GE is a registered trademark of General Electric Company. All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Turning the Monitor On ……….4-7 Revision C Corometrics 170 Series 2000947-004…

  • Page 6
    Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) ……..6-24 Corometrics 170 Series…
  • Page 7
    Preventative Maintenance Inspection ……..9-5 Revision C Corometrics 170 Series 2000947-004…
  • Page 8
    Block Diagrams……….. . . 11-19 Corometrics 170 Series…
  • Page 9: Safety

    Chapter 1 Safety The information presented in this section is important for the safety of both the patient and operator and also serves to enhance equipment reliability. This chapter describes how the terms Danger, Warning, Caution, Important, and Note are used throughout the manual.

  • Page 10: General Information

    Responsibility of the Manufacturer GE is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability, and performance if: assembly operations, extensions, readjustments, modifications, or repairs are carried out by persons authorized by GE;…

  • Page 11: Definitions Of Terminology

    Safety: Definitions of Terminology Definitions of Terminology Six types of special notices are used throughout this manual. They are: Danger, Warning, Caution, Contraindication, Important, and Note. The warnings and cautions in this Safety section relate to the equipment in general and apply to all aspects of the monitor.

  • Page 12: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, And Precautions

    Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions Warnings WARNINGS ACCIDENTAL SPILLS—In the event that fluids are accidentally spilled on the monitor, take the monitor out of operation and inspect for damage. APPLICATION—This monitor is not designed for direct cardiac connection.

  • Page 13
    Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions WARNINGS ELECTROSURGERY—The monitor is not designed for use with high-frequency surgical devices. In addition, measurements may be affected in the presence of strong electromagnetic sources such as electrosurgery equipment. EXPLOSION HAZARD—Do not use this equipment in the presence of flammable anesthetics or inside an oxygen tent.
  • Page 14
    Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions WARNINGS LINE ISOLATION MONITOR TRANSIENTS—Line isolation monitor transients may resemble actual cardiac waveforms, and thus cause incorrect heart rate determinations and alarm activation (or inhibition). STRANGULATION—Make sure all patient cables, leadwires, and tubing are positioned away from the patient’s head to minimize the risk of accidental strangulation.
  • Page 15
    GE Service Representative. DAILY TESTING—It is essential that the monitor and accessories be inspected every day. It is recommended practice to initiate the monitor’s self-test feature at the beginning of each…
  • Page 16
    Turn equipment in the vicinity off and on to isolate the offending equipment. Reorient or relocate the other receiving device. Increase the separation between the interfering equipment and this equipment. If assistance is required, contact your GE Service Representative. 170 Series Monitor Revision C…
  • Page 17: Equipment Symbols

    Safety: Equipment Symbols Equipment Symbols The following is a list of symbols used on products manufactured by GE. Some symbols may not appear on your unit. Table 1-2. Equipment Symbols ATTENTION: Consult accompanying documents. TYPE B EQUIPMENT. Type B equipment is…

  • Page 18
    Safety: Equipment Symbols For your notes 1-10 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 19: Introduction

    Chapter 2 Introduction This section lists the indications for use for monitors in the 170 Series as well as provides an explanation of the different patient monitoring modalities. This section summarizes the clinical applications of monitors in the 170 Series: Indications for Use .

  • Page 20: Indications For Use

    Introduction: Indications for Use Indications for Use Models 171 and 172 Models 171 and 172 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use in the monitoring of the fetus during the antepartum period as well as throughout labor and delivery. Each monitor also has an optional monitoring mode to detect fetal body movements. Models 173 and 174 Models 173 and 174 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use in the monitoring of the fetus throughout labor and delivery.

  • Page 21: Monitoring Methods

    Introduction: Monitoring Methods Monitoring Methods The following is a summary of all the clinical monitoring methods found in the 170 Series. Fetal Heart Rate External Method, Pulsed Doppler Ultrasound Ultrasound monitoring is available on all 170 Series Monitors. Models 171 and 173 provide a single ultrasound channel, while Models 172 and 174 provide two ultrasound channels.

  • Page 22: Features

    Introduction: Features Features The 170 Series is a family of fetal monitors offering various combinations of modalities to suit your institution’s needs. Each monitor boasts the following qualities: The strip chart recorder is a quiet, easy-to-load, high resolution thermal array printer.

  • Page 23: About Your Monitor

    Introduction: About Your Monitor About Your Monitor This manual describes all monitors in the 170 Series; therefore some sections may not apply to your model monitor. Refer to Table 2-1. Model 171 The Model 171 Antepartum Fetal Monitor provides singleton ultrasound and external uterine activity monitoring.

  • Page 24
    For your notes 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 25: Controls, Indicators, And Connectors

    Chapter 3 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors This section describes all possible controls, indicators, and connectors in the 170 Series. This section contains the following information: Front Panel Controls……..Front Panel Displays and Indicators.

  • Page 26: Front Panel Controls

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls Front Panel Controls Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls (Model 172 shown) Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls Symbol Name Power Record Paper Advance Mark/Offset Setup Volume 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…

  • Page 27
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls UA Reference Alarm Silence Power Button and Indicator Pressing the blue Power button turns the monitor on and illuminates the green indicator to the left of the button. Pressing the button again puts the monitor in standby and extinguishes the indicator.
  • Page 28
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls Setup Button Pressing and holding this button while the monitor is on enters a user setup mode for configuring the monitor. Pressing and holding this button during power up enters a service setup mode. Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures”…
  • Page 29
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls UA Reference Button The UA Reference button is used to set the uterine activity pressure reference. This button is also used during setup. Setting a Baseline for External Monitoring (Tocotransducer) Briefly pressing the UA Reference button sets the pressure baseline at a preset default.
  • Page 30: Front Panel Displays And Indicators

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators Front Panel Displays and Indicators Fetal Heart Rate Display(s) and Indicator(s) FHR Display A three-digit yellow numeric display indicates the fetal heart rate in beats per minute. The value flashes during an alarm condition. Heartbeat Indicator A yellow heart shaped indicator flashes with each detected valid heartbeat for the fetal heart.

  • Page 31
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators Alarms Disabled Indicator This yellow indicator illuminates when all alarms have been disabled. The indicator is unlit when alarms are enabled. Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” information on enabling/disabling alarms. Audio Alarm Indicator Active Patient Alarms For active patient alarms, this yellow indicator flashes;…
  • Page 32: Front Panel Connectors

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Front Panel Connectors Model 171 Connectors Figure 3-2. Model 171 Connectors Ultrasound Connector The ultrasound connector is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the fetal heart rate display.

  • Page 33
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Model 172 Connectors Figure 3-3. Model 172 Connectors Primary Ultrasound Connector The primary ultrasound connector is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart rate display.
  • Page 34
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Model 173 Connectors Figure 3-4. Model 173 Connectors Ultrasound Connector The ultrasound connector is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart display.
  • Page 35
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors Model 174 Connectors Figure 3-5. Model 174 Connectors Combi-Connector (Primary Ultrasound or FECG) The combi-connector is a blue connector with a dark grey inner center. This round receptacle is mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug or a Corometrics FECG cable/legplate plug.
  • Page 36: Strip Chart Recorder

    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder Strip Chart Recorder Figure 3-6. Strip Chart Recorder The strip chart recorder is located on the right side of the front panel. Latches on each side of the recorder open the paper drawer. Two styles of paper are available: 30-240 BPM scale and 50-210 BPM scale.

  • Page 37
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder Uterine Activity Grid The uterine activity trend prints in black on the bottom (or right) grid of the strip chart paper. Refer to the “170 Series Operator’s Manual” for more information about uterine activity trends and annotations.
  • Page 38: Rear Panel Connectors

    AC wall outlet. The connector is labeled . The power supply is a CONNECT TO GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY universal AC-to-DC converter which can accept an AC input in the range 100–230 VAC.

  • Page 39
    Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Rear Panel Connectors Nurse Call Interface This connector is intended for future interfacing to a standard Nurse Call System. RS-232C Connectors Two RS-232C connectors are provided for interfacing to peripheral equipment such a maternal non-invasive blood pressure monitor a central information system that uses Hewlett-Packard’s Digital Series Interface Protocol Contact your Service Representative for more information.
  • Page 40
    For your notes 3-16 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 41: Setup Procedures

    Chapter 4 Setup Procedures This section contains information about configuring a 170 Series Monitor to meet the individual needs of your clinic or hospital. Use of the monitor will vary according to the accessories attached to it, the clinical applications in which it is used, and the personal preferences of the users.

  • Page 42: Loading Strip Chart Paper

    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Loading Strip Chart Paper The required paper for use with the 170 Series Monitor is: catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/CAO (HR scale of 30–240 BPM); or catalog number (REF) 4305BAO/DAO (HR scale of 50–210 BPM). CAUTIONS LOADING PAPER—The instructions for loading paper into a 120 or 170 Series Monitor are different than the instructions for…

  • Page 43
    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper To install Corometrics catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/BAO/CAO/DAO chart paper in the 170 Series Monitor, follow these steps: CAUTION LOADING PAPER—Paper loading instructions for a 170 or 120 Series Monitor are different than other Corometrics monitors with which you may be familiar.
  • Page 44
    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Fan the pack of Z-fold paper on all sides to loosen any folds and to ensure proper feed of the paper throughout the recorder. Figure 4-3. Fanning the Paper Hold the package of paper so that: the black squares are on the bottom of the pack;…
  • Page 45
    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Unfold two sheets from the top of the pack so that they extend toward you. Figure 4-5. Creating a Paper Leader Place the pack in the drawer so that the pack is laying flat in the bottom of the paper tray.
  • Page 46
    Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Pull the paper leader taut at an angle between remaining pack and the paper guides. The balance of the paper pack should stay flat in the drawer as shown in Figure 4-7. (The paper guides are shown in Figure 4-8.) Pull paper…
  • Page 47: Turning The Monitor On

    Series Monitor. Connect the AC adapter into the power supply connector labeled: CONNECT TO GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY Figure 4-9. Connecting the AC Adapter Connect one end of the detachable line cord to the AC adapter; connect the other end into a hospital grade grounded wall outlet.

  • Page 48: Monitor Self-Test Routines

    Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines Monitor Self-Test Routines NOTE: Ensure paper is installed in the recorder in order to verify a successful recorder test. Each 170 Series Monitor contains a self-test routine which checks the internal circuitry of the monitor, the displays and indicators, and the strip chart recorder. The self-test routine is automatically initiated each time you turn on the monitor.

  • Page 49
    Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS 4305CAO 41153 PAGES REMAING 30-240 HR Scale TEST: ARE ALL DOTS PRINTED? mm Hg Figure 4-11. Recorder Test Revision C 170 Series Monitor 2000947-004…
  • Page 50: Customizing The Monitor

    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Customizing the Monitor User Setup Mode The monitor includes a user setup mode where you can: enable/disable alarm functionality set the high alarm limit for the fetal heart rate set the low alarm limit for the fetal heart rate set the alarm volume set the time and date Service Setup Mode…

  • Page 51
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Setting or value for selected feature (e.g. Monitor Feature Code FHR Alarms On or 180 (e.g. FHR Alarms or BPM High Alarm Limit). High Alarm Limit). EXAMPLE Press to enter the user setup mode. ( or ) to change the number.
  • Page 52
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor You can enter the user setup mode during an active monitoring session. The fetal heart rate and uterine activity trends print without interruption and the FHR tones remain audible; however you will be unable to see the heart rate and uterine activity values on the display while in the user setup mode.
  • Page 53
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor NOTE: If you press the button to exit the setup mode (user or service) Power any changes you made will not be stored in memory. NOTE: You must exit by pressing the button in order for changes to Setup take effect.
  • Page 54
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Table 4-2. Summary of User Setup Codes Code Setting or Value (UA Display) (Primary FHR Display) Code Description 0 = off (disabled) FHR Alarms 1 = on (enabled) FHR High Alarm Limit 140–210 (BPM, in increments of 5 BPM) FHR Low Alarm Limit 50–140 (BPM, in increments of 5 BPM) FHR Alarm Volume…
  • Page 55
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Table 4-3. Summary of Service Setup Codes Code (UA Display) Setting Or Value (Primary FHR Display) Code # Code Description ECG artifact elimination (173, 174 only) 0 = off; 1 = on heartbeat coincidence (172, 173, 174 only) 0 = off;…
  • Page 56
    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Table 4-4. Summary of Factory Defaults Setup Option Factory Default Hospital/Clinic Setting FHR Alarms FHR High Alarm Limit 160 BPM FHR Low Alarm Limit 120 BPM FHR Alarm Volume Eastern Standard Time or Daylight- Time/Date Saving Time—whichever is applicable *ECG Artifact Elimination…
  • Page 57: Printing A Summary Of Configuration Settings

    Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor Printing a Summary of Configuration Settings To print the software version number and a summary of configuration settings on the strip chart paper: NOTE: You can only enter the service setup mode from a power off state. Enter the service mode: Press and hold the button…

  • Page 58: Quick Reference Card

    Setup Procedures: Quick Reference Card Quick Reference Card Your monitor was shipped with a Quick Reference Card in the appropriate language. The front side lists the user setup codes while the reverse lists the service setup codes. The card is laminated and comes with hook and loop adhesives to attach to your monitor.

  • Page 59
    Setup Procedures: Quick Reference Card Revision C 170 Series Monitor 4-19 2000947-004…
  • Page 60: Flasher Software Utility Upgrade

    Setup Procedures: Flasher Software Utility Upgrade Flasher Software Utility Upgrade The Corometrics Flasher is a software utility program which uses one of the monitor’s RS-232 serial ports to upgrade to a newer software release; or to install a purchased option such as fetal movement detection. Each Flasher disk contains the software upgrade for one-time use only.

  • Page 61: Theory Of Operation

    Chapter 5 Theory of Operation This section of the manual contains the electronic theory of operation for the 170 Series Monitor. When possible, references are made to the appropriate schematic contained in “Chapter 11, Parts Lists” of this manual Throughout this chapter, signal names ending with an asterisk (*) are active low. This chapter contains the following information: Functional Overview .

  • Page 62: Functional Overview

    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Functional Overview For all 170 Series Monitors, the Main Board controls the majority of the 170 Series functionality including: antepartum (US, TOCO) front ends and connector(s) uterine activity front end and connector seven-segment displays user-interface buttons peripheral device communications processing For Models 173 and 174, a separate FECG/IUP Board controls:…

  • Page 63
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-1. Main Power Connector Pin Number Description +12 Vdc Input Negative Input Shield Figure 5-2. Main Power Connector Revision C 170 Series Monitor 2000947-004…
  • Page 64
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-2. Recorder Printhead Connector Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Recorder Signal Description Board) +24V Input +24 Volts for Recorder +24V Input +24 Volts for Recorder +24V Input +24 Volts for Recorder +24V Input +24 Volts for Recorder…
  • Page 65
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-3. Recorder Motor Connector Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative to Signal Description Main board) No Connection Output Motor Phase 3 Output Motor Phase 4 +5VM Output +5 Volts for Motor No Connection Output Motor Phase 2 Output…
  • Page 66
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-5. RS-232 Connector 1 Pin Number Signal Name Signal Description 200 mA Fused Request to Send Output from Monitor Receive Data Input to Monitor Signal Ground Signal Ground Transmit Data Output from Monitor Clear to Send Input to Monitor 200 mA Fused Table 5-6.
  • Page 67
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-7. Speaker Connector Pin Number Signal Name Signal Description SPKR-LO Speaker Low Side Connection SPKR-HI Speaker High Side Connection Table 5-8. Remote Mark Connectors (Remote Event Marker and Fetal Acoustic Stimulator) Pin Number Signal Name Signal Description Remote Event Marker or Fetal Acoustic Stimulator Shunt…
  • Page 68
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-9. Ultrasound Connector(s) Pin # Signal Name Signal Description No Connection No Connection Chassis Ground XMIT/RCV SHIELD Shield for Transmit/Receive XMIT/RCV Transmit/Receive No Connection No Connection No Connection Chassis Ground No Connection U/S ENABLE* Enable for Ultrasound Channel Chassis Ground * Active low.
  • Page 69
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-10. FECG Connector (Model 173) Pin # Signal Name Signal Description No Connection FECGEN* Enable for FECG Channel Chassis Ground No Connection No Connection Left Arm Right Arm SHIELD Shield No Connection No Connection No Connection Right Leg * Active low.
  • Page 70
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-11. Ultrasound/FECG Combi-Connector (Model 174) Pin # Signal Name Signal Description No Connection FECGEN* Enable for FECG Channel ISOGND Isolated Ground XMIT/RCV SHIELD Shield for Transmit/Receive (isolated ground) XMIT/RCV Transmit/Receive (isolated ground) Left Arm Right Arm SHIELD Shield (isolated ground)
  • Page 71
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-12. Uterine Activity Connector Pin# Signal Name Signal Description +PRESSURE Positive Input to Pressure Amplifier –PRESSURE Negative Input to Pressure Amplifier No Connection +4 VOLT +4 Volt Reference EXCITATION No Connection +4 Volt Reference Ground (EXCITATION REF) UA SHIELD Shield…
  • Page 72
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-13. Telemetry Connector Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Main Signal Description Board) TMARK/ Input Telemetry Mark Line (active low) TELPR/ Input Telemetry Present (active low) NC (171/172) No Connection (171/172) Input TECGEN/ (173) Telemetry FECG Enable (173/174) No Connection…
  • Page 73
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-14. Display Interface (J18) Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Main Signal Description Board) Output Main Board Data Bit 6 Output Main Board Data Bit 5 Output Main Board Data Bit 7 DISPLCS* Output Not Used…
  • Page 74
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-15. Membrane Switch Panel Interface (J19) Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Main Signal Description Board) UAREF* Input UA Ref Switch Input PWRANODE Output Power Indicator LED Anode REC* Input Recorder On Switch Input Output No Connection MARK*…
  • Page 75
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-16. FECG/UA Option Interface Part One (J16), Models 173/174 Only Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Main Signal Description Board) +12V Output +12 V for FECG Isolated Power Supply Output +12 V Ground Output +5 V Supply +7.5V…
  • Page 76
    Theory of Operation: Functional Overview Table 5-17. FECG/UA Option Interface Part Two (J15), Models 173/174 Only Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Main Signal Description Board) Output Right Arm Input from Patient Connector Output Left Arm Input from Patient Connector Input Right Leg Drive Signal from FECG/IUP Board SHIELDF…
  • Page 77: Main Board Theory Of Operation

    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Main Board Theory of Operation Figure 5-10 provides a block diagram of the Main Board in the 170 Series Monitor. The board number varies according to the particular model in the series as summarized in Table 5-18.

  • Page 78
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Audio Module Status/Switch Input Module Communications Module • Audio amplifier • Front panel switch input • Quad async UART • Ultrasound volume controls buffers • RS-232 transceivers • ECG/alarm-tone volume • Rear panel, recorder, and control front-end status buffers Recorder Interface…
  • Page 79
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Processing Block The processing block consists of the processor, system memory, battery RAM (with real time clock), and address decoder PAL. Figure 5-11 provides a block diagram of the processing block. System Flash Memory System Boot Flash Memory System SDRAM Memory •…
  • Page 80
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation The processor (U1) is an Hitachi SH3 used with a 32-bit data bus and 24-bit address Ω Ω bus. Series 100 resistors and 100 k pull-up resistors are provided for all address, data bus and output lines. The series resistors limit transient response resulting in better EMI performance.
  • Page 81
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation System Flash ROM Decoder Bank 1 Processor Address/Data and Control System Flash ROM Decoder Bank 2 Recorder Control Decoder and Latch • Head strobes • Head supply control • Head protection Recorder Control Latch Decoder Motor phase latches General Decoder and Latch…
  • Page 82
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Display Interface Module The display interface consists of a data buffer (U14) for D0–D7 which interfaces to the ICM7228A seven-segment LED driver IC (U1 on the display board), and D flip- flop U3 which drives the ±1 UA segments through Q1–Q4 transistors. Data lines have 100 Ω…
  • Page 83
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Communications Module The communications section consists of quad UART U21 and RS-232 transceivers U19 and U20. The baud rate frequencies are generated from crystal X3 (3.6864 MHz). Two of the RS-232 channels are used for external communications while the remaining two provide spare internal channels.
  • Page 84
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Recorder Interface Module The recorder interface consists of motor control, paper status logic, and printhead control logic. The motor control consists of latch U3, buffer U6, and FET transistors Q5–Q8. The four phase signals are generated by the processor using U3. These phases are translated to 5 V and buffered by U6 to drive the FETs which in turn drive the unipolar motor.
  • Page 85
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation to Data Bus to Motor Motor Control Latch Paper Status Lines Status Read Buffer from PAL Device Printhead Control Latch to Printhead • strobes • load line • clock • data Printhead Protection Circuitry Printhead Data Shift Register Figure 5-16.
  • Page 86
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Ultrasound Module Model 171 and Model 173 Monitors contain a single ultrasound channel board. Model 172 and Model 174 Monitors contain a dual ultrasound channel board. The theory contained in this section references the dual ultrasound board but is applicable to the single ultrasound board as well.
  • Page 87
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Table 5-19. PAL Outputs Pin Number Signal Name Signal Description TRANS_BURST Operates the Ultrasound Transmitter. DET_BURST1 Activates the Demodulator. 575KC Synchronizes the Power Supplies USMODE Signals the Processor that the US Channel is Active PIN1 Selects Channel 1 Transducer PIN2…
  • Page 88
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Ultrasound Oscillator Internal gates located in integrated circuit U50, X4, and associated components comprise a crystal-controlled oscillator running at 4.604 MHz. The inverted output of this oscillator is the clock that is used to clock latch U48; therefore changes at the outputs of U50 are not clocked out of U48 until one-half clock cycle later.
  • Page 89
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation U43 is a quad-switched capacitor integrated circuit configured as a balanced ring demodulator. Its analog inputs are connected to the differential outputs of the pre- amplifier at the secondary of T1. The switches within the device are actuated by the signal DET_BURST1.
  • Page 90
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Filtering The main filter is a band-pass amplifier with 3 dB points at 120 Hz and 300 Hz, respectively. The band width slopes are greater than 40 dB/octave. The maximum gain of the filter is 46 dB with peaking of approximately 48 dB at 250 Hz. The nominal gain in the system is approximately 36 dB and is controlled by R454.
  • Page 91
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Summing Bridge Tone Bit Amplifier Amplifier Digital Potentiometers for Volume Control (x3) Channel 1 US Audio Ultrasound Summing Audio Amplifier Channel 2 Doubler US Audio Serial Clock and Data Figure 5-18. Audio Module Block Diagram Ultrasound Envelopes The outputs of the main filters are also input to U32 and U35.
  • Page 92
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Uterine Activity Integrated circuit U33, with a gain of 200, and U34 (pin 7), with a gain of 1.25, provide a total gain of 250 for the on-board tocotransducer pressure channel. The output of U34 (pin 7) is offset +0.5 V, providing a dynamic range of –80 to +400 relative units.
  • Page 93
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Power Supplies Integrated circuit U60 is a voltage comparator that senses that the power has been removed, and inhibits battery RAM access and recorder printing when the supply drops to approximately 10 V. Integrated circuit U58 forms an R-S flip-flop.
  • Page 94
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation Power Status Comparator 5 V Linear Regulator for Audio 5 V Linear Regulator for Motor 5 V Linear Regulator for Digital Logic Switching Pre-Regulator 3.3 V Linear Regulator for Digital Logic +12 V Input 3.3 V Linear Regulator for Analog Circuitry…
  • Page 95
    Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation FECG/IUP Board Interface J16 and J15 provide the interface to the FECG/IUP Board. J15 is patient isolated. RA, LA, RL FECG Connector to Data Bus 12-Bit A/D Converter ±PRESS FECG FECG/IUP Pressure 4V REF Board Connector…
  • Page 96: Fecg/Iup Board Theory Of Operation

    Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation Isolated Power Supply Patient isolation for the FECG and the IUP catheter is accomplished by providing floating power supplies to power the FECG and IUP front end electronics. Integrated circuit U12 provides non-overlapping drive signals to dual FET U9 which in turn drives the primary of transformer T1.

  • Page 97
    Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation Pressure Channel The input to the pressure channel is to resistors R9 and R10 with the signal names of –PRESS and +PRESS respectively. Resistors R9 through R12 and capacitors C16 through C18 provide RF filtering, and in conjunction with diode limiters D1 and D2, provide protection from electro-static discharge.Instrumentation amplifier U5 provides a gain of 248 which is given by (49.4E3/R13)+1.
  • Page 98
    Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation FECG Channel The input to the FECG channel is two resistors R42 and R43 with the signal names of RA and LA respectively. Resistors R42, R43, R45, and R462 and capacitors C38 through C40 provide RF filtering, and in conjunction with diode limiters D3 through D6 provide protection from electro-static discharge.
  • Page 99
    Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation ground on the non-floating side of the barrier. It is then sensed by the system microprocessor. The IUP enable ties resistor R97 to the floating ground when the IUP transducer cable is attached. This causes approximately 4.5 mA to flow in the LED of opto- coupler U17.
  • Page 100
    Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation To Main Board A/D To Main Board Front End Converter for Processing FECG/IUP Connector Isolated Side Unisolated Side Connector Connector • FECG Low Noise Differential Filtering Amplifier with Optical and Gain Protection Circuitry Isolation Stages •…
  • Page 101
    Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation Table 5-20. FECG/UA Unisolated Output (P16), Models 173/174 Only Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Main Signal Description Board) +12 V for FECG Isolated Power Supply +12 V (173) (Model 173 only) Output +11.6V (174) +11.6 V for FECG Isolated Power Supply…
  • Page 102
    Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation Table 5-21. FECG/UA Isolated Output (P15), Models 173/174 Only Signal Type Pin Number Signal Name (Relative To Main Signal Description Board) Output Right Arm Input from Patient Connector Output Left Arm Input from Patient Connector Input Right Leg Drive Signal from FECG Board SHIELDF…
  • Page 103: Functional Checkout Procedure

    Chapter 6 Functional Checkout Procedure Like all electronic monitoring devices, internal and external components are subject to fatigue, wear, and the potential for failure over time and under varying conditions of use. Additionally, events such as dropping the monitor, spilling liquids on the monitor, or crimping the lead wires or patient cables can cause damage which may affect the overall system performance.

  • Page 104: Equipment Required

    Reusable Strain Gauge with holder (4007BAX); or Reusable Strain Gauge without holder (4007LAX); or Disposable Strain Gauge (4009AAX) Strain Gauge Transducer NOTE: These items are no longer sold by GE. However, transducers in the field are compatible with the 170 Series Monitor. Model 325 Simulator (14203A/B)

  • Page 105: General

    Visually inspect the monitor, patient cables, and other accessories for cracks, fissures, or other signs of wear or damage. Do not use any monitor or accessory which appears to be worn or damaged. If unsure, contact your GE Service Representative to arrange for evaluation, replacement, or repair of the suspect item(s).

  • Page 106: Monitor Self-Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Monitor Self-Test Monitor Self-Test The 170 Series Monitor contains test routines which verify the unit’s calibration and internal circuitry. These routines are initiated by each time the monitor is turned on. The test results are printed on the strip chart recorder paper, verifying the integrity of the unit.

  • Page 107: Front Panel Pushbutton Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Front Panel Pushbutton Test Front Panel Pushbutton Test This procedure ensures the functionality of the front panel pushbuttons. Disconnect all transducers from the front panel. Enter the service setup mode (see page 4-10) and set the recorder speed to 1 cm/ min.

  • Page 108: Connecting The Simulator

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Connecting the Simulator Connecting the Simulator This part of the procedure prepares the simulator for use. NOTE: You must use a Model 325 Simulator for the functional checkout procedure. (Monitors in the 170 Series do not work with Model 305 Simulators.) Ensure the Model 325 switch is in the off position.

  • Page 109: Fecg Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test FECG Test This portion of the functional checkout procedure ensures the integrity of the FECG circuitry and the heart rate channel of the recorder. Connect the Model 325 Simulator’s ECG sub-cable to the receptacle on FECG the monitor Set the switches on the Model 325 Input Simulator according to…

  • Page 110
    Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test Table 6-2. Model 325 Simulator Settings for FECG Test Section Switch Setting Main RATE Rate MANUAL FECG/MECG Mode FECG QRS Amplitude 15 µV QRS Polarity GENERAL Pattern Memory Main Mode TOCO Repeat step 5 for each of the following rates: 60, 210, and 240 BPM. Change the simulator’s switch from + to –.
  • Page 111
    Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test switch to the ∆15 position. Verify the following on 13. Set the simulator’s ECG Rate the monitor: The FHR1 value oscillates by 15 BPM. The FHR1 heartbeat indicator flashes for each input signal. The ECG “beep” is heard from the rear panel speaker. The recorder prints an oscillation of 15 BPM between 115 and 130 BPM on the top grid of the strip chart paper.
  • Page 112
    Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test Figure 6-1. FECG Ramp 6-10 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 113
    Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test Figure 6-2. FECG Artifact Elimination Revision C 170 Series Monitor 6-11 2000947-004…
  • Page 114: Legplate Inspection

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Legplate Inspection Legplate Inspection Inspect the legplate as follows: Check for a proper seal around the ground plate. Ensure that no contaminants are present on either the ground plate or the push posts. Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and connector pins. 6-12 170 Series Monitor Revision C…

  • Page 115: Ultrasound Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Test Ultrasound Test This portion of the functional checkout procedure ensures the integrity of the ultrasound circuitry and the heart rate channel of the recorder. Connect the simulator’s US sub-cable to the receptacle on the monitor. Set the switches on the Model 325 Input Simulator according to Table 6-3.

  • Page 116
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Test Table 6-3. Ultrasound Test Simulator Settings Section Switch Setting General Pattern Memory Main Mode TOCO Place the simulator’s switch in each of the individual rate settings (50, US Rate 60, 120, and 210 BPM). Verify the following on the monitor: The FHR1 value reflects the simulator setting ±…
  • Page 117
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Test Figure 6-3. Ultrasound Ramp Revision C 170 Series Monitor 6-15 2000947-004…
  • Page 118: Fetal Movement Detection Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Fetal Movement Detection Test Fetal Movement Detection Test This portion of the functional checkout procedure ensures the integrity of the fetal movement detection circuitry and the heart rate channel of the recorder. (Refer to Figure 6-4.) NOTE: Fetal movement detection is an option which must be installed and enabled for use on your monitor.

  • Page 119
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Fetal Movement Detection Test Figure 6-4. Fetal Movement Detection Revision C 170 Series Monitor 6-17 2000947-004…
  • Page 120: Ultrasound Transducer Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Transducer Test Ultrasound Transducer Test Inspect a Model 116/118/120/170 ultrasound transducer as follows: Ensure there are no cracks around the transducer face. Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and connector pins. Disconnect the simulator’s ultrasound cable from the front panel of the 170 Series Monitor.

  • Page 121: Uterine Activity Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Uterine Activity Test Uterine Activity Test This portion of the functional checkout procedure tests the uterine activity section of the 170 Series Monitor. Set the switches on the Model 325 Simulator according to Table 6-5. Connect the simulator’s UA sub-cable to the receptacle on the monitor.

  • Page 122
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Uterine Activity Test 11. Disconnect the Model 325 Simulator’s uterine activity sub-cable from the input receptacle on the front panel of the monitor. Verify the following on the monitor: The UA value is blank. The recorder stops printing the uterine activity trace. The recorder prints the message on the center margin of the strip UA INOP…
  • Page 123: Tocotransducer Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Tocotransducer Test Tocotransducer Test Inspect a Nautilus tocotransducer as follows: Check for any cracks or contaminants on the tocotransducer especially on the diaphragm located on the bottom of the tocotransducer. Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and connector pins. Connect the tocotransducer to the input receptacle on the front panel of the 170 Series Monitor.

  • Page 124: Strain Gauge Transducer Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Strain Gauge Transducer Test Strain Gauge Transducer Test Inspect a strain gauge as follows: Unscrew the plastic dome from the transducer and check for any cracks or contaminants on the transducer. Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and the connector pins.

  • Page 125: Pattern Memory Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Pattern Memory Test Pattern Memory Test The pattern memory of the simulator can be used to test any of the following mode combinations of the monitor. FECG/TOCO FECG/IUP US/TOCO or US2/TOCO US/IUP or US2/IUP US/FMD/TOCO US/FMD/IUP FECG/US/TOCO FECG/US/IUP NOTE: US/US2 cannot be tested simultaneously unless two Model 325 Simulators or two ultrasound transducers are used.

  • Page 126: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern)

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) FECG/US Modes Connect the Model 325 Simulator’s ECG sub-cable to the monitor’s input FECG receptacle. Connect the simulator’s US sub-cable to the monitor’s input receptacle. Set the switches on the Model 325 Simulator according to Table 6-6.

  • Page 127
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) Table 6-6. Model 325 Simulator Settings for FECG/US Test Section Switch Setting Main RATE Rate 120 BPM FECG/MECG Mode FECG QRS Amplitude 50 µV QRS Polarity Mode ULTRASOUND/FMD Level Rate RAMP General Pattern Memory Revision C 170 Series Monitor…
  • Page 128
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) Figure 6-6. Dual Heart Rate, FECG and US 6-26 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 129
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) Dual Ultrasound Modes As stated previously, the dual ultrasound mode of the 170 Series Monitor cannot be tested unless two Model 325 Simulators are used or two Nautilus ultrasound transducers. Do not attempt to test dual ultrasound using one Model 325 Simulator and one ultrasound transducer.
  • Page 130: Alarm Test

    Functional Checkout Procedure: Alarm Test Alarm Test This portion of the test ensures the integrity of the audio alarms and tests the alarm limit software. Connect the Model 325 Simulator’s US sub-cable to the monitor’s input. Press and hold (for three seconds) to enter the monitor’s setup mode.

  • Page 131
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Alarm Test Table 6-7. Alarm Test Simulator Settings Section Switch Setting Main RATE Rate MANUAL Mode General Pattern Memory 16. Use the simulator’s knob to decrease the US rate to 180 Manual Adjustment BPM. Verify that the Alarm indicator goes out and the heart rate numerics stop flashing.
  • Page 132
    Functional Checkout Procedure: Alarm Test 26. Use the simulator’s knob to increase the US signal to 100 Manual Adjustment bpm. Verify the following on the monitor: The alarm tone continues sounding. The Alarm indicator stops continues flashing. The affected heart rate numerics continue flashing. 27.
  • Page 133: Serviceable Assemblies

    Chapter 7 Serviceable Assemblies This chapter provides information to aid in performing routine service and maintenance on a 170 Series Monitor. This section of the manual is not intended as a substitute for proper professional training, or familiarity with the 170 Series Monitor.

  • Page 134: General Anti-Static Handling Precautions

    Serviceable Assemblies: General Anti-Static Handling Precautions General Anti-Static Handling Precautions The following guidelines should be followed when handling circuit boards or assemblies containing circuit boards. Following these procedures helps resist damage that can be caused by static electricity. Discharge any static charge you may have built up before handling parts. Wear a grounded, anti-static wristband at all times.

  • Page 135: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits

    Table 7-2 and ensure you have the correct kit. Unpack the kit and ensure it contains the items listed in Table 7-1. If something is missing, contact your GE Service Representative immediately. Table 7-1. Kit Summary Plug Kit Plug Type Cat.

  • Page 136
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits Handling Precautions Transducers are delicate measuring instruments and must be handled accordingly. Transducer damage can be avoided by taking the following precautions: Avoid banging or dropping transducers. Refrain from wrapping transducer cables around transducer body. Do not immerse transducers in aqueous cleaning solutions.
  • Page 137
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits Tocotransducer Cable Preparation Refer to Figure 7-1 Table 7-3 while following these steps: ⁄ Cut #24 AWG green wire (not supplied) to 1- inches long and strip each end ⁄ inch. This will be used as a jumper wire. ⁄…
  • Page 138
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits 1² ² ² Vent Tube (Nautilus only) yellow Oetiker Clamp (Nautilus only) 1 ² #24 AWG Green Jumper Wire Shield Shrink Tubing 1² #24 AWG Green Wire Figure 7-1. Tocotransducer Cable Preparation Table 7-3. Tocotransducer Cable Wiring Pin Number Pin Length Description…
  • Page 139
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits Ultrasound Transducer Cable Preparation Refer to Figure 7-2 Table 7-4 while following these steps: ⁄ Cut #24 AWG green wire (not supplied) to 1- inches long and strip each end ⁄ inch. This will be used as a jumper wire. ⁄…
  • Page 140
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits 1² Score around length of jacket 1inch. Peel jacket and remove. Separate outer braided shield and twist. For Standard ultrasound transducers, the cable is a dual coaxial cable. For Nautilus ultrasound transducers, the cable is a single coaxial cable. If present, cut black coax and fillers flush with grey jacket.
  • Page 141
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits Table 7-4. Ultrasound Cable Wiring Pin Number Pin Length Description Wire Color short — — short — — short Overall Shield #24 AWG Green LONG US Transmit/Receive Shield #24 AWG Green short White Coax —…
  • Page 142
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits FECG Cable Preparation Refer to Figure 7-3 Table 7-5 while following these steps: ⁄ Cut #26 AWG green wire (not supplied) to 2 inches long. Strip one end inch. ⁄ ⁄ Cut #26 AWG blue wire (not supplied) to 1- inches long and strip each end inch.
  • Page 143
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits 1² ² ² blue 1 ² #26 AWG Blue Jumper Wire Shrink Tubing Shield Shrink Tubing 1² #26 AWG Green Wire Figure 7-3. FECG Cable Preparation Revision C 170 Series Monitor 7-11 2000947-004…
  • Page 144
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits Table 7-5. FECG Cable Wiring Pin Number Pin Length Description Wire Color short — — short ECG Enable Blue and #26 AWG Blue Jumper LONG Ground #26 AWG Blue Jumper short — — short —…
  • Page 145
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits Plug Assembly Refer to Figure 7-4 while replacing a transducer plug. Note that the strain relief clamp (3) orientation is different between tocotransducers and all other transducers (ultrasound, FECG). In addition, the Oetiker clamp (11) is used for Nautilus Tocotransducers only.
  • Page 146
    Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits Insert the pin housing into the corresponding recess of the half-shell (with strain-relief mounting holes). Position the housing so that the two dots at the back are visible and at right angles to the plane of the half-shell. Push the cable into the strain-relief slot.
  • Page 147: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement

    Table 7-7. If something is missing, contact your GE Service Representative immediately. NOTE: Transducers are available in 5-, 8-, and 10-foot cable lengths. However, the cable assembly included in a replacement kit is available in an 8-foot length only.

  • Page 148
    Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement Equipment Required You will need the following equipment: Phillips Head Torque Driver Screw Cap Extraction Tool (cat. no. 2004084-001) Soldering Iron and Solder (ultrasound transducers only) Loctite Adhesive #454 (recommended) Anti-Static Wristband Static-Free Work Surface Reference Figures Refer to Figure 7-5…
  • Page 149
    Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement Procedure Unplug the transducer from the monitor or telemetry transmitter. Use the screw cap extraction tool to pry off the five screw caps (Figure 7-5). Discard all caps. CAUTION HANDLING–Take care not to damage the base sealing groove. Remove the five sealing screws and discard.
  • Page 150
    Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement Secure the molded strain relief end of the cable in the cable nut: Place the flat side of the cable nut against the case base. Rotate the cable assembly into the cable nut; continue threading until the two are completely seated.
  • Page 151: Removing The Monitor Top Cover

    Serviceable Assemblies: Removing the Monitor Top Cover Removing the Monitor Top Cover Unplug the AC adapter from the monitor to completely remove power. Remove the four bottom panel screws. CAUTION TOP COVER—The top cover remains tethered to the main board via the display board and membrane switch panel cables. Do not attempt to remove the monitor cover without first disconnecting these cables.

  • Page 152: Tocotransducer Calibration

    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration Tocotransducer Calibration Any of the following three transducers can be used with the 170 Series Monitor: Corometrics Nautilus Tocotransducer Corometrics Trimline Tocotransducer Corometrics Large-Button Tocotransducer Pin 1* –P Pin 2* +4 V Pin 4* 475 W Pin 6* *Front Panel UA Connector Figure 7-7.

  • Page 153
    Unpack the kit and ensure it contains the items listed in Table 7-10. If something is missing, contact your GE Service Representative immediately. The text of the instruction sheet is repeated here for informational purposes.
  • Page 154
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration Equipment Required IMPORTANT WEIGHT TYPE—The specified weight, cat. no. (REF) 2003005- 001, is designed specifically for testing Nautilus Tocotransducers. You will need the following equipment: Phillips Head Torque Driver Screw Cap Extraction Tool (cat. no. 2004084-001) Digital Voltmeter: DM501 or equivalent with x1 probe or leads Common Mode Rejection (CMR) Test Jack (Figure 7-7…
  • Page 155
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration Calibration for Cat. No. (REF) 2264 GAX/HAX/JAX/KAX/LAX/MAX Refer to Figure 7-6 during calibration. Set the Gain (R11) and Offset (R6) potentiometers fully clockwise. Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to TP2 on the Main Board; connect the negative lead to TP9.
  • Page 156
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration Calibration for Cat. No. (REF) 2264 AAX/BAX/CAX/DAX/EAX/FAX Refer to Figure 7-6 during calibration. Set the Gain (R15) and Offset (R5) potentiometers fully counterclockwise. Set the Offset Trim (R6) potentiometer to its mid-position—approximately six turns from fully counterclockwise. Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to TP2 on the Main Board;…
  • Page 157
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration Trimline Tocotransducers The Corometrics Trimline Tocotransducer must be calibrated using the following procedure for use with the 170 Series Monitor. Equipment Required Digital voltmeter: DM501 or equivalent with x1 probe or leads Common Mode Rejection (CMR) Test Jack (Refer to Figure 7-7 Table 7-8.)
  • Page 158
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration NOTE: When performing this procedure, keep in mind that due to the nature of the circuitry in the Trimline Tocotransducer, there is a stabilization time of approximately two seconds for any output voltage. After adjusting a potentiometer, verify that the output has stabilized prior to taking a voltage reading.
  • Page 159
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration 13. Torque seal all potentiometers. Affix new sealing tape and re-install the nameplate. CAUTION OFFSET VOLTAGES—Due to offset voltages induced by the circuitry in the Trimline Tocotransducer, it is necessary to adjust the change in voltage between the WEIGHT ON condition and WEIGHT OFF condition—instead of simply adjusting the output voltage for each condition.
  • Page 160
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration Large-Button Tocotransducer The Corometrics Large-Button Tocotransducer must be calibrated using the following procedure for use with the 170 Series Monitor. Equipment Required Digital voltmeter: DM501 or equivalent with x1 probe or leads Common Mode Rejection (CMR) Test Jack (Refer to Figure 7-7 Table 7-8.)
  • Page 161
    Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to TP2; connect the negative lead to TP9. Apply power to the 170 Series Monitor; then plug the CMR Test Jack into the monitor’s front panel uterine activity connector. Measure the voltage at TP2 and record the value.
  • Page 162: Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover Replacement

    Unpack the kit and ensure it contains the items listed in Table 7-12. If something is missing, contact your GE Service Representative immediately. The text of the instruction sheet is repeated here for informational purposes. Table 7-11. Kit Summary…

  • Page 163
    Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover Replacement Procedure Turn off the monitor. Unplug the transducer from the monitor. Use the screw cap extraction tool to pry off the five screw caps (Refer to Figure 7-5). Discard all caps. CAUTION HANDLING—Take care not to damage the transducer base sealing groove.
  • Page 164: Nautilus Transducer Reassembly

    Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Reassembly Nautilus Transducer Reassembly CAUTIONS VISIBLE INSPECTION—Ensure the base sealing groove, flat- seal o-ring, sealing surface, and sealing screws are free of visible surface defects, dust, dirt, and foreign material. SINGLE-USE COMPONENTS—Do not reuse case top, flat-seal o-ring, sealing screws, or screw caps.

  • Page 165
    Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Reassembly burr Figure 7-10. Curved Screw Cap Shape, Nautilus Transducer burr Figure 7-11. Curved Screw Cap Alignment, Nautilus Transducer Revision C 170 Series Monitor 7-33 2000947-004…
  • Page 166: Testing A Repaired Transducer (Toco Or Us)

    Serviceable Assemblies: Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US) Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US) CAUTIONS Following completion of the cable replacement procedure: LEAKAGE TEST—Perform a leakage and dielectric test on the transducer per applicable standards. FUNCTIONAL TEST—Perform a functional response test on the transducer.

  • Page 167: Replacing The Main Board

    Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Main Board Replacing the Main Board Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver Main board part no. 2000243 (Model 171) part no. 15269 (Model 172) part no. 2000324 (Model 173) part no. 2000973 (Model 174) Procedure Disconnect the AC adapter from the monitor to completely remove power. Remove the monitor top cover, disconnecting the display board cable and membrane switch panel cable from J18 and J19, respectively.

  • Page 168: Replacing The Fecg/Iup Board

    Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the FECG/IUP Board Replacing the FECG/IUP Board Follow the instructions for “Replacing the Main Board” page 7-35 with the following exceptions: Retain the existing Main Board Mount a new FECG/IUP Board onto the existing Main Board 7-36 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…

  • Page 169: Replacing The Membrane Switch Panel

    Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel The membrane switch panel cannot be removed from the top cover without possible damage to the monitor. You must order a new top cover assembly in order to replace the membrane switch panel.

  • Page 170
    Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel Procedure Disconnect the AC adapter from the monitor to completely remove power. Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” page 7-19. Unscrew the top cover standoff and set aside. You may need a wrench to loosen the standoff.
  • Page 171
    Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel alignment tabs Figure 7-12. Top Cover Alignment Tabs alignment slots Figure 7-13. Bottom Enclosure Alignment Slots Revision C 170 Series Monitor 7-39 2000947-004…
  • Page 172: Replacing A Front Panel Connector

    Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing a Front Panel Connector Replacing a Front Panel Connector Equipment Required Screwdriver Connector (see Table 7-14) De-soldering tool Soldering iron Solder Table 7-14. Front Panel Connectors Connector Color Part Number US/US2 Blue 212174 UA (TOCO/IUP) White 212173 FECG Dark Grey 212175…

  • Page 173: Servicing The Recorder

    Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder Servicing the Recorder Replacing the Printhead Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver Vernier caliper Printhead (part no. 2000133-001) Procedure Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power. Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” page 7-19.

  • Page 174
    Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder Adjusting the Printhead Current Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver Digital voltmeter 30 Ω, 20 W, 5% resistor Procedure CAUTION RECORDER STATUS—Ensure the recorder remains off during this procedure. Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power. Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover”…
  • Page 175
    Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder Aligning the Printhead Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver Vernier caliper Printing a Continuous Test Pattern Re-connect the AC adapter cord to the monitor. Access the service setup mode: press and hold the button ; press and Setup hold the blue button;…
  • Page 176
    Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder Figure 7-14. Recorder Test Pattern 7-44 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 177
    For best results: Use only GE paper. Ensure paper is correctly loaded as instructed on page 4-2. Use a vernier caliper to adjust the printhead to its nominal position.
  • Page 178
    Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder Replacing the Recorder Motor Assembly Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver Motor assembly (part no. 15136A) Procedure Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power. Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” page 7-19.
  • Page 179
    Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder Replacing the Sensor Board Equipment Required Phillips screwdriver Sensor board (part no. 15231) Sensor board insulator (part no. 2000147-001) Cable tie, x2 (part no. 608036) Cable mount adhesive back, x2 (part no. 608030) Procedure Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power. Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover”…
  • Page 180
    Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder 18. Replace the microswitch and secure both screws. Make sure the microswitch clicks when the drawer is closed. 19. Replace the main board mounting plate, pulling the plate forward, parallel with the roller while tightening the screws. 20.
  • Page 181: Boot Rom Error Codes

    Boot ROM Error Codes If the error codes in the following table display during the boot process, cycle power. If the error codes reappear when you power up, phone GE Technical Support for assistance. Table 7-15. Boot ROM Error Codes…

  • Page 182
    Serviceable Assemblies: Boot ROM Error Codes For your notes 7-50 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 183: Peripheral Devices

    Chapter 8 Peripheral Devices The 170 Series Monitor allows connection to optional peripheral equipment. This section discusses the following: Remote Marks Connectors ……. . . Telemetry Connector .

  • Page 184: Remote Marks Connectors

    Peripheral Devices: Remote Marks Connectors Remote Marks Connectors Remote Mark, Fetal Acoustic Stimulator This receptacle is provided for connection to a Corometrics Model 146 Fetal Acoustic Stimulator. Remote Mark, Remote Event Marker This receptacle is provided for connection to an optional Corometrics Remote Event Marker.

  • Page 185: Telemetry Connector

    Peripheral Devices: Telemetry Connector Telemetry Connector This connector is for future interfacing to the receiver of a Corometrics Model 340 Telemetry System. NOTE: The monitor, receiver, and transmitter must all be turned on. NOTE: When any telemetry mode is detected (US or TOCO), all equivalent front panel modes (US, US2, or TOCO) are ignored.

  • Page 186: Rs-232 Connectors

    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors RS-232 Connectors Two RS-232C serial interface receptacles (RJ-45) allow connecting the 170 Series Monitor to the following devices: Critikon Model 1846/1846SX Blood Pressure Monitor Quantitative Sentinel/Perinatal System Nellcor N-400 Fetal Pulse Oximeter 115-Compatible Device Table 8-1 lists the factory default settings for each port. Refer to Customizing the Monitor on page 4-10 for information on using the service setup mode to change these settings.

  • Page 187
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Ext. FSpO Select ext. FSpO for connecting to a Nellcor Fetal Pulse Oximeter. Factory The FACTORY mode is reserved for factory testing only. 115 Update Select for backward-compatibility so the 170 Series Monitor can operate in a Model 115-compatible communication mode.
  • Page 188
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Critikon Model 1846/1846SX Critikon Model 1846/1846SX Monitors can be interfaced to a 170 Series Monitor to provide a printout of NBP values on the strip chart paper. Refer to Table 8-2 for the appropriate interface cable. Connect one end to an available port (1 or 2) on the 170 Series Monitor;…
  • Page 189
    Through this interface, the 170 Series Monitor outputs FHR and UA data to a central information such as GE’s Quantitative Sentinel/Perinatal System. Annotations made at the central station can be optionally printed on the strip chart paper of the 170 Series Monitor as summarized below: Each message is preceded by a computer icon ( ).
  • Page 190
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Nellcor Puritan Bennett Model N-400 Fetal Pulse Oximeter Through this interface, FSpO readings provided by an NPB Model N-400 are printed every five minutes on the strip chart paper of the 170 Series Monitor. The reading is printed in the annotation area between the top and bottom grids. A solid diamond marker, above the data, marks the time of the reading and identifies the data source as an external device.
  • Page 191
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Table 8-2. External Device Summary 170 Series Interconnect Cable Cat. External Device Parameter(s) 170 Series Mode Baud Rate 1562AAO (1 foot) Critikon Model 1846/1846SX ext. BP 1562BAO (6 feet) Annotations 1558AAO (10 feet) Quantitative Sentinel System 1200 HP or HP w/notes (optional)
  • Page 192
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Model 115-Compatible Communications Protocols Two options provide backward-compatibility so that the 170 Series Monitor can operate in a Model 115-compatible communication mode: 115 Update Mode: The 115 Update mode outputs all available information and ignores requests from a host computer system. 115 Transmit/Receive: The 115 Transmit/Receive mode only outputs data requested from a host computer system.
  • Page 193
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors 115 Update Mode All information is transmitted from the 170 Series Monitor as soon as the information becomes available. IMPORTANT DATA REQUESTS—When set to the 115 Update Mode, the 170 Series Monitor will not respond to any requests for information sent from an external (host) computer.
  • Page 194
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors 115 Transmit/Receive Mode Once a valid request for data is received, the 170 Series Monitor will send only the information that is requested. The selection of this information is done by sending a request stream to the 170 Series Monitor. After processing the request, the 170 Series Monitor will then send only the selected parameters to the external computer.
  • Page 195
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Transmitted Data Format The format of the information transmitted from the 170 Series Monitor to the external computer is shown in Figure 8-3. NOTE: This applies to both 115 Update mode and 115 Transmit/Receive mode. The definitions of the bytes are as follows: Monitor Type This field contains a 1-byte ASCII value indicating the type of monitor sending the information.
  • Page 196
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Fetal Movement: This field contains one ASCII character representing the current status of the signal: low or high. If the data byte is a 0 (30H), then the signal is low indicating no movement is detected; if the data byte is 1 (31H), then the signal is high indicating fetal movement is detected.
  • Page 197
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Error Conditions Transmission Errors Transmission errors may be detected by the external computer as parity errors, framing errors (no valid stop bit), or invalid characters. There is no facility in the 170 Series Monitor to re-transmit any information found to contain an error. It is therefore up to the user to decide what action to take as a result of an error.
  • Page 198
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Table 8-4. Heart Rate Modes HR1 Mode HR2 Mode ASCII Character Hexadecimal Value INOP INOP FECG INOP INOP FECG FECG < INOP > Table 8-5. Uterine Activity Modes UA Mode ASCII Character Hexadecimal Value INOP TOCO 8-16 170 Series Monitor Revision C…
  • Page 199
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Cabling Information Monitor RS-232 Connector The 170 Series Monitor’s RS-232C Ports each use an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, shown Figure 8-4. The following control signals are supported: Request to Send (RTS): This output line is asserted (+12 V) whenever the 170 Series Monitor is on and operating;…
  • Page 200
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors Table 8-6. RS-232 Connector 1 Pin Number Signal Name Signal Description 200 mA Fused Request to Send Output from Monitor Receive Data Input to Monitor Signal Ground Signal Ground Transmit Data Output from Monitor Clear to Send Input to Monitor 200 mA Fused Table 8-7.
  • Page 201
    Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors 170 SERIES MONITOR SIDE DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (DTE) SIDE 8-PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL NAME 25-PIN 9 PIN 6 PIN Figure 8-5. Standard Null-Modem Cable 170 SERIES MONITOR SIDE DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (DTE) SIDE 8-PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL NAME 25-PIN 9 PIN…
  • Page 202
    For your notes 8-20 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 203: Maintenance

    Chapter 9 Maintenance All equipment, no matter how reliable, needs to be maintained on a regular basis. This chapter describes general care and cleaning instructions for the 170 Series Monitor and its accessories. If an accessory is not listed, consult the manufacturer’s instructions.

  • Page 204: Cleaning

    Maintenance: Cleaning Cleaning CAUTION PREPARATION—Unplug the monitor from the AC power source and detach all accessories from the monitor. Do not immerse accessories in any liquid. Do not use abrasive cloth or cleaners on monitor or accessories. Cleaning the Monitor Exterior To clean the exterior of the monitor, including the displays and the membrane switch panel: Wipe any fluids from the surface of the monitor.

  • Page 205
    Maintenance: Cleaning Cleaning the Tocotransducer, Ultrasound Transducer, and Legplate CAUTIONS ABRASION—Do not use abrasive cloth, sharp objects, or abrasive cleaners. ALCOHOL—Do not use Alcohol in cleaning solutions. DISCONNECTION—Detach the transducers/cables/legplate from the monitor. IMMERSION—Do not immerse transducers/cables/legplate or hold under running water. Dampen a cloth or paper towel with one of the following products;…
  • Page 206
    Maintenance: Cleaning Cleaning the UA Strain Gauge Remove the plastic dome. If desired, wash the transducer with sterile water or saline solution. Carefully clean the diaphragm seal with a cotton swab to remove deposits. Avoid excessive pressure since this may damage the diaphragm. If there are excessive stains on the diaphragm or sides of the transducer, remove with a cotton swab and solvents of increasing strength.
  • Page 207: Preventative Maintenance Inspection

    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Preventative Maintenance Inspection Equipment Required Digital Multimeter Dielectric Tester Leakage Current Tester Aluminum Foil Ultrasound Test Body (ultrasound transducer wrapped in aluminum foil) Tocotransducer Test Body (tocotransducer wrapped in aluminum foil) FECG Test Body for Model 173 or 174 only (Shorted legplate with all three leads tied together) IUP Test Body for Model 173 or 174 only (SensorTip transducer wrapped in aluminum foil)

  • Page 208
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Cleaning Clean the monitor’s exterior. Refer to “Cleaning the Monitor Exterior” page 9-2. Clean the recorder printhead. Refer to “Cleaning the Printhead” page 7- Clean the monitor’s accessories. Refer to “Cleaning the Tocotransducer, Ultrasound Transducer, and Legplate” page 9-3.
  • Page 209
    Electrical safety tests provide a method of determining if potential electrical hazards to the patient or operator of the device exist. Recommendations GE recommends that you perform all safety tests presented in this chapter: upon receipt of the device (monitor and its associated equipment) every twelve months thereafter…
  • Page 210
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Unit to Primary Leakage Configure a leakage tester to perform a unit AC line leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <300 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the primary leakage for the following conditions: Table 9-1.
  • Page 211
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Ground Leakage for US Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 212
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Line Leakage for US Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 213
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Ground Leakage for US2 Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 214
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Line Leakage for US2 Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 215
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Ground Leakage for TOCO Connect a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 216
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Line Leakage for TOCO Connect a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 217
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Ground Leakage for IUP Connect an IUP test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 218
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Line Leakage for IUP Connect an IUP test body to the monitor’s front panel input. Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 219
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Ground Leakage for FECG Connect an FECG test body to the monitor’s front panel input. FECG Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 220
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Line Leakage for FECG Connect a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s front panel input. FECG Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test. Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s button. On/Standby Verify the following: <50 µA (132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%) Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:…
  • Page 221
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Dielectric (Hi-Pot) Tests CAUTION POWER OFF—Turn OFF the 170 Series Monitor prior to performing any of the hi-pot tests. Patient–to–AC-Line Using DC Voltage for One Minute NOTE: The hi-pot tester voltage is 5.656 kVdc for these tests. Attach an US test body to the monitor’s front panel input.
  • Page 222
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Patient-to-Chassis Using AC Voltage for One Minute NOTE: The hi-pot tester voltage is 2.5 kVAC for these tests. IMPORTANT ENCLOSURE—Wrap the entire monitor enclosure in aluminum foil for these tests. Attach an US test body to the monitor’s front panel input.
  • Page 223
    Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection Mains-to-Chassis Using DC Voltage for One Minute NOTE: The hi-pot tester voltage is 5.656 kVdc for these tests. IMPORTANT ENCLOSURE—Wrap the entire monitor enclosure in aluminum foil for these tests. Connect from line to enclosure foil. pass fail Conductive Parts Isolated from Live Parts and Enclosure Using DC Voltage for…
  • Page 224
    For your notes 9-22 170 Series Monitor Revision C 2000947-004…
  • Page 225: Specifications

    Chapter 10 Specifications This section contains a detailed list of the technical specifications for the 170 Series Monitor. This chapter lists specifications for the following: General Monitor ……..10-2 Operating Modes .

  • Page 226: General Monitor

    Specifications: General Monitor General Monitor Table 10-1. General Monitor Technical Specifications Category Technical Specifications Power Requirements Nominal Line Voltage: 100–230 VAC Line Frequency: 50/60 Hz (operates over 47–63 Hz) Power Consumption (maximum): ≤30 VA Monitor DC Input: 12 Vdc at 2.5 A Physical Characteristics Height: 5.75 in (14.6 cm)

  • Page 227: Operating Modes

    Specifications: Operating Modes Operating Modes Table 10-2. Operating Mode Specifications FECG Mode Technique: Peak detecting, beat-to-beat cardiotachometer Heart Rate Counting Range: 30–240 BPM Heart Rate Resolution: ±1 BPM Artifact Elimination: Selectable, ±25 BPM artifact rejection Countable Input Signal Range: 15 µV to 2 mV peak-to-peak Offset Voltage Tolerance (Differential): ±300 mVdc maximum Maximum Common Mode Voltage:…

  • Page 228: Strip Chart Recorder

    Specifications: Strip Chart Recorder Strip Chart Recorder Table 10-3. Strip Chart Recorder Technical Specifications Heart Rate Scale Domestic International 7 cm 8 cm Chart Width: 30 BPM/cm 20 BPM/cm Scaling: 30–240 BPM 50–210 BPM Range: 1 BPM 1 BPM Resolution: Uterine Activity Scale Strain Gauge Tocotransducer…

  • Page 229: Parts Lists

    Parts Lists This chapter of the manual provides parts lists and block diagrams. NOTE: GE makes every effort possible to provide the most up-to-date reference documentation for your Corometrics equipment. However, in special cases involving field-installed upgrades, a drawing or parts list in this manual may not reflect the revision level of your unit’s subassemblies.

  • Page 230: 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly

    Parts Lists: 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly Table 11-1. Model 171 Final Assembly, 200268-188 Item Part Number Description Number 2000281-001 ENCL BOTTOM SHIELDED 170 SERIES 15451AA COVER SPEAKER 140173 FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H 15222AA BRG DRAWER 15212AA PIN BEARING-170 15200A…

  • Page 231
    Parts Lists: 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly Table 11-1. Model 171 Final Assembly, 200268-188 (Continued) Item Part Number Description Number PCB MAIN SINGLE 2000243-004 U/S COMPLETE 284105 SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM 284072 SCR 4-40 PH 5/16L PHL LL STRIP SCR 4-40 FH UNDERCUT 3/16 284285 PHIL 2PS NYLON PATCH…
  • Page 232
    Parts Lists: 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly Table 11-1. Model 171 Final Assembly, 200268-188 (Continued) Item Part Number Description Number PACKAGING SLOTTED TRAY 2000893-001 170 SERIES 13984AA LBL PACKING LIST 340 2000555-001 SHLD SPEAKER — 170 410066 POLY BAG 23X26X.006 410097 TAPE SHIPPING 3IN WIDE 4281CA…
  • Page 233: 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly

    Parts Lists: 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly Table 11-2. Model 172 Final Assembly, 2000268-189 Item Part Number Description Number 2000281-001 ENCL BOTTOM SHIELDED 170 SERIES 15451AA COVER SPEAKER 140173 FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H 15222AA BRG DRAWER 15212AA PIN BEARING-170 15200A…

  • Page 234
    Parts Lists: 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly Table 11-2. Model 172 Final Assembly, 2000268-189 (Continued) Item Part Number Description Number PCB ASSY MAIN PCB 15269E DUAL US COMP 284105 SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM 284072 SCR 4-40 PH 5/16L PHL LL STRIP SCR 4-40 FH UNDERCUT 3/16 PHIL 2PS 284285 NYLON PATCH…
  • Page 235
    Parts Lists: 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly Table 11-2. Model 172 Final Assembly, 2000268-189 (Continued) Item Part Number Description Number 13984AA LBL PACKING LIST 340 .0001 2000555-001 SHLD SPEAKER — 170 410066 POLY BAG 23X26X.006 410097 TAPE SHIPPING 3IN WIDE 4281CA LBL SERIAL# UL APPV’D-155 4281DA…
  • Page 236: 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly

    Parts Lists: 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly Table 11-3. Model 173 Final Assembly, 2001972-037 Find Num Item Number Item Description 2007385-001 ENCL ,BOTTOM, SHIELDED-170 SERIES 15451AA COVER SPEAKER 140173 FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H 15222AA BRG DRAWER 15212AA PIN BEARING-170 15200A…

  • Page 237
    Parts Lists: 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly Table 11-3. Model 173 Final Assembly, 2001972-037 (Continued) Find Num Item Number Item Description 284105 SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM 284072 SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,PHL,LL,STRIP SCR,4-40,FH UNDERCUT 3/16,PHIL 2PS 284285 NYLON PATCH 289516 SCR,M3X5,PH,PHIL,ZP,W/NYLOK PATCH 2000220-001 SCR PH #2 ,1/2L PHIL ZPS PLASTITE 2000221-001…
  • Page 238
    Parts Lists: 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly Table 11-3. Model 173 Final Assembly, 2001972-037 (Continued) Find Num Item Number Item Description 410097 TAPE,SHIPPING,3IN WIDE, 4281DA LABEL,C-UL HAZZARD TAG120,SERIES LABEL SERIAL NUMBER, UL & MODEL 4281EA NUMBER 408230-008 LABEL CE MARK 160019 SEALANT MED BLUE, 2000741-001…
  • Page 239: 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly

    Parts Lists: 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly Table 11-4. Model 174 Final Assembly, 2001972-038 Find Num Item Number Item Description 2007385-001 ENCL ,BOTTOM, SHIELDED-170 SERIES 15451AA COVER SPEAKER 140173 FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H 15222AA BRG DRAWER 15212AA PIN BEARING-170 15200A…

  • Page 240
    Parts Lists: 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly Table 11-4. Model 174 Final Assembly, 2001972-038 (Continued) Find Num Item Number Item Description 284105 SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM 284072 SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,PHL,LL,STRIP SCR,4-40,FH UNDERCUT 3/16,PHIL 2PS 284285 NYLON PATCH 289516 SCR,M3X5,PH,PHIL,ZP,W/NYLOK PATCH 2000220-001 SCR PH #2 ,1/2L PHIL ZPS PLASTITE 2000221-001…
  • Page 241
    Parts Lists: 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly Table 11-4. Model 174 Final Assembly, 2001972-038 (Continued) Find Num Item Number Item Description 410097 TAPE,SHIPPING,3IN WIDE, 4281DA LABEL,C-UL HAZZARD TAG120,SERIES LABEL SERIAL NUMBER, UL & MODEL 4281EA NUMBER 408230-008 LABEL CE MARK 160019 SEALANT MED BLUE, 2000741-001…
  • Page 242: 2264Aax, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotranducer Assembly Parts List

    Parts Lists: 2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotranducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) 2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotranducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Table 11-5. 2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Find Item Number Item Description 14894A TOCO CBL ASSY OB 5′ LG,WATERTIGHT 15079AA MARKING CASE BUTTON TOP-TOCO,WATERTIGHT 14790B…

  • Page 243: 5700Gax, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List

    Parts Lists: 5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) 5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Table 11-6. 5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Find Item Number Item Description 14895A U/S CBL ASSY 5′ OB,WATERTIGHT 15081AA MARKING,CASE BUTTON TOP U/S,WATERTIGHT…

  • Page 244: 5700Kax, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List

    Parts Lists: 5700KAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) 5700KAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Table 11-7. 5700LAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Find Item Number Item Description 14895A U/S CBL ASSY 5′ OB,WATERTIGHT 15082AA MKG CASE TOP U/S,WATERTIGHT…

  • Page 245: 2264Dax, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-Ft Cord)

    Parts Lists: 2264DAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) 2264DAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Table 11-8. 2264, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) Find Item Number Item Description 14894A TOCO CBL ASSY OB 5′ LG,WATERTIGHT 15080AA MARKING CASE TOP TOCO,WATERTIGHT 14790B…

  • Page 246: 1509Aao/Bao, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List

    Parts Lists: 1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List 1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List Table 11-9. 1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List Find Item Number Item Description 2000532-001 CABLE STRAIN RELIEF 8 FEET 210227 CONTACT,MALE,24AWG,16.5MM,LG 210180 HALF-SHELL,W/CLAMP,3-5MM…

  • Page 248
    Asia Headquarters World Headquarters GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems GE Medical Systems Information Technologies GmbH Information Technologies Asia; GE (China) Co., Ltd. Information Technologies, Inc. Munzinger Straße 3-5 24th Floor, Shanghai MAXDO Center, 8200 West Tower Avenue D-79111 Freiburg…

Corometrics®170 Series

SERVICE MANUAL

MANUAL P/N 2000947-004 REV. C

Corometrics® 170 Series

SERVICE MANUAL

MANUAL P/N 2000947-004 REV. C

GUARANTEE

All equipment sold by GE Medical Systems Information Technologies, is fully guaranteed as to materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year. Information Technologies reserves the right to perform guarantee service operations in its own factory, at an authorized repair station, or in the customer’s installation.

Our obligation under this guarantee is limited to repairing, or, at our option, replacing any defective parts of our equipment, except fuses or batteries, without charge, if such defects occur in normal service.

Claims for damage in shipment should be filed promptly with the transportation company. All correspondence covering the instrument should specify the model and serial numbers.

GE Medical Systems Information Technologies

A GE Medical Systems Company

GE Medical Systems Information Technologies will make available on request such circuit diagrams, component diagrams, component parts lists, descriptions, calibration instructions, or other information which will assist the users or appropriately qualified technical personnel to repair those parts of the equipment which are classified by GE Medical Systems Information Technologies as repairable. Refer to the service manual for further information.

!CAUTION: In the United States of America, Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

Corometrics and Marquette are registered trademarks of GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. GE is a registered trademark of General Electric Company. All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. ©2002-2004 GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the permission of GE Medical Systems Information Technologies.

Contents

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Definitions of Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Equipment Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Monitoring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 About Your Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front Panel Displays and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Strip Chart Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Loading Strip Chart Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Turning the Monitor On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Revision C

Corometrics 170 Series

5

2000947-004

Monitor Self-Test Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Customizing the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Quick Reference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Flasher Software Utility Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Main Board Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Functional Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Monitor Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Panel Pushbutton Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Connecting the Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

FECG Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Legplate Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Ultrasound Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Fetal Movement Detection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Ultrasound Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Uterine Activity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Tocotransducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

Strain Gauge Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

Pattern Memory Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

6

Corometrics 170 Series

Revision C

2000947-004

Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-28

Serviceable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

General Anti-Static Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Transducer Plug Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Removing the Monitor Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Tocotransducer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 Nautilus Transducer Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Replacing the Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Replacing the FECG/IUP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Replacing a Front Panel Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40 Servicing the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41 Boot ROM Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1

Remote Marks Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Telemetry Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

RS-232 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-1

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Preventative Maintenance Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Revision C

Corometrics 170 Series

7

2000947-004

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-1

General Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Strip Chart Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotranducer Assembly Parts List . . . . . . . 11-14 5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List 11-15 5700KAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List . 11-16 2264DAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) 11-17 1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List . . . . . . . . . 11-18 Block Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

8

Corometrics 170 Series

Revision C

2000947-004

Chapter 1

! Safety

The information presented in this section is important for the safety of both the patient and operator and also serves to enhance equipment reliability. This chapter describes how the terms Danger, Warning, Caution, Important, and Note are used throughout the manual. In addition, standard equipment symbols are defined.

This section includes the following important information:

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Definitions of Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Equipment Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

1-1

2000947-004

Safety: General Information

General Information

General Use

If the monitor is cold to the touch or below ambient temperature, allow it to stabilize before use.

To ensure patient safety, use only parts and accessories manufactured or recommended by GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. Parts and accessories used shall meet the requirements of EN60601.1.1.

Disposable devices are intended for single use only. They should not be reused.

Periodically, and whenever the integrity of the monitor is in doubt, test all functions.

Refer to the “Maternal/Fetal Monitoring Operator’s Manual” for information concerning the limitations of internal and external fetal heart rate monitoring techniques.

Responsibility of the Manufacturer

GE is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability, and performance if:

assembly operations, extensions, readjustments, modifications, or repairs are carried out by persons authorized by GE;

the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the requirements of appropriate regulations; and

the monitor is used in accordance with the instructions of use.

Responsibility of the User

This device is intended for use by clinical professionals who are expected to know the medical procedures, practices, and terminology required to monitor obstetrical patients. This manual documents all possible parameters available in the 170 Series of monitors. It is the responsibility of each hospital to ensure that the Labor and Delivery staff is trained in all aspects of the selected model.

The 170 Series Monitor is designed to assist the perinatal staff by providing information regarding the clinical status of the fetus during labor. The monitor does not replace observation and evaluation of the mother and fetus at regular intervals, by a qualified care provider, who will make diagnoses and decide on treatments or interventions. Visual assessment of the monitor display and strip chart must be combined with knowledge of patient history and risk factors to properly care for the mother and fetus.

1-2

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Safety: Definitions of Terminology

Definitions of Terminology

Six types of special notices are used throughout this manual. They are: Danger, Warning, Caution, Contraindication, Important, and Note. The warnings and cautions in this Safety section relate to the equipment in general and apply to all aspects of the monitor. Be sure to read the other chapters because there are additional warnings and cautions which relate to specific features of the monitor.

When grouped, warnings and cautions are listed alphabetically and do not imply any order of importance.

Table 1-1. Definitions of Terminology

Danger

A DANGER notice indicates an imminently

hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

Warning

A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could result in death

or serious injury.

A CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

Caution

situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor

or moderate injury. Cautions are also used to

avoid damage to equipment.

A CONTRAINDICATION describes any special

Contraindication

symptom or circumstance that renders the use of a

remedy or the carrying out of a procedure

inadvisable, usually because of a risk.

Important

An IMPORTANT notice indicates an emphasized

note. It is something you should be particularly

aware of; something not readily apparent.

Note

A NOTE indicates a particular point of information;

something on which to focus your attention.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

1-3

2000947-004

Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions

Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and

Precautions

Warnings

WARNINGS

ACCIDENTAL SPILLS—In the event that fluids are accidentally spilled on the monitor, take the monitor out of operation and inspect for damage.

APPLICATION—This monitor is not designed for direct cardiac connection.

CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS—Avoid making any conductive connections to applied parts (patient connection) which are likely to degrade safety.

CONDUCTIVE PARTS—Ensure that the conductive parts of the lead electrodes and associated connectors do not contact other conductive parts including earth.

DEFIBRILLATION—During defibrillation, all personnel must avoid contact with the patient and monitor to avoid a dangerous shock hazard. In addition, proper placement of the paddles in relation to the electrodes is required to minimize harm to the patient.

ELECTRICAL SHOCK—To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not remove monitor cover. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE—Be aware that strong electromagnetic fields may interfere with monitor operation. Interference prevents the clear reception of signals by the monitor. If the hospital is close to a strong transmitter such as TV, AM or FM radio, police or fire stations, a HAM radio operator, an airport, or cellular phone, their signals could be picked up as signals by the monitor. If you feel interference is affecting the monitor, contact your Service Representative to check the monitor in your environment. Refer to page 1-8 for additional information.

1-4

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions

WARNINGS

ELECTROSURGERY—The monitor is not designed for use with high-frequency surgical devices. In addition, measurements may be affected in the presence of strong electromagnetic sources such as electrosurgery equipment.

EXPLOSION HAZARD—Do not use this equipment in the presence of flammable anesthetics or inside an oxygen tent.

GROUNDING—Do not defeat the three-wire grounding feature of the power cord by means of adaptors, plug modifications, or other methods. A dangerous shock hazard to both patient and operator may result.

INSTRUCTIONS—For continued and safe use of this equipment, it is necessary to follow all listed instructions. However, the instructions provided in this manual in no way supersede established medical procedures concerning patient care. The monitor does not replace observation and evaluation of the patient, at regular intervals, by a qualified care provider who will make diagnoses and decide on treatments and interventions.

INTERFACING OTHER EQUIPMENT—Monitoring equipment must be interfaced with other types of medical equipment by qualified biomedical engineering personnel. Be certain to consult manufacturers’ specifications to maintain safe operation.

LEAKAGE CURRENT TEST—The interconnection of auxiliary equipment with this device may increase the total leakage current. When interfacing with other equipment, a test for leakage current must be performed by qualified biomedical engineering personnel before using with patients. Serious injury or death could result if the leakage current exceeds applicable standards. The use of accessory equipment not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the choice shall include: use of the accessory in the patient vicinity; and evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been performed in accordance with the appropriate EN60601.1 and/or EN60601.1.1 harmonized national standard.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

1-5

2000947-004

Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions

WARNINGS

LINE ISOLATION MONITOR TRANSIENTS—Line isolation monitor transients may resemble actual cardiac waveforms, and thus cause incorrect heart rate determinations and alarm activation (or inhibition).

STRANGULATION—Make sure all patient cables, leadwires, and tubing are positioned away from the patient’s head to minimize the risk of accidental strangulation.

WATER BIRTHS—Do not use the monitor to directly monitor patients during water births, in whirlpool or submersion water baths, during showers, or in any other situation where the mother is immersed in water. Doing so may result in electrical shock hazard.

1-6

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions

Cautions

CAUTIONS

ANNUAL SERVICING—For continued safety and performance of the monitor, it is recommended that the calibration, accuracy, and electrical safety of the monitor be verified on an annual basis by an GE Service Representative.

DAILY TESTING—It is essential that the monitor and accessories be inspected every day. It is recommended practice to initiate the monitor’s self-test feature at the beginning of each monitoring session; follow the instructions in “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures”.

ENVIRONMENT—The performance of the monitor has not been tested in certain areas, such as x-ray and imaging suites. The monitor is not recommended for use in these environments.

PERFORMANCE—Report all problems experienced with the monitor. If the monitor is not working properly, contact your Service Representative for service. The monitor should not be used if it is not working properly.

PINCHING—Keep fingers clear of the paper roller because the roller could pinch your fingers.

TRAPPING—Keep hands, hair, jewelry, and loose clothing away from the paper roller because the roller could trap these items.

TRIPPING—Arrange monitoring equipment so that cords and cables do not present a tripping hazard.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

1-7

2000947-004

Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions

Electromagnetic Interference

This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices to the IEC 601-1-2:1993, EN60601-1-2:1994, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a typical medical installation.

However, because of the proliferation of radio-frequency transmitting equipment and other sources of electrical noise in the health-care and home environments (for example, cellular phones, mobile two-way radios, electrical appliances), it is possible that high levels of such interference due to close proximity or strength of a source, may result in disruption of performance of this device.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, may cause harmful interference with other devices in the vicinity. Disruption or interference may be evidenced by erratic readings, cessation of operation, or incorrect functioning. If this occurs, the site of use should be surveyed to determine the source of this disruption, and actions taken to eliminate the source.

The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Turn equipment in the vicinity off and on to isolate the offending equipment.

Reorient or relocate the other receiving device.

Increase the separation between the interfering equipment and this equipment.

If assistance is required, contact your GE Service Representative.

1-8

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Safety: Equipment Symbols

Equipment Symbols

The following is a list of symbols used on products manufactured by GE. Some symbols may not appear on your unit.

Table 1-2. Equipment Symbols

!

ATTENTION: Consult accompanying documents.

TYPE B EQUIPMENT. Type B equipment is suitable for intentional external and internal application to the patient, excluding direct cardiac application.

TYPE BF EQUIPMENT. Type BF equipment is suitable for intentional external and internal application to the patient, excluding direct cardiac application. Type BF equipment has an F-type applied part.

TYPE CF EQUIPMENT. Type CF equipment is suitable for intentional external and internal application to the patient, including direct cardiac application. Type CF equipment has an F-type applied part.

ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC).

EQUIPOTENTIALITY.

ON/STANDBY: button toggles between full power and standby.

CAUTION

AC MAINS—The On/Standby switch does not disconnect the monitor from AC mains power. To completely remove power, you must disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

1-9

2000947-004

Safety: Equipment Symbols

For your notes

1-10

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Chapter 2

Introduction

This section lists the indications for use for monitors in the 170 Series as well as provides an explanation of the different patient monitoring modalities.

This section summarizes the clinical applications of monitors in the 170 Series:

Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Monitoring Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 About Your Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

2-1

2000947-004

Introduction: Indications for Use

Indications for Use

Models 171 and 172

Models 171 and 172 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use in the monitoring of the fetus during the antepartum period as well as throughout labor and delivery. Each monitor also has an optional monitoring mode to detect fetal body movements.

Models 173 and 174

Models 173 and 174 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use in the monitoring of the fetus throughout labor and delivery. Each monitor also has an optional monitoring mode to detect fetal body movements.

2-2

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Introduction: Monitoring Methods

Monitoring Methods

The following is a summary of all the clinical monitoring methods found in the 170

Series.

Fetal Heart Rate

External Method, Pulsed Doppler Ultrasound

Ultrasound monitoring is available on all 170 Series Monitors. Models 171 and 173 provide a single ultrasound channel, while Models 172 and 174 provide two ultrasound channels.

Fetal heart rate can be measured externally using pulsed Doppler Ultrasound. A transducer placed on the mother’s abdomen is used to direct an ultrasonic beam toward the fetal heart and to sense Doppler shifted echoes created by moving cardiac structures. A patented autocorrelation process is used to determine the timing of successive cardiac cycles. The resulting fetal heart rate (FHR) pattern is recorded on the strip chart paper and the FHR appears on the digital display.

Internal Method, Direct Fetal Electrocardiogram (FECG)

FECG is available on Models 173 and 174 only. The Model 173 provides a dedicated FECG connector. The Model 174 provides a combi-connector which can be used for either FECG or US.

FECG signals are obtained via a spiral electrode attached to the fetal presenting part. FHR is computed on a beat-to-beat basis using the R-to-R time interval of the QRS complexes. The instantaneous FHR pattern is printed on the strip chart paper and the FHR appears on the digital display.

Maternal Uterine Activity

External Method, Tocotransducer (TOCO)

Maternal uterine activity is measured externally using a tocotransducer (toco). Relative pressure within the uterus is measured using a tocotransducer attached to the mother’s abdomen in the area of the uterine fundus. The readings are plotted on the strip chart paper in a relative scale from 0 to 100 as well as shown on the digital display. All 170 Series Monitors provide external uterine activity monitoring.

Internal Method, Intrauterine Pressure Catheter and Strain Gauge (IUP)

IUP is available on Models 173 and 174 only.

Intrauterine pressure is measured using a transcervical catheter. The pressure trend is plotted over the range of 0 to 100 mmHg and the readings appear on the digital display.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

2-3

2000947-004

Introduction: Features

Features

The 170 Series is a family of fetal monitors offering various combinations of modalities to suit your institution’s needs. Each monitor boasts the following qualities:

The strip chart recorder is a quiet, easy-to-load, high resolution thermal array printer. The recorder prints continuous trends and alphanumeric data on one strip chart.

Automatic mode selection is provided simply by inserting the appropriate transducer plug into the front panel receptacle.

Wide beam ultrasound transducer provides an advanced level of system performance.

Transducer connectors are easy-to-use, color-coded, and durable.

Frequently-used functions are controlled by front panel buttons—including audio volume, uterine activity reference, alarm silence, event mark, paper advance, and user setup controls.

The ultrasound mode provides clean accurate traces with few “dropouts” because of a patented autocorrelation processing.

Fetal heart rate alarm limits are user-defined, with pre-set defaults.

Alarm silencing is controlled by a front panel pushbutton—colored for easy recognition.

Fetal heart rate alarm conditions have both audible and visual indications. The audible indicator can be silenced on an alarm-by-alarm basis.

Two RS-232C ports provide interfacing to external devices.

2-4

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Introduction: About Your Monitor

About Your Monitor

This manual describes all monitors in the 170 Series; therefore some sections may not apply to your model monitor. Refer to Table 2-1.

Model 171

The Model 171 Antepartum Fetal Monitor provides singleton ultrasound and external uterine activity monitoring.

Model 172

The Model 172 Antepartum Fetal Monitor provides dual ultrasound and external uterine activity monitoring.

Model 173

The Model 173 Intrapartum Monitor provides dual heart rate monitoring using FECG and ultrasound. The monitor also provides external uterine activity monitoring using a tocotransducer or internal monitoring using an intrauterine pressure catheter (IUPC).

Model 174

The Model 174 Intrapartum Monitor provides dual heart rate monitoring using FECG/ultrasound or dual ultrasound. The monitor also provides external uterine activity monitoring using a tocotransducer or internal monitoring using an IUPC.

Table 2-1. Summary of Features

Feature

171

172

173

174

External uterine activity (TOCO)

9

9

9

9

Internal uterine activity (IUPC)

9

9

Ultrasounda

9

9

9

9

Dual ultrasound

9

9

FECGa

9

9

Fetal heart rate alarms

9

9

9

9

Fetal movement detection (optional)

9

9

9

9

Heartbeat coincidence

9

9

9

Fetal heart rate offset

9

9

9

a The Model 174 has a combi-connector for the primary FHR that can be used for either US or FECG.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

2-5

2000947-004

For your notes

2-6

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Chapter 3

Controls, Indicators, and

Connectors

This section describes all possible controls, indicators, and connectors in the 170 Series.

This section contains the following information:

Front Panel Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front Panel Displays and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Strip Chart Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-1

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls

Front Panel Controls

Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls (Model 172 shown)

Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls

Symbol

Name

Power

Record

Paper Advance

Mark/Offset

Setup

Volume

3-2

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls

Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls

UA Reference

Alarm Silence

Power Button and Indicator

Pressing the blue Power button turns the monitor on and illuminates the green indicator to the left of the button. Pressing the button again puts the monitor in standby and extinguishes the indicator.

Record Button and Indicator

Pressing the Record pushbutton activates the recorder, provided paper is installed; the amber indicator illuminates to the left of the button. Pressing the button again turns the recorder off and extinguishes the indicator.

Paper Advance Button

Pressing the Paper Advance button causes the recorder to advance chart paper at a rate of 40 cm/min for as long as the button is pressed. If the recorder is on, twenty seconds after the button is released, the recorder prints the time, date, active trends legends, and chart speed.

Mark/Offset Button

The Mark/Offset button is a multifunction button:

Mark

Briefly pressing the button prints an event mark on the bottom two lines of the heart rate grid.

Offset (Models 172, 173, and 174 Only)

When the heart rate offset mode is enabled, pressing and holding the Mark/Offset button for at least two seconds shifts the secondary FHR trend +20 BPM for visibility purposes. You will hear a “beep” for confirmation. Refer to the “170 Series Operator’s Manual” for more information.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-3

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls

Setup Button

Pressing and holding this button while the monitor is on enters a user setup mode for configuring the monitor.

Pressing and holding this button during power up enters a service setup mode.

Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for instructions.

Volume Buttons

The Volume buttons are used to raise () and lower ( ) the volume of the audio signals emitted by the speaker. The volume buttons are also used during setup.

Model 171

This monitor has two volume buttons used to control the ultrasound audio.

Models 172, 173, and 174

These monitors have four volume buttons. The left pair controls the audio signals for the mode shown in the primary FHR display; likewise, the right pair of buttons controls the audio for the mode shown in the secondary FHR display.

Setup Mode

When the monitor is in setup mode (user or service), the volume buttons change: the setting or value shown in the FHR display; or the monitor feature code shown in the UA display. (For Models 172, 173, and 174, only the leftmost volume controls are active during setup mode.)

3-4

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls

UA Reference Button

The UA Reference button is used to set the uterine activity pressure reference. This button is also used during setup.

Setting a Baseline for External Monitoring (Tocotransducer)

Briefly pressing the UA Reference button sets the pressure baseline at a preset default. The monitor is shipped from the factory with a default setting of 10 relative units. Qualified service personnel can access a service screen to set the default to 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25 relative units.

Pressing this button for more than two seconds causes the uterine activity reference value to override the default setting and cycle through all available selections: 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25 relative units, starting at the default setting—until the button is released. While the button is held down, the strip chart tracing remains unchanged. Once the button is released, the recorder trace takes on this new value. This value is stored as the new baseline for the currently measured uterine activity signal.

Setting a Baseline for Internal Monitoring (IUPC)

Pressing the UA Reference button sets the pressure baseline at 0 mmHg.

NOTE: IUPC monitoring is only available on Models 173 and 174.

Setup Mode

When the monitor is in setup mode, the UA Reference button selects the active display. Pressing the button alternates between the UA display (which shows a monitor feature code) and the FHR display (which shows the setting or value for the selected feature code). When the UA display is active, the ± sign lights. When the FHR display is active, the heartbeat indicator lights.

Alarm Silence Button

This button is yellow for easy recognition. Pressing the Alarm Silence button removes the audible indication of an individual fetal heart rate alarm.

NOTE: Silencing an alarm does not affect the visual indications.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-5

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators

Front Panel Displays and Indicators

Fetal Heart Rate Display(s) and Indicator(s)

FHR Display

A three-digit yellow numeric display indicates the fetal heart rate in beats per minute. The value flashes during an alarm condition.

Heartbeat Indicator

A yellow heart shaped indicator flashes with each detected valid heartbeat for the fetal heart.

Primary Versus Secondary (Models 172, 173, and 174 only)

Refer to Table 3-2 for a summary of display positions relative to connectors.

Uterine Activity Display

This green three-digit display indicates the uterine activity values.

Tocotransducer

If uterine activity is measured using a tocotransducer, the uterine activity value displays in relative units. A plus sign flashes when the uterine activity value exceeds the strip chart range of 100 relative units.

IUP (Models 173 and 174 Only)

If uterine activity is measured using an intrauterine pressure catheter or a strain gauge pressure transducer, the uterine activity value displays in mmHg.

.

Table 3-2. Display/Connector Summary

Monitor

Model 171

Model 172

Model 173

Model 174

Mode

TOCO

US1

TOCO

US

TOCO US1

US2 TOCO

US

FECG

or

or

US2

or

IUP

FECG

IUP

Display

1

2

Connector

1

2

3-6

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators

Alarms Disabled Indicator

This yellow indicator illuminates when all alarms have been disabled. The indicator is unlit when alarms are enabled. Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for information on enabling/disabling alarms.

Audio Alarm Indicator

Active Patient Alarms

For active patient alarms, this yellow indicator flashes; it continues to flash even if the alarm is silenced.

Resolved Patient Alarms

For resolved patient alarms, the indicator continues to flash until you silence the alarm. This ensures that the alarm is acknowledged by a clinician.

Signal Quality Alarms

For signal quality alarms, the indicator flashes during an active alarm and turns off as soon as the condition is resolved. The indicator is unaffected by silencing the audio alarm.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-7

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors

Front Panel Connectors

Model 171 Connectors

Figure 3-2. Model 171 Connectors

Ultrasound Connector

The ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the fetal heart rate display.

Uterine Activity Connector

The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept a Corometrics tocotransducer. The uterine activity value obtained from this transducer shows in the uterine activity display.

1If the Model 171 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you unplug the ultrasound transducer from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false alarms.

3-8

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors

Model 172 Connectors

1

2

Figure 3-3. Model 172 Connectors

1 Primary Ultrasound Connector

The primary ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart rate display.

2 Secondary Ultrasound Connector

The secondary ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle identical to the primary ultrasound connector described above. The fetal heart rate derived from this connector displays in the secondary fetal heart rate display.

Uterine Activity Connector

The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept a Corometrics tocotransducer. The uterine activity value obtained from this transducer shows in the uterine activity display.

1If the Model 172 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you unplug the ultrasound transducer(s) from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false alarms.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-9

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors

Model 173 Connectors

Figure 3-4. Model 173 Connectors

Ultrasound Connector

The ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart display.

FECG Connector

The FECG connector1 is a dark grey, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept a Corometrics FECG cable/legplate plug. The fetal heart rate derived from the spiral electrode displays in the secondary fetal heart rate display.

Uterine Activity Connector

The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept a Corometrics tocotransducer, a Corometrics strain gauge transducer plug, or any intrauterine pressure catheter with compatible cable plug. The uterine activity value obtained from this transducer shows in the uterine activity display.

1If the Model 173 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you unplug the ultrasound and/or FECG transducers from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false alarms.

3-10

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors

Model 174 Connectors

Figure 3-5. Model 174 Connectors

Combi-Connector (Primary Ultrasound or FECG)

The combi-connector is a blue connector1 with a dark grey inner center. This round receptacle is mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug or a Corometrics FECG cable/legplate plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this transducer or cable/legplate shows in the primary fetal heart display.

IMPORTANT

COMBI-CONNECTOR—The combi-connector can be used for monitoring ultrasound or FECG depending on what you plug in (US transducer or FECG cable/legplate). When used in conjunction with the secondary ultrasound connector, you have the option of monitoring twins using dual US or FECG/US.

Secondary Ultrasound Connector

The secondary ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from this connector shows in the secondary fetal heart rate display.

Uterine Activity Connector

The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept a Corometrics tocotransducer, a Corometrics strain gauge transducer plug, or any intrauterine pressure catheter with compatible cable plug. The uterine activity value obtained from this transducer shows in the uterine activity display.

1If the Model 174 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you unplug the ultrasound and/or FECG transducers from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false alarms.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-11

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder

Strip Chart Recorder

UA

bpm

240

210

180

150

120

90

60

30

FHR

kPa

4305AAO

12

10

8

6

4

2 0

Figure 3-6. Strip Chart Recorder

The strip chart recorder is located on the right side of the front panel. Latches on each side of the recorder open the paper drawer.

Two styles of paper are available: 30-240 BPM scale and 50-210 BPM scale.

Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for instructions on loading strip chart paper into the recorder.

Heart Rate Grid

One or two fetal heart rate trends print in the top (or left) grid of the strip chart paper—depending on your model monitor and the active modalities.

If only one fetal heart rate is being monitored, the FHR trend is printed in black. If twins are being monitored, the primary trend is printed in plain black while the secondary trend is bolded.

Refer to the “170 Series Operator’s Manual” for additional information about fetal heart rate trends and annotations.

3-12

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder

Uterine Activity Grid

The uterine activity trend prints in black on the bottom (or right) grid of the strip chart paper.

Refer to the “170 Series Operator’s Manual” for more information about uterine activity trends and annotations.

Annotation Area

An annotation area is provided between the fetal heart rate and uterine activity grids.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-13

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Rear Panel Connectors

Rear Panel Connectors

CONNECT TO:

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS

REF 7714AAT ONLY

RS232

RS232

1

2

Figure 3-7. Rear Panel Connectors

Power Supply Connector

This is the receptacle for the AC adapter, P/N 7714AAT only. A line cord connects from the other end of the adapter to an AC wall outlet. The connector is labeled

CONNECT TO GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY. The power supply is a universal AC-to-DC converter which can accept an AC input in the range 100–230 VAC. The converter supplies a regulated 12 Vdc to the monitor.

Remote Mark Connector

This connector is provided for attaching an optional Corometrics Model 146 Fetal Acoustic Stimulator (FAST). The annotation prints on the strip chart each time the Model 146 is used.

Remote Mark Connector

This connector is provided for attaching an optional Corometrics Remote Event Marker. This accessory annotates the strip chart recorder paper with a marker which can be configured as one of the following:

: This annotation is commonly used to record an “event.”

FM

: This annotation is commonly used as an indication that the mother has perceived fetal movement.

The monitor is factory set to use the FM annotation. Refer to the “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for information about selecting the annotation.

3-14

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Rear Panel Connectors

Nurse Call Interface

This connector is intended for future interfacing to a standard Nurse Call System.

RS-232C Connectors

Two RS-232C connectors are provided for interfacing to peripheral equipment such as:

a maternal non-invasive blood pressure monitor

a central information system that uses Hewlett-Packard’s Digital Series Interface Protocol

Contact your Service Representative for more information.

CAUTION

NON-DESTRUCTIVE VOLTAGE—The maximum nondestructive voltage that may be applied to the rear panel connectors is 0 V. Do not attempt to connect cables to these connectors without contacting your Biomedical Engineering Department or Service Representative. This is to ensure the connectors comply with leakage-current requirements of one of the following applicable standards: Underwriters Laboratories UL-2601.1, Canadian Standards Associations CSA 22.2 No. 125, or International Electrotechnical Commission EN60601.1.

Telemetry Connector

This high-density 15-pin connector is intended for future interfacing to the receiver of a Corometrics telemetry system. Contact your Service Representative for more information.

IMPORTANT

TELEMETRY—For proper operation when using a telemetry system, disconnect all transducers from the front panel of the 170 Series Monitor. Refer to the operator’s manual for your telemetry system for more information.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

3-15

2000947-004

For your notes

3-16

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Chapter 4

Setup Procedures

This section contains information about configuring a 170 Series Monitor to meet the individual needs of your clinic or hospital. Use of the monitor will vary according to the accessories attached to it, the clinical applications in which it is used, and the personal preferences of the users.

This chapter lists all available user setup options in the monitor and provides step- by-step instructions for making selections:

Loading Strip Chart Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Turning the Monitor On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Recorder Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Customizing the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Printing a Summary of Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Quick Reference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Flasher Software Utility Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

4-1

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper

Loading Strip Chart Paper

The required paper for use with the 170 Series Monitor is:

catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/CAO (HR scale of 30–240 BPM); or

catalog number (REF) 4305BAO/DAO (HR scale of 50–210 BPM).

CAUTIONS

LOADING PAPER—The instructions for loading paper into a 120 or 170 Series Monitor are different than the instructions for loading paper into other Corometrics monitors with which you may be familiar. Improper loading can cause paper jams. Follow the instructions carefully.

PAPER TYPE—Do not use non-Corometrics paper or paper designed for use with other Corometrics monitors. Using paper other than catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/BAO/CAO/DAO: may produce inferior print quality; could result in permanent damage to the recorder’s print head; and may void your warranty.

STORAGE/TRANSPORT—Paper should be installed in the monitor’s strip chart recorder at all times. This reduces particle build up on the printhead and facilitates opening the recorder door.

To protect against paper jams, the 170 Series recorder contains a paper-loading sensor which detects if the paper has been incorrectly loaded. When the recorder detects a paper-load–error condition:

the recorder will not print;

the Record indicator flashes on and off every second; and

three short beeps (low tones) sound every three seconds at a fixed volume.

The most likely cause of a paper-load–error condition is that you loaded the paper with the black squares facing up. The correct method is to load the paper with the black squares down, as explained later in this section.

4-2

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper

To install Corometrics catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/BAO/CAO/DAO chart paper in the 170 Series Monitor, follow these steps:

CAUTION

LOADING PAPER—Paper loading instructions for a 170 or 120 Series Monitor are different than other Corometrics monitors with which you may be familiar.

1.Press on each side of the paper drawer to release the drawer latches.

Figure 4-1. Releasing the Drawer Latches

2.Slide the paper drawer out toward you.

Figure 4-2. Opening the Paper Drawer

3.Remove the plastic wrapper from the paper and discard.

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

4-3

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper

4.Fan the pack of Z-fold paper on all sides to loosen any folds and to ensure proper feed of the paper throughout the recorder.

Figure 4-3. Fanning the Paper

5.Hold the package of paper so that:

the black squares are on the bottom of the pack; and

the Information Technologies name and page numbers are on the left side of the pack.

NOTE: The black squares indicate the end of the recorder paper. When the black squares appear, the strip chart recorder has approximately 20 minutes of paper remaining, when running at a speed of 3 cm/min.

Figure 4-4. Orienting the Paper

4-4

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper

6.Unfold two sheets from the top of the pack so that they extend toward you.

Figure 4-5. Creating a Paper Leader

7.Place the pack in the drawer so that the pack is laying flat in the bottom of the paper tray.

Figure 4-6. Inserting the Paper

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

4-5

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper

8.Pull the paper leader taut at an angle between remaining pack and the paper guides. The balance of the paper pack should stay flat in the drawer as shown in Figure 4-7. (The paper guides are shown in Figure 4-8.)

Pull paper

leader taut

Remaining paper

lays flat in drawer

Figure 4-7. Paper Drawer Side Cutaway View

9.Slide the drawer closed by exerting even pressure on both sides of the drawer. Avoid skewing the drawer in its tracks. (The pre-printed vertical lines on the paper should be parallel to the printhead.) You will hear a click when the drawer is locked in place.

Paper Guide

bpm

Printhead

240

210

Paper Guide

HR

180

F

150

120

90

O

60

30

5A

A

A

U

430

12

10

8

6

a

4

kP

2

0

Figure 4-8. Closing the Paper Drawer

IMPORTANT

PAPER—Paper should always be installed in the monitor. The monitor runs a self-test routine each time it is powered on; part of this routine includes a recorder test.

4-6

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Turning the Monitor On

Turning the Monitor On

The 170 Series uses a universal AC-to-DC converter which accepts an AC input in the range 100–230 VAC. The converter supplies a regulated 12 Vdc to the 170 Series Monitor.

1.Connect the AC adapter into the power supply connector labeled: CONNECT TO GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY.

Figure 4-9. Connecting the AC Adapter

2.Connect one end of the detachable line cord to the AC adapter; connect the other end into a hospital grade grounded wall outlet.

3. Press the monitor’s Power button . The green indicator next to the button illuminates. A self-test routine automatically runs. Read «Monitor Self-Test Routines» on the next page.

Figure 4-10. Turning the Monitor On

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

4-7

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines

Monitor Self-Test Routines

NOTE: Ensure paper is installed in the recorder in order to verify a successful recorder test.

Each 170 Series Monitor contains a self-test routine which checks the internal circuitry of the monitor, the displays and indicators, and the strip chart recorder. The self-test routine is automatically initiated each time you turn on the monitor.

CAUTION

SELF-TEST FAILURE—If there is any problem with the self-test routine, turn off the monitor and remove it from operation. Notify your Biomedical Engineering Department or Service Representative.

After completion of a successful self-test routine, the monitor is ready for use.

NOTE: If the recorder was off at the time the monitor was turned off, the test routine will turn the recorder on, then turn it off after the tests are complete. If the recorder was on at the time the monitor was turned off, the tests will be performed and the recorder will remain on.

Table 4-1. Summary of Self-Test Routines

Test Description

What to Verify

Display/Indicator Test: All displays and indicators

Ensure all indicators and each segment of the displays

illuminate.

illuminate throughout the entire self-test routine.

Internal Test: The internal circuitry of the monitor is

Make sure the monitor performs the recorder test. If

there is a problem with the internal circuitry, the recorder

verified.

test will not be performed.

Recorder Test: The following message prints on the

Ensure that the lines are printed in the correct positions

strip chart paper: TEST: ARE ALL DOTS PRINTED?

Three continuous lines are drawn across the strip chart

on the paper. Verify that the lines are continuous and no

recorder paper, testing the integrity of the printhead.

gaps appear on the traces.

See Figure 4-11.

4-8

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

GE Corometrics 170 Service manual

Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines

4305CAO

GEMEDICALSYSTEMS

41153

PAGES

REMAING

FHR

240

bpm

210

180

150

HR Scale

30-240

120

90

60

30

TEST:ARE

ALLDOTS

PRINTED?

12

100

10

75

8

6

50

4

25

2

0 kPa

UA

0

mm Hg

Figure 4-11. Recorder Test

Revision C

170 Series Monitor

4-9

2000947-004

Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor

Customizing the Monitor

User Setup Mode

The monitor includes a user setup mode where you can:

enable/disable alarm functionality

set the high alarm limit for the fetal heart rate

set the low alarm limit for the fetal heart rate

set the alarm volume

set the time and date

Service Setup Mode

The monitor includes a service setup mode where you can access all user setup modes as well as the following:

enable/disable fetal movement detection (if purchased and installed)

select the language for printing on the strip chart paper

set the chart speed

select the paper scale

choose a communication mode for each rear panel communications port

set the baud rate for each communications port

select the remote mark annotation style

enable/disable fetal heart rate offset (Models 172, 173, and 174 only)

enable/disable ECG artifact elimination (Models 173 and 174 only)

enable/disable heartbeat coincidence (Models 172, 173, and 174 only)

set the default UA reference value

perform a recorder alignment test

print the software version number along with a summary of all current configuration settings

4-10

170 Series Monitor

Revision C

2000947-004

Loading…

Corometrics®170 Series | Manualzz Loading…

Corometrics®170 Series
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL P/N 2000947-004 REV. C
Corometrics® 170 Series
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL P/N 2000947-004 REV. C
GUARANTEE
All equipment sold by GE Medical Systems Information Technologies, is fully guaranteed as to
materials and workmanship for a period of 1 year. Information Technologies reserves the right to
perform guarantee service operations in its own factory, at an authorized repair station, or in the
customer’s installation.
Our obligation under this guarantee is limited to repairing, or, at our option, replacing any
defective parts of our equipment, except fuses or batteries, without charge, if such defects occur in
normal service.
Claims for damage in shipment should be filed promptly with the transportation company. All
correspondence covering the instrument should specify the model and serial numbers.
GE Medical Systems Information Technologies
A GE Medical Systems Company
GE Medical Systems Information Technologies will make available on request such circuit
diagrams, component diagrams, component parts lists, descriptions, calibration instructions, or
other information which will assist the users or appropriately qualified technical personnel to
repair those parts of the equipment which are classified by GE Medical Systems Information
Technologies as repairable. Refer to the service manual for further information.
! CAUTION: In the United States of America, Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or
on the order of a physician.
Corometrics and Marquette are registered trademarks of GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. GE is a registered
trademark of General Electric Company. All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective companies. ©2002-2004 GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. All rights reserved. No part of this
manual may be reproduced without the permission of GE Medical Systems Information Technologies.
Contents
1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Definitions of Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Equipment Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Monitoring Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
About Your Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
3
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Panel Displays and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Strip Chart Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
4
Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Loading Strip Chart Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Turning the Monitor On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Revision C
Corometrics 170 Series
2000947-004
5
Monitor Self-Test Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Customizing the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Quick Reference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Flasher Software Utility Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
5
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Main Board Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
6
Functional Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Monitor Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Front Panel Pushbutton Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Connecting the Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
FECG Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Legplate Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Ultrasound Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Fetal Movement Detection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Ultrasound Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Uterine Activity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Tocotransducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Strain Gauge Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Pattern Memory Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6
Corometrics 170 Series
2000947-004
Revision C
Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
7
Serviceable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
General Anti-Static Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Transducer Plug Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Removing the Monitor Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Tocotransducer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Nautilus Transducer Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Replacing the Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Replacing the FECG/IUP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Replacing a Front Panel Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Servicing the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Boot ROM Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
8
Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Remote Marks Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Telemetry Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
RS-232 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
9
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Preventative Maintenance Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Revision C
Corometrics 170 Series
2000947-004
7
10
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Strip Chart Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
11
Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotranducer Assembly Parts List . . . . . . . 11-14
5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List 11-15
5700KAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List . 11-16
2264DAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord) 11-17
1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Block Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
8
Corometrics 170 Series
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 1
!
1
Safety
The information presented in this section is important for the safety of both the
patient and operator and also serves to enhance equipment reliability. This chapter
describes how the terms Danger, Warning, Caution, Important, and Note are used
throughout the manual. In addition, standard equipment symbols are defined.
This section includes the following important information:
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions of Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-9
1-1
Safety: General Information
General Information
General Use
If the monitor is cold to the touch or below ambient temperature, allow it to stabilize
before use.
To ensure patient safety, use only parts and accessories manufactured or
recommended by GE Medical Systems Information Technologies. Parts and
accessories used shall meet the requirements of EN60601.1.1.
Disposable devices are intended for single use only. They should not be reused.
Periodically, and whenever the integrity of the monitor is in doubt, test all functions.
Refer to the “Maternal/Fetal Monitoring Operator’s Manual” for information
concerning the limitations of internal and external fetal heart rate monitoring
techniques.
Responsibility of the Manufacturer
GE is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability, and performance if:
„
assembly operations, extensions, readjustments, modifications, or repairs are
carried out by persons authorized by GE;
„
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the requirements of
appropriate regulations; and
„
the monitor is used in accordance with the instructions of use.
Responsibility of the User
This device is intended for use by clinical professionals who are expected to know
the medical procedures, practices, and terminology required to monitor obstetrical
patients. This manual documents all possible parameters available in the 170 Series
of monitors. It is the responsibility of each hospital to ensure that the Labor and
Delivery staff is trained in all aspects of the selected model.
The 170 Series Monitor is designed to assist the perinatal staff by providing
information regarding the clinical status of the fetus during labor. The monitor does
not replace observation and evaluation of the mother and fetus at regular intervals,
by a qualified care provider, who will make diagnoses and decide on treatments or
interventions. Visual assessment of the monitor display and strip chart must be
combined with knowledge of patient history and risk factors to properly care for the
mother and fetus.
1-2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Safety: Definitions of Terminology
Definitions of Terminology
Six types of special notices are used throughout this manual. They are: Danger,
Warning, Caution, Contraindication, Important, and Note. The warnings and
cautions in this Safety section relate to the equipment in general and apply to all
aspects of the monitor. Be sure to read the other chapters because there are
additional warnings and cautions which relate to specific features of the monitor.
When grouped, warnings and cautions are listed alphabetically and do not imply any
order of importance.
Table 1-1. Definitions of Terminology
Revision C
Danger
A DANGER notice indicates an imminently
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
Warning
A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
Caution
A CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury. Cautions are also used to
avoid damage to equipment.
Contraindication
A CONTRAINDICATION describes any special
symptom or circumstance that renders the use of a
remedy or the carrying out of a procedure
inadvisable, usually because of a risk.
Important
An IMPORTANT notice indicates an emphasized
note. It is something you should be particularly
aware of; something not readily apparent.
Note
A NOTE indicates a particular point of information;
something on which to focus your attention.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
1-3
Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions
Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and
Precautions
Warnings
WARNINGS
ACCIDENTAL SPILLS—In the event that fluids are accidentally
spilled on the monitor, take the monitor out of operation and
inspect for damage.
APPLICATION—This monitor is not designed for direct cardiac
connection.
CONDUCTIVE CONNECTIONS—Avoid making any
conductive connections to applied parts (patient connection)
which are likely to degrade safety.
CONDUCTIVE PARTS—Ensure that the conductive parts of the
lead electrodes and associated connectors do not contact other
conductive parts including earth.
DEFIBRILLATION—During defibrillation, all personnel must
avoid contact with the patient and monitor to avoid a dangerous
shock hazard. In addition, proper placement of the paddles in
relation to the electrodes is required to minimize harm to the
patient.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK—To reduce the risk of electrical shock,
do not remove monitor cover. Refer servicing to qualified
personnel.
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE—Be aware that
strong electromagnetic fields may interfere with monitor
operation. Interference prevents the clear reception of signals by
the monitor. If the hospital is close to a strong transmitter such as
TV, AM or FM radio, police or fire stations, a HAM radio
operator, an airport, or cellular phone, their signals could be
picked up as signals by the monitor. If you feel interference is
affecting the monitor, contact your Service Representative to
check the monitor in your environment. Refer to page 1-8 for
additional information.
1-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions
WARNINGS
ELECTROSURGERY—The monitor is not designed for use with
high-frequency surgical devices. In addition, measurements may
be affected in the presence of strong electromagnetic sources such
as electrosurgery equipment.
EXPLOSION HAZARD—Do not use this equipment in the
presence of flammable anesthetics or inside an oxygen tent.
GROUNDING—Do not defeat the three-wire grounding feature
of the power cord by means of adaptors, plug modifications, or
other methods. A dangerous shock hazard to both patient and
operator may result.
INSTRUCTIONS—For continued and safe use of this equipment,
it is necessary to follow all listed instructions. However, the
instructions provided in this manual in no way supersede
established medical procedures concerning patient care. The
monitor does not replace observation and evaluation of the
patient, at regular intervals, by a qualified care provider who will
make diagnoses and decide on treatments and interventions.
INTERFACING OTHER EQUIPMENT—Monitoring equipment
must be interfaced with other types of medical equipment by
qualified biomedical engineering personnel. Be certain to consult
manufacturers’ specifications to maintain safe operation.
LEAKAGE CURRENT TEST—The interconnection of auxiliary
equipment with this device may increase the total leakage current.
When interfacing with other equipment, a test for leakage current
must be performed by qualified biomedical engineering personnel
before using with patients. Serious injury or death could result if
the leakage current exceeds applicable standards. The use of
accessory equipment not complying with the equivalent safety
requirements of this equipment may lead to a reduced level of
safety of the resulting system. Consideration relating to the
choice shall include: use of the accessory in the patient vicinity;
and evidence that the safety certification of the accessory has been
performed in accordance with the appropriate EN60601.1 and/or
EN60601.1.1 harmonized national standard.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
1-5
Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions
WARNINGS
LINE ISOLATION MONITOR TRANSIENTS—Line isolation
monitor transients may resemble actual cardiac waveforms, and
thus cause incorrect heart rate determinations and alarm activation
(or inhibition).
STRANGULATION—Make sure all patient cables, leadwires,
and tubing are positioned away from the patient’s head to
minimize the risk of accidental strangulation.
WATER BIRTHS—Do not use the monitor to directly monitor
patients during water births, in whirlpool or submersion water
baths, during showers, or in any other situation where the mother
is immersed in water. Doing so may result in electrical shock
hazard.
1-6
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions
Cautions
CAUTIONS
ANNUAL SERVICING—For continued safety and performance
of the monitor, it is recommended that the calibration, accuracy,
and electrical safety of the monitor be verified on an annual basis
by an GE Service Representative.
DAILY TESTING—It is essential that the monitor and
accessories be inspected every day. It is recommended practice to
initiate the monitor’s self-test feature at the beginning of each
monitoring session; follow the instructions in “Chapter 4, Setup
Procedures”.
ENVIRONMENT—The performance of the monitor has not been
tested in certain areas, such as x-ray and imaging suites. The
monitor is not recommended for use in these environments.
PERFORMANCE—Report all problems experienced with the
monitor. If the monitor is not working properly, contact your
Service Representative for service. The monitor should not be
used if it is not working properly.
PINCHING—Keep fingers clear of the paper roller because the
roller could pinch your fingers.
TRAPPING—Keep hands, hair, jewelry, and loose clothing away
from the paper roller because the roller could trap these items.
TRIPPING—Arrange monitoring equipment so that cords and
cables do not present a tripping hazard.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
1-7
Safety: Monitor Contraindications, Warnings, and Precautions
Electromagnetic Interference
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices
to the IEC 601-1-2:1993, EN60601-1-2:1994, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a typical medical installation.
However, because of the proliferation of radio-frequency transmitting equipment
and other sources of electrical noise in the health-care and home environments (for
example, cellular phones, mobile two-way radios, electrical appliances), it is
possible that high levels of such interference due to close proximity or strength of a
source, may result in disruption of performance of this device.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with these instructions, may cause harmful
interference with other devices in the vicinity. Disruption or interference may be
evidenced by erratic readings, cessation of operation, or incorrect functioning. If this
occurs, the site of use should be surveyed to determine the source of this disruption,
and actions taken to eliminate the source.
The user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
1-8
„
Turn equipment in the vicinity off and on to isolate the offending equipment.
„
Reorient or relocate the other receiving device.
„
Increase the separation between the interfering equipment and this equipment.
„
If assistance is required, contact your GE Service Representative.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Safety: Equipment Symbols
Equipment Symbols
The following is a list of symbols used on products manufactured by GE. Some
symbols may not appear on your unit.
Table 1-2. Equipment Symbols
!
ATTENTION: Consult accompanying documents.
TYPE B EQUIPMENT. Type B equipment is
suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient, excluding direct cardiac
application.
TYPE BF EQUIPMENT. Type BF equipment is
suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient, excluding direct cardiac
application. Type BF equipment has an F-type
applied part.
TYPE CF EQUIPMENT. Type CF equipment is
suitable for intentional external and internal
application to the patient, including direct cardiac
application. Type CF equipment has an F-type
applied part.
ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC).
EQUIPOTENTIALITY.
ON/STANDBY: button toggles between full power
and standby.
CAUTION
AC MAINS—The On/Standby switch does not disconnect the
monitor from AC mains power. To completely remove power, you
must disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
1-9
Safety: Equipment Symbols
For your notes
1-10
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 2
2
Introduction
This section lists the indications for use for monitors in the 170 Series as well as
provides an explanation of the different patient monitoring modalities.
This section summarizes the clinical applications of monitors in the 170 Series:
Indications for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Your Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-1
Introduction: Indications for Use
Indications for Use
Models 171 and 172
Models 171 and 172 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use in the monitoring of the
fetus during the antepartum period as well as throughout labor and delivery. Each
monitor also has an optional monitoring mode to detect fetal body movements.
Models 173 and 174
Models 173 and 174 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use in the monitoring of the
fetus throughout labor and delivery. Each monitor also has an optional monitoring
mode to detect fetal body movements.
2-2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Introduction: Monitoring Methods
Monitoring Methods
The following is a summary of all the clinical monitoring methods found in the 170
Series.
Fetal Heart Rate
External Method, Pulsed Doppler Ultrasound
Ultrasound monitoring is available on all 170 Series Monitors. Models 171 and 173
provide a single ultrasound channel, while Models 172 and 174 provide two
ultrasound channels.
Fetal heart rate can be measured externally using pulsed Doppler Ultrasound. A
transducer placed on the mother’s abdomen is used to direct an ultrasonic beam
toward the fetal heart and to sense Doppler shifted echoes created by moving cardiac
structures. A patented autocorrelation process is used to determine the timing of
successive cardiac cycles. The resulting fetal heart rate (FHR) pattern is recorded on
the strip chart paper and the FHR appears on the digital display.
Internal Method, Direct Fetal Electrocardiogram (FECG)
FECG is available on Models 173 and 174 only. The Model 173 provides a
dedicated FECG connector. The Model 174 provides a combi-connector which can
be used for either FECG or US.
FECG signals are obtained via a spiral electrode attached to the fetal presenting part.
FHR is computed on a beat-to-beat basis using the R-to-R time interval of the QRS
complexes. The instantaneous FHR pattern is printed on the strip chart paper and
the FHR appears on the digital display.
Maternal Uterine Activity
External Method, Tocotransducer (TOCO)
Maternal uterine activity is measured externally using a tocotransducer (toco).
Relative pressure within the uterus is measured using a tocotransducer attached to
the mother’s abdomen in the area of the uterine fundus. The readings are plotted on
the strip chart paper in a relative scale from 0 to 100 as well as shown on the digital
display. All 170 Series Monitors provide external uterine activity monitoring.
Internal Method, Intrauterine Pressure Catheter and Strain Gauge (IUP)
IUP is available on Models 173 and 174 only.
Intrauterine pressure is measured using a transcervical catheter. The pressure trend
is plotted over the range of 0 to 100 mmHg and the readings appear on the digital
display.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
2-3
Introduction: Features
Features
The 170 Series is a family of fetal monitors offering various combinations of
modalities to suit your institution’s needs. Each monitor boasts the following
qualities:
2-4
„
The strip chart recorder is a quiet, easy-to-load, high resolution thermal array
printer. The recorder prints continuous trends and alphanumeric data on one
strip chart.
„
Automatic mode selection is provided simply by inserting the appropriate
transducer plug into the front panel receptacle.
„
Wide beam ultrasound transducer provides an advanced level of system
performance.
„
Transducer connectors are easy-to-use, color-coded, and durable.
„
Frequently-used functions are controlled by front panel buttons—including
audio volume, uterine activity reference, alarm silence, event mark, paper
advance, and user setup controls.
„
The ultrasound mode provides clean accurate traces with few “dropouts”
because of a patented autocorrelation processing.
„
Fetal heart rate alarm limits are user-defined, with pre-set defaults.
„
Alarm silencing is controlled by a front panel pushbutton—colored for easy
recognition.
„
Fetal heart rate alarm conditions have both audible and visual indications. The
audible indicator can be silenced on an alarm-by-alarm basis.
„
Two RS-232C ports provide interfacing to external devices.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Introduction: About Your Monitor
About Your Monitor
This manual describes all monitors in the 170 Series; therefore some sections may
not apply to your model monitor. Refer to Table 2-1.
Model 171
The Model 171 Antepartum Fetal Monitor provides singleton ultrasound and
external uterine activity monitoring.
Model 172
The Model 172 Antepartum Fetal Monitor provides dual ultrasound and external
uterine activity monitoring.
Model 173
The Model 173 Intrapartum Monitor provides dual heart rate monitoring using
FECG and ultrasound. The monitor also provides external uterine activity
monitoring using a tocotransducer or internal monitoring using an intrauterine
pressure catheter (IUPC).
Model 174
The Model 174 Intrapartum Monitor provides dual heart rate monitoring using
FECG/ultrasound or dual ultrasound. The monitor also provides external uterine
activity monitoring using a tocotransducer or internal monitoring using an IUPC.
Table 2-1. Summary of Features
Feature
External uterine activity (TOCO)
171
172
173
174
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Internal uterine activity (IUPC)
Ultrasounda
9
Dual ultrasound
9
9
FECGa
9
9
9
Fetal heart rate alarms
9
9
9
9
Fetal movement detection (optional)
9
9
9
9
Heartbeat coincidence
9
9
9
Fetal heart rate offset
9
9
9
a
Revision C
The Model 174 has a combi-connector for the primary FHR that can be used for either US or FECG.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
2-5
For your notes
2-6
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 3
Controls, Indicators, and
3
Connectors
This section describes all possible controls, indicators, and connectors in the 170
Series.
This section contains the following information:
Front Panel Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Panel Displays and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Strip Chart Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Rear Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-1
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls
Front Panel Controls
Figure 3-1. Front Panel Controls (Model 172 shown)
Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls
Symbol
Name
Power
Record
Paper Advance
Mark/Offset
Setup
Volume
3-2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls
Table 3-1. Front Panel Controls
UA Reference
Alarm Silence
Power Button and Indicator
Pressing the blue Power button turns the monitor on and illuminates the green
indicator to the left of the button. Pressing the button again puts the monitor in
standby and extinguishes the indicator.
Record Button and Indicator
Pressing the Record pushbutton activates the recorder, provided paper is installed;
the amber indicator illuminates to the left of the button. Pressing the button again
turns the recorder off and extinguishes the indicator.
Paper Advance Button
Pressing the Paper Advance button causes the recorder to advance chart paper at a
rate of 40 cm/min for as long as the button is pressed. If the recorder is on, twenty
seconds after the button is released, the recorder prints the time, date, active trends
legends, and chart speed.
Mark/Offset Button
The Mark/Offset button is a multifunction button:
Mark
Briefly pressing the button prints an event mark
heart rate grid.
on the bottom two lines of the
Offset (Models 172, 173, and 174 Only)
When the heart rate offset mode is enabled, pressing and holding the Mark/Offset
button for at least two seconds shifts the secondary FHR trend +20 BPM for
visibility purposes. You will hear a “beep” for confirmation. Refer to the “170
Series Operator’s Manual” for more information.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-3
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls
Setup Button
Pressing and holding this button while the monitor is on enters a user setup mode for
configuring the monitor.
Pressing and holding this button during power up enters a service setup mode.
Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for instructions.
Volume Buttons
The Volume buttons are used to raise ( ) and lower ( ) the volume of the audio
signals emitted by the speaker. The volume buttons are also used during setup.
Model 171
This monitor has two volume buttons used to control the ultrasound audio.
Models 172, 173, and 174
These monitors have four volume buttons. The left pair controls the audio signals
for the mode shown in the primary FHR display; likewise, the right pair of buttons
controls the audio for the mode shown in the secondary FHR display.
Setup Mode
When the monitor is in setup mode (user or service), the volume buttons change: the
setting or value shown in the FHR display; or the monitor feature code shown in the
UA display. (For Models 172, 173, and 174, only the leftmost volume controls are
active during setup mode.)
3-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls
UA Reference Button
The UA Reference button is used to set the uterine activity pressure reference. This
button is also used during setup.
Setting a Baseline for External Monitoring (Tocotransducer)
Briefly pressing the UA Reference button sets the pressure baseline at a preset
default. The monitor is shipped from the factory with a default setting of 10 relative
units. Qualified service personnel can access a service screen to set the default to 5,
10, 15, 20, or 25 relative units.
Pressing this button for more than two seconds causes the uterine activity reference
value to override the default setting and cycle through all available selections: 5, 10,
15, 20, or 25 relative units, starting at the default setting—until the button is
released. While the button is held down, the strip chart tracing remains unchanged.
Once the button is released, the recorder trace takes on this new value. This value is
stored as the new baseline for the currently measured uterine activity signal.
Setting a Baseline for Internal Monitoring (IUPC)
Pressing the UA Reference button sets the pressure baseline at 0 mmHg.
NOTE: IUPC monitoring is only available on Models 173 and 174.
Setup Mode
When the monitor is in setup mode, the UA Reference button selects the active
display. Pressing the button alternates between the UA display (which shows a
monitor feature code) and the FHR display (which shows the setting or value for the
selected feature code). When the UA display is active, the ± sign lights. When the
FHR display is active, the heartbeat indicator
lights.
Alarm Silence Button
This button is yellow for easy recognition. Pressing the Alarm Silence button
removes the audible indication of an individual fetal heart rate alarm.
NOTE: Silencing an alarm does not affect the visual indications.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-5
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators
Front Panel Displays and Indicators
Fetal Heart Rate Display(s) and Indicator(s)
FHR Display
A three-digit yellow numeric display indicates the fetal heart rate in beats per
minute. The value flashes during an alarm condition.
Heartbeat Indicator
A yellow heart shaped indicator flashes with each detected valid heartbeat for the
fetal heart.
Primary Versus Secondary (Models 172, 173, and 174 only)
Refer to Table 3-2 for a summary of display positions relative to connectors.
Uterine Activity Display
This green three-digit display indicates the uterine activity values.
Tocotransducer
If uterine activity is measured using a tocotransducer, the uterine activity value
displays in relative units. A plus sign flashes when the uterine activity value
exceeds the strip chart range of 100 relative units.
IUP (Models 173 and 174 Only)
If uterine activity is measured using an intrauterine pressure catheter or a strain
gauge pressure transducer, the uterine activity value displays in mmHg.
.
Table 3-2. Display/Connector Summary
Monitor
Mode
Model 171
US
TOCO
Model 172
US1
US2
1
2
Display
Connector
3-6
1
Model 173
TOCO
US
FECG
Model 174
TOCO
or
IUP
US1
or
FECG
US2
TOCO
or
IUP
2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Displays and Indicators
Alarms Disabled Indicator
This yellow indicator illuminates when all alarms have been disabled. The indicator
is unlit when alarms are enabled. Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for
information on enabling/disabling alarms.
Audio Alarm Indicator
Active Patient Alarms
For active patient alarms, this yellow indicator flashes; it continues to flash even if
the alarm is silenced.
Resolved Patient Alarms
For resolved patient alarms, the indicator continues to flash until you silence the
alarm. This ensures that the alarm is acknowledged by a clinician.
Signal Quality Alarms
For signal quality alarms, the indicator flashes during an active alarm and turns off
as soon as the condition is resolved. The indicator is unaffected by silencing the
audio alarm.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-7
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors
Front Panel Connectors
Model 171 Connectors
Figure 3-2. Model 171 Connectors
Ultrasound Connector
The ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept
only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from
this transducer shows in the fetal heart rate display.
Uterine Activity Connector
The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to
accept a Corometrics tocotransducer. The uterine activity value obtained from this
transducer shows in the uterine activity display.
1
3-8
If the Model 171 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be
designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you
unplug the ultrasound transducer from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false alarms.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors
Model 172 Connectors
1
2
Figure 3-3. Model 172 Connectors
1
Primary Ultrasound Connector
2
Secondary Ultrasound Connector
The primary ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed
to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived
from this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart rate display.
The secondary ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle identical to the
primary ultrasound connector described above. The fetal heart rate derived from
this connector displays in the secondary fetal heart rate display.
Uterine Activity Connector
The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to
accept a Corometrics tocotransducer. The uterine activity value obtained from this
transducer shows in the uterine activity display.
1
Revision C
If the Model 172 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be
designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you
unplug the ultrasound transducer(s) from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false alarms.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-9
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors
Model 173 Connectors
Figure 3-4. Model 173 Connectors
Ultrasound Connector
The ultrasound connector1 is a blue, round receptacle mechanically keyed to accept
only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate derived from
this transducer shows in the primary fetal heart display.
FECG Connector
1
The FECG connector is a dark grey, round receptacle mechanically keyed to
accept a Corometrics FECG cable/legplate plug. The fetal heart rate derived from
the spiral electrode displays in the secondary fetal heart rate display.
Uterine Activity Connector
The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to
accept a Corometrics tocotransducer, a Corometrics strain gauge transducer plug, or
any intrauterine pressure catheter with compatible cable plug. The uterine activity
value obtained from this transducer shows in the uterine activity display.
1
3-10
If the Model 173 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be
designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you
unplug the ultrasound and/or FECG transducers from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false
alarms.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Connectors
Model 174 Connectors
Figure 3-5. Model 174 Connectors
Combi-Connector (Primary Ultrasound or FECG)
The combi-connector is a blue connector1 with a dark grey inner center. This round
receptacle is mechanically keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer
plug or a Corometrics FECG cable/legplate plug. The fetal heart rate derived from
this transducer or cable/legplate shows in the primary fetal heart display.
IMPORTANT
COMBI-CONNECTOR—The combi-connector can be used for
monitoring ultrasound or FECG depending on what you plug in
(US transducer or FECG cable/legplate). When used in
conjunction with the secondary ultrasound connector, you have
the option of monitoring twins using dual US or FECG/US.
Secondary Ultrasound Connector
1
The secondary ultrasound connector is a blue, round receptacle mechanically
keyed to accept only a Corometrics ultrasound transducer plug. The fetal heart rate
derived from this connector shows in the secondary fetal heart rate display.
Uterine Activity Connector
The uterine activity connector is a white, round receptacle mechanically keyed to
accept a Corometrics tocotransducer, a Corometrics strain gauge transducer plug, or
any intrauterine pressure catheter with compatible cable plug. The uterine activity
value obtained from this transducer shows in the uterine activity display.
1
Revision C
If the Model 174 is interfaced to a clinical information system (CIS), be aware that the CIS may be
designed to alarm when there is no fetal heart rate signal. Therefore it is recommended that you
unplug the ultrasound and/or FECG transducers from the monitor, when not in use, to eliminate false
alarms.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-11
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
0
2
8
4
6
10
4305AAO
12
kPa
FHR
240
bpm
UA
Strip Chart Recorder
Figure 3-6. Strip Chart Recorder
The strip chart recorder is located on the right side of the front panel. Latches on
each side of the recorder open the paper drawer.
Two styles of paper are available: 30-240 BPM scale and 50-210 BPM scale.
Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for instructions on loading strip chart paper
into the recorder.
Heart Rate Grid
One or two fetal heart rate trends print in the top (or left) grid of the strip chart
paper—depending on your model monitor and the active modalities.
If only one fetal heart rate is being monitored, the FHR trend is printed in black. If
twins are being monitored, the primary trend is printed in plain black while the
secondary trend is bolded.
Refer to the “170 Series Operator’s Manual” for additional information about fetal
heart rate trends and annotations.
3-12
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Strip Chart Recorder
Uterine Activity Grid
The uterine activity trend prints in black on the bottom (or right) grid of the strip
chart paper.
Refer to the “170 Series Operator’s Manual” for more information about uterine
activity trends and annotations.
Annotation Area
An annotation area is provided between the fetal heart rate and uterine activity grids.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-13
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Rear Panel Connectors
Rear Panel Connectors
CONNECT TO:
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
RS232
1
REF 7714AAT ONLY
RS232
2
Figure 3-7. Rear Panel Connectors
Power Supply Connector
This is the receptacle for the AC adapter, P/N 7714AAT only. A line cord connects
from the other end of the adapter to an AC wall outlet. The connector is labeled
CONNECT TO GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY. The power supply is a
universal AC-to-DC converter which can accept an AC input in the range 100–230
VAC. The converter supplies a regulated 12 Vdc to the monitor.
Remote Mark Connector
This connector is provided for attaching an optional Corometrics Model 146 Fetal
Acoustic Stimulator (FAST). The annotation
prints on the strip chart each time
the Model 146 is used.
Remote Mark Connector
This connector is provided for attaching an optional Corometrics Remote Event
Marker. This accessory annotates the strip chart recorder paper with a marker which
can be configured as one of the following:
: This annotation is commonly used to record an “event.”
FM
: This annotation is commonly used as an indication that the mother has
perceived fetal movement.
FM
The monitor is factory set to use the
annotation. Refer to the “Chapter 4, Setup
Procedures” for information about selecting the annotation.
3-14
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Rear Panel Connectors
Nurse Call Interface
This connector is intended for future interfacing to a standard Nurse Call System.
RS-232C Connectors
Two RS-232C connectors are provided for interfacing to peripheral equipment such
as:
„
a maternal non-invasive blood pressure monitor
„
a central information system that uses Hewlett-Packard’s Digital Series
Interface Protocol
Contact your Service Representative for more information.
CAUTION
NON-DESTRUCTIVE VOLTAGE—The maximum nondestructive voltage that may be applied to the rear panel
connectors is 0 V. Do not attempt to connect cables to these
connectors without contacting your Biomedical Engineering
Department or Service Representative. This is to ensure the
connectors comply with leakage-current requirements of one of
the following applicable standards: Underwriters Laboratories
UL-2601.1, Canadian Standards Associations CSA 22.2 No. 125,
or International Electrotechnical Commission EN60601.1.
Telemetry Connector
This high-density 15-pin connector is intended for future interfacing to the receiver
of a Corometrics telemetry system. Contact your Service Representative for more
information.
IMPORTANT
TELEMETRY—For proper operation when using a telemetry
system, disconnect all transducers from the front panel of the 170
Series Monitor. Refer to the operator’s manual for your telemetry
system for more information.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
3-15
For your notes
3-16
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 4
Setup Procedures
4
This section contains information about configuring a 170 Series Monitor to meet
the individual needs of your clinic or hospital. Use of the monitor will vary
according to the accessories attached to it, the clinical applications in which it is
used, and the personal preferences of the users.
This chapter lists all available user setup options in the monitor and provides stepby-step instructions for making selections:
Loading Strip Chart Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Turning the Monitor On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Recorder Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Customizing the Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Printing a Summary of Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Quick Reference Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Flasher Software Utility Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-1
Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper
Loading Strip Chart Paper
The required paper for use with the 170 Series Monitor is:
„
catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/CAO
(HR scale of 30–240 BPM); or
„
catalog number (REF) 4305BAO/DAO
(HR scale of 50–210 BPM).
CAUTIONS
LOADING PAPER—The instructions for loading paper into a
120 or 170 Series Monitor are different than the instructions for
loading paper into other Corometrics monitors with which you
may be familiar. Improper loading can cause paper jams. Follow
the instructions carefully.
PAPER TYPE—Do not use non-Corometrics paper or paper
designed for use with other Corometrics monitors. Using paper
other than catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/BAO/CAO/DAO:
may produce inferior print quality; could result in permanent
damage to the recorder’s print head; and may void your warranty.
STORAGE/TRANSPORT—Paper should be installed in the
monitor’s strip chart recorder at all times. This reduces particle
build up on the printhead and facilitates opening the recorder door.
To protect against paper jams, the 170 Series recorder contains a paper-loading
sensor which detects if the paper has been incorrectly loaded. When the recorder
detects a paper-load–error condition:
„
the recorder will not print;
„
the Record indicator flashes on and off every second; and
„
three short beeps (low tones) sound every three seconds at a fixed volume.
The most likely cause of a paper-load–error condition is that you loaded the paper
with the black squares facing up. The correct method is to load the paper with the
black squares down, as explained later in this section.
4-2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper
To install Corometrics catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/BAO/CAO/DAO chart
paper in the 170 Series Monitor, follow these steps:
CAUTION
LOADING PAPER—Paper loading instructions for a 170 or 120
Series Monitor are different than other Corometrics monitors with
which you may be familiar.
1.
Press on each side of the paper drawer to release the drawer latches.
Figure 4-1. Releasing the Drawer Latches
2.
Slide the paper drawer out toward you.
Figure 4-2. Opening the Paper Drawer
3.
Revision C
Remove the plastic wrapper from the paper and discard.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-3
Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper
4.
Fan the pack of Z-fold paper on all sides to loosen any folds and to ensure
proper feed of the paper throughout the recorder.
Figure 4-3. Fanning the Paper
5.
Hold the package of paper so that:
‹
the black squares are on the bottom of the pack; and
‹
the Information Technologies name and page numbers are on the left side
of the pack.
NOTE: The black squares indicate the end of the recorder paper. When the black
squares appear, the strip chart recorder has approximately 20 minutes of
paper remaining, when running at a speed of 3 cm/min.
Figure 4-4. Orienting the Paper
4-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper
6.
Unfold two sheets from the top of the pack so that they extend toward you.
Figure 4-5. Creating a Paper Leader
7.
Place the pack in the drawer so that the pack is laying flat in the bottom of the
paper tray.
Figure 4-6. Inserting the Paper
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-5
Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper
8.
Pull the paper leader taut at an angle between remaining pack and the paper
guides. The balance of the paper pack should stay flat in the drawer as shown in
Figure 4-7. (The paper guides are shown in Figure 4-8.)
Pull paper
leader taut
Remaining paper
lays flat in drawer
Figure 4-7. Paper Drawer Side Cutaway View
9.
Slide the drawer closed by exerting even pressure on both sides of the drawer.
Avoid skewing the drawer in its tracks. (The pre-printed vertical lines on the
paper should be parallel to the printhead.) You will hear a click when the
drawer is locked in place.
Paper Guide
210
Paper Guide
12
0
2
4
6
kPa
8
10
UA
30
4305
AA
O
60
90
120
150
180
FH
R
240
bpm
Printhead
Figure 4-8. Closing the Paper Drawer
IMPORTANT
PAPER—Paper should always be installed in the monitor. The
monitor runs a self-test routine each time it is powered on; part of
this routine includes a recorder test.
4-6
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Turning the Monitor On
Turning the Monitor On
The 170 Series uses a universal AC-to-DC converter which accepts an AC input in
the range 100–230 VAC. The converter supplies a regulated 12 Vdc to the 170
Series Monitor.
1.
Connect the AC adapter into the power supply connector labeled: CONNECT TO
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS REF 7714AAT ONLY.
Figure 4-9. Connecting the AC Adapter
2.
Connect one end of the detachable line cord to the AC adapter; connect the
other end into a hospital grade grounded wall outlet.
3.
Press the monitor’s Power button
. The green indicator next to the button
illuminates. A self-test routine automatically runs. Read "Monitor Self-Test
Routines" on the next page.
Figure 4-10. Turning the Monitor On
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-7
Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines
Monitor Self-Test Routines
NOTE: Ensure paper is installed in the recorder in order to verify a successful
recorder test.
Each 170 Series Monitor contains a self-test routine which checks the internal
circuitry of the monitor, the displays and indicators, and the strip chart recorder.
The self-test routine is automatically initiated each time you turn on the monitor.
CAUTION
SELF-TEST FAILURE—If there is any problem with the self-test
routine, turn off the monitor and remove it from operation. Notify
your Biomedical Engineering Department or Service
Representative.
After completion of a successful self-test routine, the monitor is ready for use.
NOTE: If the recorder was off at the time the monitor was turned off, the test
routine will turn the recorder on, then turn it off after the tests are complete.
If the recorder was on at the time the monitor was turned off, the tests will
be performed and the recorder will remain on.
Table 4-1. Summary of Self-Test Routines
Test Description
4-8
What to Verify
Display/Indicator Test: All displays and indicators
illuminate.
Ensure all indicators and each segment of the displays
illuminate throughout the entire self-test routine.
Internal Test: The internal circuitry of the monitor is
verified.
Make sure the monitor performs the recorder test. If
there is a problem with the internal circuitry, the recorder
test will not be performed.
Recorder Test: The following message prints on the
strip chart paper: TEST: ARE ALL DOTS PRINTED?
Three continuous lines are drawn across the strip chart
recorder paper, testing the integrity of the printhead.
See Figure 4-11.
Ensure that the lines are printed in the correct positions
on the paper. Verify that the lines are continuous and no
gaps appear on the traces.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Monitor Self-Test Routines
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
4305CAO
41153
PAGES
REMAING
FHR
240
bpm
210
180
150
HR Scale
30-240
120
90
60
30
TEST:ARE
ALL DOTS
PRINTED?
100
12
75
10
8
50
6
4
25
2
0
kPa
UA 0 mm Hg
Figure 4-11. Recorder Test
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-9
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
Customizing the Monitor
User Setup Mode
The monitor includes a user setup mode where you can:
‹
enable/disable alarm functionality
‹
set the high alarm limit for the fetal heart rate
‹
set the low alarm limit for the fetal heart rate
‹
set the alarm volume
‹
set the time and date
Service Setup Mode
The monitor includes a service setup mode where you can access all user setup
modes as well as the following:
4-10
‹
enable/disable fetal movement detection
(if purchased and installed)
‹
select the language for printing on the strip chart paper
‹
set the chart speed
‹
select the paper scale
‹
choose a communication mode for each rear panel communications port
‹
set the baud rate for each communications port
‹
select the remote mark annotation style
‹
enable/disable fetal heart rate offset
(Models 172, 173, and 174 only)
‹
enable/disable ECG artifact elimination
(Models 173 and 174 only)
‹
enable/disable heartbeat coincidence
(Models 172, 173, and 174 only)
‹
set the default UA reference value
‹
perform a recorder alignment test
‹
print the software version number along with a summary of all current
configuration settings
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
Setting or value for
selected feature (e.g.
FHR Alarms On or 180
BPM High Alarm Limit).
Monitor Feature Code
(e.g. FHR Alarms or
High Alarm Limit).
EXAMPLE
1
Press
to enter the
user setup mode.
1
2
( or ) to
Use
change the number.
2
3
Use
( ) to select
feature code 2—FHR
High Alarm Limit.
See Table 4-2.
Press to switch
displays. The
heartbeat indicator
lights.
1
2
Press to switch
between displays.
1
2
Use
( or ) to
change the number.
4
5
Use
( ) to change
the value to 185
BPM. See Table
4-2.
Press to switch
displays again. The
± sign lights. (Repeat
steps 2 to 5 .)
1
2
Press to switch between displays.
Repeat steps to change other settings.
1
2
NOTE: For Models 172, 173, and 174, use the leftmost set of volume controls.
Figure 4-12. Setup Mode Summary (Model 172 shown)
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-11
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
You can enter the user setup mode during an active monitoring session. The fetal
heart rate and uterine activity trends print without interruption and the FHR tones
remain audible; however you will be unable to see the heart rate and uterine activity
values on the display while in the user setup mode.
You can only enter the service setup mode from a power off state.
NOTE: If an alarm occurs while in user setup mode, the heart rate display will not
flash; however, the alarm indicator
flashes and the audio alarm sounds.
As soon as you exit the setup mode, the affected display flashes to indicate
the alarm condition.
1.
Enter the appropriate mode, user or service, as follows:
User: To enter the user mode:
‹
Press the monitor’s Power button
to turn on the monitor. Wait until
the monitor completes the self-test routine and enters the normal operating
mode.
‹
Press and hold the Setup button
setup mode.
, for three seconds, to enter the user
Service: To enter the service mode:
4-12
‹
Press and hold the Setup button
‹
Press and hold the blue Power button
‹
Release both buttons. The service mode is now activated.
.
2.
Use the UA Reference button
to toggle between the setup code (shown in
the UA display) and the setting or value (shown in the primary FHR display).
The UA display is active when the ± qualifier illuminates; the FHR display is
active when the heartbeat indicator ( ) illuminates.
3.
Use the Volume buttons
to increase ( ) or decrease ( ) the code,
value, or setting shown in the active display. Refer to Table 4-2 (user codes) or
Table 4-3 (service codes). (For Models 172, 173, and 174, use the leftmost set
of volume controls.)
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all settings are configured.
5.
Press the Setup button
to exit the setup mode. Exiting the user setup
mode returns to the monitoring mode; exiting the service setup mode turns the
monitor to standby.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
to exit the setup mode (user or service)
NOTE: If you press the Power button
any changes you made will not be stored in memory.
NOTE: You must exit by pressing the Setup button
take effect.
in order for changes to
NOTE: If an alarm is in progress when you exit the user setup mode, any changes
to an alarm setting do not take effect until the alarm condition is resolved.
Table 4-2 lists the available settings for the user setup mode. Table 4-3 lists the
available settings for the service setup mode. Table 4-4 provides a summary of the
factory default settings for both the user and service setup options.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-13
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
Table 4-2. Summary of User Setup Codes
Code
(UA Display)
Code
1
4-14
Setting or Value
(Primary FHR Display)
Description
FHR Alarms
0 = off (disabled)
1 = on (enabled)
2
FHR High Alarm Limit
140–210 (BPM, in increments of 5 BPM)
3
FHR Low Alarm Limit
50–140 (BPM, in increments of 5 BPM)
4
FHR Alarm Volume
2–10
10
Minutes (time setting)
0–59 (minutes)
11
Hours (time setting)
0–23 (hours)
12
Day of Month (date setting)
1–31 (day)
13
Month (date setting)
1–12 (month)
14
Year (date setting)
00–99 (year)
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
Table 4-3. Summary of Service Setup Codes
Code (UA Display)
Setting Or Value
(Primary FHR Display)
Code #
Code Description
20
ECG artifact elimination (173, 174 only)
0 = off; 1 = on
21
heartbeat coincidence (172, 173, 174 only)
0 = off; 1 = on
22
fetal movement enable/disable
0 = off
1 = on (if option installed)
23
language
0 = English; 1 = Spanish; 2 = German;
3 = French; 4 = Japanese; 5 = Italian;
6 = Swedish; 7 = Dutch; 8 = Portuguese;
9 = Chinese
24
chart speed
1= 1; 2 = 2; 3 = 3 (cm/min)
25
paper scale
0 = 30–240; 1 = 50–210 (BPM)
30, 40
communications mode (port 1, 2)
0 = HP; 1 = HP w/notes;
2 = ext BP; 3 = factory test; 4 = ext. FSpO2;
5 = 115 update; 6 = 115 transmit/receive
31, 41
baud rate (port 1, 2)
300; 600; 1200; 2400;
4800; 9600; 19200; 38400
50
remote mark annotation style
0 = FM; 1 = arrow
51
future use (Japanese units only)
0 = off; 1 = on
52
fetal heart rate offset enable/disable
0 = off; 1 = 10 minute auto-revert; 2 = on
53
UA reference default
5, 10, 15, 20, 25 (relative units)
100
recorder alignment
0–255
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-15
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
Table 4-4. Summary of Factory Defaults
Setup Option
Factory Default
FHR Alarms
on
FHR High Alarm Limit
160 BPM
FHR Low Alarm Limit
120 BPM
FHR Alarm Volume
5
Time/Date
Eastern Standard Time or DaylightSaving Time—whichever is
applicable
*ECG Artifact Elimination
(Models 173 and 174 only)
off
*Heartbeat Coincidence
(Models 172, 173, and 174 only)
off
*Fetal Movement Detection
(if purchased and installed)
on
*Language
set according to shipping
destination
*Recorder Speed
United States: 3 cm/min
International: 1 cm/min
*Paper Scale
United States: 30–240 BPM
International: 50–210 BPM
*RS-232 Port 1
Communications Mode
HP
*RS-232 Port 1
Baud Rate
1200
*RS-232 Port 2
Communications Mode
ext. BP
*RS-232 Port 2
Baud Rate
600
*Remote Mark Annotation
on (
FM
Hospital/Clinic Setting
)
*HR Offset
(Models 172, 173, and 174 only)
on with 10-minute auto-revert
*UA Reference
10 relative units
* = service setup mode
4-16
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Customizing the Monitor
Printing a Summary of Configuration Settings
To print the software version number and a summary of configuration settings on
the strip chart paper:
NOTE: You can only enter the service setup mode from a power off state.
1.
2.
Enter the service mode:
‹
Press and hold the Setup button
‹
Press and hold the blue Power button
‹
Release both buttons. The service mode is now activated.
Press the Record button
.
. Figure 4-13 shows a sample printout.
Figure 4-13. Configuration Summary Printout
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-17
Setup Procedures: Quick Reference Card
Quick Reference Card
Your monitor was shipped with a Quick Reference Card in the appropriate language.
The front side lists the user setup codes while the reverse lists the service setup
codes. The card is laminated and comes with hook and loop adhesives to attach to
your monitor.
A copy of this card is included on the following page if you wish to make additional
copies for training. Additional Quick Reference Cards can be purchased by calling
one of the numbers listed in the front of this manual. Table 4-5 provides a summary
of the Quick Reference Card re-order numbers:
Table 4-5. 170 Series Quick Reference Card
4-18
Language
Document Part Number
English
2003024-001
Chinese
2003024-002
Dutch
2003024-003
French
2003024-004
German
2003024-005
Italian
2003024-006
Japanese
2003024-007
Portuguese
2003024-008
Spanish
2003024-009
Swedish
2003024-010
Polish
2003024-011
Greek
2003024-013
Russian
2003024-014
Czechoslovakian
2003024-015
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Setup Procedures: Quick Reference Card
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
4-19
Setup Procedures: Flasher Software Utility Upgrade
Flasher Software Utility Upgrade
The Corometrics Flasher is a software utility program which uses one of the
monitor’s RS-232 serial ports to upgrade to a newer software release; or to install a
purchased option such as fetal movement detection. Each Flasher disk contains the
software upgrade for one-time use only. (In other words, you need an individual
Flasher disk for each monitor being upgraded.) Table 4-6 lists the Flasher kits
available for the 170 Series.
Table 4-6. Flasher Kits
Kit Description
Catalog Number
Fetal Movement Detection
Feature Addition
1700AAO
Software Upgrade to Version 3.2x
which includes the following
features:
„ Heartbeat coincidence
„ Portuguese/Chinese languages
(1701BAO only)
„ Communications interface to
external FSpO2 monitors
„ Communications support of 115
Update and 115 Transmit/
Receive protocols
4-20
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
1701AAO (English language units)
1701BAO (non-English language units)
Revision C
Chapter 5
Theory of Operation
5
This section of the manual contains the electronic theory of operation for the 170
Series Monitor. When possible, references are made to the appropriate schematic
contained in “Chapter 11, Parts Lists” of this manual
Throughout this chapter, signal names ending with an asterisk (*) are active low.
This chapter contains the following information:
Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Main Board Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-1
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Functional Overview
For all 170 Series Monitors, the Main Board controls the majority of the 170 Series
functionality including:
‹
antepartum (US, TOCO) front ends and connector(s)
‹
uterine activity front end and connector
‹
seven-segment displays
‹
user-interface buttons
‹
peripheral device communications
‹
processing
For Models 173 and 174, a separate FECG/IUP Board controls:
‹
intrapartum front ends
‹
isolation for analog signals
Figure 5-1 provides an overview of the system architecture. Table 5-1 through
Table 5-17 provide pinouts for each of the external connectors and the internal main
board harness connectors. Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-9 provide illustrations of the
front and rear panel connectors.
Speaker
Cable
Printhead
Cable
Sensor
Display Board
Membrane
Switch Panel
Display
Speaker
Cable
Cable
RECORDER MODULE
Printhead and Sensors
MAIN BOARD
Membrane
Cable
Figure 5-1. Overview of System Architecture
5-2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-1. Main Power Connector
Pin Number
Description
1
+12 Vdc Input
2
Negative Input
3
Shield
2
1
3
Figure 5-2. Main Power Connector
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-3
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-2. Recorder Printhead Connector
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Type
(Relative To Recorder
Board)
Signal Description
1
+24V
Input
+24 Volts for Recorder
2
+24V
Input
+24 Volts for Recorder
3
+24V
Input
+24 Volts for Recorder
4
+24V
Input
+24 Volts for Recorder
5
HGND
Input
Ground for +24V
6
HGND
Input
Ground for +24V
7
HGND
Input
Ground for +24v
8
HGND
Input
Ground for +24V
9
HGND
Input
Ground for +24V
10
+5v
Input
+5V for Logic
11
NC
No Connection
12
NC
No Connection
13
STB0*
Input
Head Strobe 0
14
STB1*
Input
Head Strobe 1
15
STB2*
Input
Head Strobe 2
16
STB3*
Input
Head Strobe 3
17
BSCK
Input
Head Serial Clock (3.07 MHz)
18
LD*
Input
Head Load Line
19
PDATA
Input
Head Serial Data
20
NC
No Connection
* Active low.
5-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-3. Recorder Motor Connector
Signal Type
(Relative to
Main board)
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
NC
2
P3
Output
Motor Phase 3
3
P4
Output
Motor Phase 4
4
+5VM
Output
+5 Volts for Motor
5
NC
6
P2
Output
Motor Phase 2
7
P1
Output
Motor Phase 1
8
+5VM
Output
+5 Volts for Motor
No Connection
No Connection
Table 5-4. Recorder Sensor Connector
Signal Type
(Relative to
Main board)
Pin Number
Signal Name
1
NC
2
MISCOL
Input
Paper Misload Sensor Collector
3
MISLED
Output
Paper Misload Sensor LED Voltage
4
GND
Output
Ground for Sensor
5
NC
6
OUTCOL
Input
Paper Out Sensor Collector
7
OUTLED
Output
Paper Out Sensor LED Voltage
8
GND
Output
Ground for Sensor
9
DOOR
Input
Door Switch Input
10
GND
Output
Ground for Door Switch
Revision C
Signal Description
No Connection
No Connection
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-5
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-5. RS-232 Connector 1
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
+5V
200 mA Fused
2
RTS
Request to Send Output from Monitor
3
RXD
Receive Data Input to Monitor
4
GND
Signal Ground
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
TXD
Transmit Data Output from Monitor
7
CTS
Clear to Send Input to Monitor
8
+5V
200 mA Fused
Table 5-6. RS-232 Connector 2
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
GND
Signal Ground
2
RTS
Request to Send Output from Monitor
3
RXD
Receive Data Input to Monitor
4
GND
Signal Ground
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
TXD
Transmit Data Output from Monitor
7
CTS
Clear to Send Input to Monitor
8
GND
Signal Ground
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 5-3. RJ-45 Connector (facing the rear panel from the outside)
5-6
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-7. Speaker Connector
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
SPKR-LO
Speaker Low Side Connection
2
SPKR-HI
Speaker High Side Connection
Table 5-8. Remote Mark Connectors
(Remote Event Marker and Fetal Acoustic Stimulator)
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
Tip
Remote Event Marker or Fetal Acoustic Stimulator
2
Shunt
No Connection
3
NC
No Connection
4
Sleeve
Ground
1
2
3
4
Figure 5-4. Remote Mark Connectors
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-7
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-9. Ultrasound Connector(s)
Pin #
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
NC
No Connection
2
NC
No Connection
3
GND
Chassis Ground
4
XMIT/RCV SHIELD
Shield for Transmit/Receive
5
XMIT/RCV
Transmit/Receive
6
NC
No Connection
7
NC
No Connection
8
NC
No Connection
9
GND
Chassis Ground
10
NC
No Connection
11
U/S ENABLE*
Enable for Ultrasound Channel
12
GND
Chassis Ground
* Active low.
8
7
9
1
3
2
12
6
5
11
4
10
8
7
12
6
1
9
2
10
11
5
3
4
Figure 5-5. US Connector(s) (facing the front panel from the outside)
5-8
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-10. FECG Connector (Model 173)
Pin #
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
NC
No Connection
2
FECGEN*
Enable for FECG Channel
3
GND
Chassis Ground
4
NC
No Connection
5
NC
No Connection
6
LA
Left Arm
7
RA
Right Arm
8
SHIELD
Shield
9
NC
No Connection
10
NC
No Connection
11
NC
No Connection
12
RL
Right Leg
* Active low.
8
7
9
1
3
2
12
6
5
11
4
10
8
7
12
6
1
9
2
10
11
5
3
4
Figure 5-6. FECG Connector (facing the front panel from the outside)
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-9
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-11. Ultrasound/FECG Combi-Connector (Model 174)
Pin #
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
NC
No Connection
2
FECGEN*
Enable for FECG Channel
3
ISOGND
Isolated Ground
4
XMIT/RCV SHIELD
Shield for Transmit/Receive (isolated ground)
5
XMIT/RCV
Transmit/Receive (isolated ground)
6
LA
Left Arm
7
RA
Right Arm
8
SHIELD
Shield (isolated ground)
9
NC
No Connection
10
NC
No Connection
11
U/S ENABLE*
Enable for Ultrasound Channel
12
RL
Right Leg
* Active low.
8
7
9
1
3
2
12
6
5
11
4
10
8
7
12
6
1
9
2
10
11
5
3
4
Figure 5-7. US/FECG Combi-Connector (facing the front panel from the outside)
5-10
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-12. Uterine Activity Connector
Pin#
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
+PRESSURE
Positive Input to Pressure Amplifier
2
–PRESSURE
Negative Input to Pressure Amplifier
3
NC
No Connection
4
+4 VOLT
EXCITATION
+4 Volt Reference
5
NC
No Connection
6
GND
(EXCITATION REF)
+4 Volt Reference Ground
7
UA SHIELD
Shield
8
NC
No Connection
9
NC
No Connection
10
NC
No Connection
11
NC (171/172)
IUP ENABLE (173/174)
No Connection (171/172)
Mode Enable for IUP (173/174)
12
TOCO ENABLE *
Mode Enable for TOCO
* Active low.
8
7
9
1
3
2
12
6
5
11
4
10
8
7
12
6
1
9
2
10
11
5
3
4
Figure 5-8. Uterine Activity Connector (facing the front panel from the outside)
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-11
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-13. Telemetry Connector
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Type
(Relative To Main
Board)
Signal Description
1
TMARK/
Input
Telemetry Mark Line (active low)
2
TELPR/
Input
Telemetry Present (active low)
3
NC (171/172)
TECGEN/ (173)
Input
No Connection (171/172)
Telemetry FECG Enable (173/174)
4
NC
5
NC (171/172)
TECG (173)
Input
No Connection (171/172)
Telemetry FECG (173/174)
6
TTOCO
Input
Telemetry TOCO
7
AGND
Output
Analog Ground
8
TELMAUDIO
Input
Telemetry US Audio
9
DGND
Output
Digital Ground
10
NC
11
TTOCOEN/
Input
Telemetry TOCO Enable
12
TUSEN/
Input
Telemetry US Enable
13
NC (171/172)
TIUPEN/ (173)
Input
No Connection (171/172)
Telemetry IUP Enable (173/174)
14
NC
No Connection
15
NC
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
5
4
10
15
9
14
2
3
8
13
1
7
12
6
11
Figure 5-9. Telemetry Connector (facing the rear panel from the outside)
5-12
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-14. Display Interface (J18)
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Type
(Relative To Main
Board)
Signal Description
1
D6
Output
Main Board Data Bit 6
2
D5
Output
Main Board Data Bit 5
3
D7
Output
Main Board Data Bit 7
4
DISPLCS*
Output
Not Used
5
A0
Output
Telemetry ECG (173/174)
6
D4
Output
Main Board Data Bit 4
7
D1
Output
Main Board Data Bit 1
8
D0
Output
Main Board Data Bit 0
9
D2
Output
Main Board Data Bit 2
10
D3
Output
Main Board Data Bit 3
11
SEGA
Output
Segment A for Pressure ±1 LED
12
SEGB
Output
Segment B for Pressure ±1 LED
13
SEGC
Output
Segment C for Pressure ±1 LED
14
SEGD
Output
Segment D for Pressure ±1 LED
15
+5V
Output
+5 Volts for LEDs
16
GND
Output
Ground for LEDs
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-13
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-15. Membrane Switch Panel Interface (J19)
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Type
(Relative To Main
Board)
Signal Description
1
UAREF*
Input
UA Ref Switch Input
2
PWRANODE
Output
Power Indicator LED Anode
3
REC*
Input
Recorder On Switch Input
4
NC
Output
No Connection
5
MARK*
Input
Mark Switch Input
7
PADV*
Input
Paper Advance Switch Input
6
GND
Output
Ground
8
RECANODE
Output
Recorder on LED Anode
9
VOLDN*
Input
Volume Down Channel 1 Switch Input
10
CANCEL
Input
Alarm Cancel Switch Input
11
VOLUP*
Input
Volume Up Channel 1 Switch Input
12
VOLDN2*
Input
Volume Down Channel 2 Switch Input
13
PWRSWITCH
Input
Power Switch Input
14
VOLUP2*
Input
Volume Up Channel 2 Switch Input
15
GND
Output
Ground for LEDS and Switches
16
MENU
Input
Menu Switch Input
* Active low.
5-14
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-16. FECG/UA Option Interface Part One (J16), Models 173/174 Only
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Type
(Relative To Main
Board)
Signal Description
1
+12V
Output
+12 V for FECG Isolated Power Supply
2
GND
Output
+12 V Ground
3
+5V
Output
+5 V Supply
4
+7.5V
Output
+7.5 V Supply
5
2.5VREF
Output
2.5 V Reference
6
IUPEN*
Input
IUP Enable Output
7
+3.3VANA
Output
+3.3 V for Analog
8
144KC
Output
144 KHz for Isolated Power Supply
9
–3.3VANA
Output
–3.3 V for Analog
10
AGND
Output
Analog Ground
11
FECGOUT
Input
FECG Analog Output
12
PRESSOUT
Input
Pressure Analog Output
13
FECGEN*
Input
FECG Enable (Active Low)
14
NC (171/172/173)
CLEAR* (174)
—
Output
No Connection (171/172/173)
Clear (Model 174)
15
TOCOEN*
Input
TOCO Enable
16
NC
—
No Connection
* Active low.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-15
Theory of Operation: Functional Overview
Table 5-17. FECG/UA Option Interface Part Two (J15), Models 173/174 Only
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Type
(Relative To Main
Board)
Signal Description
1
RA
Output
Right Arm Input from Patient Connector
2
LA
Output
Left Arm Input from Patient Connector
3
RL
Input
Right Leg Drive Signal from FECG/IUP Board
4
SHIELDF
Output
Isolated Shield
5
–PRESS
Output
UA Channel Negative Input
6
+PRESS
Output
UA Channel Positive Input
7
ISO4V
Input
Isolated 4 V Reference
8
ECGEN*
Output
Enable for FECG Cable
9
4VISOGND
Input
Isolated 4 V Reference Ground
10
PEN*
Output
Isolated IUP Enable
11
NC
—
No Connection
12
ENTOCO*
Output
Isolated TOCO Enable
* Active low.
5-16
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Main Board Theory of Operation
Figure 5-10 provides a block diagram of the Main Board in the 170 Series Monitor.
The board number varies according to the particular model in the series as
summarized in Table 5-18.
Table 5-18. Main Board Variations
Revision C
170 Series Model
Main Board FRU Number
Ultrasound Channels
FECG/IUP Board Mount
Model 171
2000244
Single
No
Model 172
15269
Dual
No
Model 173
2000324
Single
Yes
Model 174
2000952
Dual
Yes
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-17
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Audio Module
• Audio amplifier
• Ultrasound volume controls
• ECG/alarm-tone volume
control
Status/Switch Input Module
• Front panel switch input
buffers
• Rear panel, recorder, and
front-end status buffers
Display Interface
• Data buffers
• ESD protection
•
•
•
•
Communications Module
• Quad async UART
• RS-232 transceivers
Recorder Interface
Motor control latches
Head control latches
Status input buffers
Printhead serial data link
Processing Block
System processor
System flash memory
System boot flash memory
System RAM
System address decoder
PAL
• System battery RAM with
real-time clock
•
•
•
•
•
Ultrasound Module
• Ultrasound transmitter
• Control logic PAL
• Pin diode switches, preamplifier, and demodulator
• Ultrasound envelope filters
• Ultrasound envelope
detector
• Audio frequency doubler
and filters
• Fetal movement bandpass
filters
• Telemetry multiplexor
• A/D converter
• Local voltage regulators
Interface to
FECG/UA Board
(173/174)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Uterine Activity Module
• Pressure differential
amplifier
• +4 V reference
• A/D converter
System Power Supply
Pre-regulators
+5 V regulators
±3.3 V regulators
+7.5 V regulators (173/174)
+24 V regulators
+11 V regulators (173/174)
+12 V input
Figure 5-10. Main Board Block Diagram
5-18
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Processing Block
The processing block consists of the processor, system memory, battery RAM (with
real time clock), and address decoder PAL. Figure 5-11 provides a block diagram of
the processing block.
System Boot Flash Memory
(128k x 8)
System SDRAM Memory
(1M x 32 standard)
Battery RAM with
Real Time Clock
(8k x 8)
System Flash Memory
• 512k x 32 standard
• 512k x 32 optional
12.288 MHz Crystal
SH3 Processor
System Control/Address Decoder PAL
• Address decoding
• Recorder control latch and head
protection timer
• SPI chip select and clock control
• Recorder serial interface
to peripheral devices
Figure 5-11. Processing Circuitry Block Diagram
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-19
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
The processor (U1) is an Hitachi SH3 used with a 32-bit data bus and 24-bit address
bus. Series 100 Ω resistors and 100 kΩ pull-up resistors are provided for all
address, data bus and output lines. The series resistors limit transient response
resulting in better EMI performance. Pull-up resistors prevent these lines from
floating if the processor enters sleep mode which tri-states these lines. Crystal X2 is
the main crystal for the processor running at 12.288 MHz. Mode lines which the
CPU examines at power up are pulled up and down to set the CPU to mode 4. This
allows the CPU to run internally at either X2 x 1 (12.288 MHz) or X2 x 4 (49.152
MHz). The external bus and SYSCLK run at the X1 frequency. Crystal X1 is for the
processor’s real-time clock. The real-time clock is not used; however, in addition to
time/date, it can be used to process interrupts for exiting sleep mode. A MAX809
reset IC (U2) monitors 3 V backup power to hold RESET* low during power up
from the AC line cord and or the DC power cable. Power-up reset using the power
button is accomplished through an external RC circuit (R544 and C285) for a
shorter on reset time.
Four AMD AM29LV800B 8 Mb flash memory parts (U23–U26) are used to provide
4 MB of data storage and non-volatile program memory. The flash parts are
arranged in pairs to allow 32-bit data access. Separate write enable lines allow
access to individual 16-bit words, if required. Chip selects for each flash pair are
controlled by the programmable array logic device (PAL) U4 and are memory
mapped to make all 4 MB appear as a single area of memory.
The system RAM consists of two Hitachi HM5216165 16-Mb SDRAMs (U27,
U28). The processor provides all of the DRAM support signals (RAS, CAS, etc.).
A 32-bit data bus is used and 8- and 16-bit access are supported.
An AT29LV010A 1 Mb flash memory part (U29) is used as a boot ROM. The
processor begins execution from this area of memory (Area 0 / CS0*). An 8-bit data
bus is used.
A battery RAM, with real-time clock MT48T18 (U31), provides the clock and 8k x
8 data storage function for parameters, error logs, etc. Transceiver U30 buffers and
voltage translates data from the 5 V battery RAM.
The PAL (U4) provides the address decoding for the system flash memory, UART,
battery RAM, display, input buffers, and recorder control latches. The PAL also
contains latches which allow control of the printhead, serial peripheral interface
(SPI) chip selects, telemetry, and fetal movement signal controls. PAL U4 also
provides the parallel-to-serial conversion for the printhead data. The PFAIL and
software enable bits are used to disable battery RAM writes. Figure 5-12 provides a
block diagram of the PAL.
5-20
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Processor
Address/Data
and Control
System Flash ROM
Decoder Bank 1
System Flash ROM
Decoder Bank 2
Recorder Control
Decoder and Latch
• Head strobes
• Head supply control
• Head protection
Recorder Control
Latch Decoder
Motor phase latches
General Decoder and Latch
• SPI (serial peripheral
interface) chip selects
• Front-end/telemetry control
Battery RAM/RTC Decoder
Status Port Decoder
• Front panel buttons
• Recorder status
Display Decoder
UART Decoder
Recorder Printhead
Data Shift Register
Figure 5-12. PAL Block Diagram
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-21
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Display Interface Module
The display interface consists of a data buffer (U14) for D0–D7 which interfaces to
the ICM7228A seven-segment LED driver IC (U1 on the display board), and D flipflop U3 which drives the ±1 UA segments through Q1–Q4 transistors. Data lines
have 100 Ω series resistors (R524–R531) which help to reduce emissions. A diode
clamp device (U18) on the data bus is a used to protect against ESD to the display
area. Figure 5-13 provides a block diagram of the display interface module.
to Data Bus
Data Buffer
Chip Select and Address
10
Display Board
to Data Bus
Latch
Transistor Drivers
for Pressure
± Display
4
Figure 5-13. Display Module Interface Block Diagram
Status/Switch Input Module
The status/switch input module consists of buffers U15 and U16 and series/parallel
elements for protection against ESD. The monitor membrane switch panel provides
11 switch closures to ground which are fed to 100 kΩ pull up resistors and through
10 kΩ series elements. Buffers U14 and U15 are further protected by capacitors to
ground and diode clamp devices U17 and U22. Two LEDs are present on the
membrane switch panel: the power LED is driven by +5 V through resistor R350;
the recorder LED is driven from PAL U4 through buffer U6 and resistor R351.
Figure 5-14 provides a block diagram of the status/switch input module.
Membrane Switch Inputs
Data
Buffers
to Data Bus
Recorder Status Inputs
Figure 5-14. Status/Switch Input Module Block Diagram
5-22
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Communications Module
The communications section consists of quad UART U21 and RS-232 transceivers
U19 and U20. The baud rate frequencies are generated from crystal X3 (3.6864
MHz). Two of the RS-232 channels are used for external communications while the
remaining two provide spare internal channels. Each channel has four ports for
RTS/CTS/general input-output. Both external channels support the RTS/CTS lines.
Transceivers U19 and U20 convert the UART 3 V digital communications lines to
RS-232 levels (±7 V typically) for transmission; and ±7 V RS-232 levels to 3 V
levels for reception. RJ-45 connectors J7 and J8 provide center connection
compatibility to the 6-pin RJ-11 connectors found on the 120 Series Maternal/Fetal
Monitors. The 170 Series uses the larger 8-pin connectors to provide fused power
for future interfacing. Each channel has shunt 1000 pF shunt capacitors for
emissions, 100 Ω series resistors, and clamp devices D6 and D7 for ESD protection.
Figure 5-15 provides a block diagram of the communications module.
RS-232 Line
Transceivers
(Channel 1)
to Data Bus
QUAD UART
RS-232 Line
Transceivers
(Channel 2)
TXD, RTS,
RXD, CTS
TXD, RTS,
RXD, CTS
to Rear Panel
to Rear Panel
Miscellaneous Inputs
Miscellaneous Outputs
Figure 5-15. Communications Module Block Diagram
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-23
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Recorder Interface Module
The recorder interface consists of motor control, paper status logic, and printhead
control logic. The motor control consists of latch U3, buffer U6, and FET transistors
Q5–Q8. The four phase signals are generated by the processor using U3. These
phases are translated to 5 V and buffered by U6 to drive the FETs which in turn
drive the unipolar motor. Clamp diodes are used to limit the inductive spike
generated when the switches open. The paper status logic consists of paper out and
paper misload optical sensor interface circuitry as well as a door switch interface.
The paper status logic consists of dual digital potentiometer U9, resistors R216 and
R217 for LED drive to the paper out sensor, and R219 and R220 for LED drive to
the paper misload sensor. The digital potentiometer connects to the collector of the
sensor transistor and becomes the variable pull-up. These signals (MISCOIL and
OUTCOIL) are further processed by the analog-to-digital converter to determine the
correct threshold for the two sensors. Clamp device U8 is used for ESD protection.
The door switch input is a switch closure to ground and is read by the processor
through buffer U15. The printhead interface consists of PAL U4 which contains the
printhead control latch, head protection circuitry, and printhead shift register. The
printhead control latch contains the four strobes for the printhead sections, the
printhead load line, and the printhead power supply enable line. The printhead
protection timer consists of a four-bit counter which uses a 2 kHz clock [Usmode,
U4 (pin 35)] to count off six clocks. The counter is enabled when any one of the
four processor-latched strobes is active. After six counts of any active strobe (3 ms),
the counter disables all four output strobes and turns off the +24 V head supply. The
circuit resets when the processor-latched strobes return to an inactive state. The
power fail control line input U4 (pin 76) is also a form of protection which turns off
all strobes and the power supply when the +12 V drops to about 10 V. The
printhead shift register consists of an 8-bit shift register which clocks out D7 first
and clock counters which allow eight clocks to be output for every processor write
to the register. The clock counter also provides a done status bit (BUSY*) which
goes high after all eight bits are shifted out. This status bit is read through the
UART spare port line U21 (pin 28).
Figure 5-16 provides a block diagram of the recorder interface.
5-24
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
to Data Bus
Motor Control Latch
Status Read Buffer
to Motor
Paper Status Lines
from PAL Device
Printhead Control Latch
Printhead Protection Circuitry
to Printhead
• strobes
• load line
• clock
• data
Printhead Data
Shift Register
Figure 5-16. Recorder Interface Block Diagram
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-25
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Ultrasound Module
Model 171 and Model 173 Monitors contain a single ultrasound channel board.
Model 172 and Model 174 Monitors contain a dual ultrasound channel board.
The theory contained in this section references the dual ultrasound board but is
applicable to the single ultrasound board as well.
Overview
The ultrasound circuitry is a dual channel pulsed Doppler system with Channel 1
and Channel 2. Each channel generates a 1.151 MHz (center frequency) pulsed
carrier signal. This signal carrier causes the crystals in the transducer to emit
ultrasonic waves. When these sound waves enter the maternal abdomen, they
create echoes when encountering an interface between tissues of differing
acoustic impedance. If the interface is moving either toward or away from the
ultrasound transducer, the frequency of the reflected sound differs from the
frequency sent from the transducer.
Isolation Transformer
Model 174 Monitors have an isolation transformer for US Channel 1 signals
since the connector is shared with the FECG Channel.
Ultrasound Transducer
When the reflected sound wave is received by the transducer crystals, it is
converted to an electrical signal. After being amplified, detected, and filtered,
this signal is split into two paths: ultrasound audio and ultrasound envelope. The
audio signal is amplified for driving the speaker, while the ultrasound envelope is
processed for heart rate data.
The center frequency of the transmitted carrier is 1.151 MHz with a pulse
repetition frequency of 2 kHz (single or dual use).
When both ultrasound channels are being used, Channel 1 completes a transmit/
receive cycle while Channel 2 is muted; then Channel 2 completes a transmit/
receive cycle while Channel 1 is muted.
Programmable Array Logic (PAL)
All functions of the pulsed Doppler ultrasound circuit are controlled by a PAL
U50. Integrated circuit U48 latches the transmit and demodulator signals to
prevent race conditions and phase jitter caused by the PAL U50.
Table 5-19 provides a summary of PAL outputs. Figure 5-17 provides a block
diagram of the ultrasound module.
5-26
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Table 5-19. PAL Outputs
US Channel 1
Isolation
Transformer
(174 only)
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
TRANS_BURST
Operates the Ultrasound Transmitter.
2
DET_BURST1
Activates the Demodulator.
18
575KC
Synchronizes the Power Supplies
19
USMODE
Signals the Processor that the
US Channel is Active
21
PIN1
Selects Channel 1 Transducer
22
PIN2
Selects Channel 2 Transducer
42
CH2
Selects CH2 Track and Hold Circuit
43
CH1
Selects CH1 Track and Hold Circuit
Transmitter
US Channel 2
Input Pin
Diode Switching
Pre-Amplifier
Demodulator
Main
Filter
CH2
CH2
Demultiplexor
Envelope
Detector
CH2
to Data Bus
AGC
CH1
Telemetry
Switch
Telemetry Audio
Telemetry
Switch
Main
Filter
CH1
Envelope
Detector
CH1
A/D
Fetal Movement
Detection Filter
Control Lines
Figure 5-17. Ultrasound Module Block Diagram
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-27
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Ultrasound Oscillator
Internal gates located in integrated circuit U50, X4, and associated components
comprise a crystal-controlled oscillator running at 4.604 MHz. The inverted output
of this oscillator is the clock that is used to clock latch U48; therefore changes at the
outputs of U50 are not clocked out of U48 until one-half clock cycle later. The
system runs at a frequency of 2 kHz [(4.604 MHz/1151)/2=2 kHz] and the time for
each transmission and reception is 250 µs [(1/2000)/2=250 µs]. The signal
TRANS_BURST is a square wave at a frequency of 1.151 MHz. It is initiated four
clock cycles after the internal reset of the binary counter within U50 used to decode
the signals used by the ultrasound system and continues 428 clock cycles. The
signal DET_BURST1 is also a square waves at a frequency of 1.151 MHz. This
signal is output 640 clock cycles after reset, and continues up to 1020 clock cycles.
Pin Diode Circuitry
The signals PIN1 and PIN2, from PAL U50, turn on the appropriate switches of U47
so as to bias pin diodes D21 and D22 on; this in turn provides a low impedance path
for the Channel 1 transducer to the ultrasound transmitter and preamplifier. Diodes
D23 and D24 are biased off, providing a high impedance path to the ultrasound
transmitter and preamplifier for the Channel 2 transducer. The opposite of the above
is true when the Channel 2 transducer is activated.
Transmission/Reception
Integrated circuits U53, U54, and U55 are voltage regulators used to provide stable,
low-noise power supplies for the ultrasound receiver and transmitter. Transistor
Q11, inductor L1, and capacitor C208 form the ultrasound transmitter. Q11 is
driven by the signal TRANS_BURST. Inductor L2 and capacitors C209, C210, and
CV1 provide tuning for the transmitter output. The transmitter has a nominal output
impedance of 30 Ω, and can typically drive 4 V peak-to-peak into a 20 Ω load.
Transistors Q12, Q13, and Q14, and associated components, form the preamplifier.
Capacitors C213, C215, C229, and C216 provide power supply rejection for the
preamplifier. Inductor L3, along with capacitors C211 and C212, form a series
resonant tank circuit. This tank circuit provides a low impedance path for the
received signals from the transducer, and a voltage gain of approximately 28 dB.
The typical input impedance to this tank circuit is 30 Ωs.
Transistors Q12 and Q13 form a cascode amplifier. Transistor Q13 is a dual nchannel field effect transistor connected in parallel. This parallel connection
provides an improvement of 3 dB in signal-to-noise ratio due to the gain doubling
and the noise adding in quadrature. Inductor L4 and capacitors C214 and CV3 form
a parallel resonant tank circuit with an impedance of approximately 17 kΩs. The
shunt impedance of resistors R388, R389, R390, R391, and R392 effectively lower
this impedance to 3.6 kΩ. The gain of the preamplifier is approximately 19 dB and
is defined by:
Rl/((1/(2*gm))+R386)= 3.6k/((1/.002)+200)
Transistor Q14 and transformer T1 provide a differential output for the preamplifier.
Diode D19 provides protection for Q13 and removes the low impedance tank circuit
L3 and C211, and C212 during transmission by shunting L3. Diode D20 provides
overload recovery for the preamplifier and voltage limiting to the demodulator
through Q14 and T1.
5-28
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
U43 is a quad-switched capacitor integrated circuit configured as a balanced ring
demodulator. Its analog inputs are connected to the differential outputs of the preamplifier at the secondary of T1. The switches within the device are actuated by the
signal DET_BURST1.
The two analog outputs of U43 drive the difference amplifier U44 and its associated
components. Integrated circuit U45 switches the output of the difference amplifier
U44 (pin 14) to the track-and-hold circuit of either Channel 1 or Channel 2.
The track-and-hold circuit for Channel 1 is comprised of components R408, C225,
and buffer amplifier U46 (pin 7). The track-and-hold circuit for Channel 2 is
comprised of components R409, C226 and buffer amplifier U46 (pin1).
The track-and-hold circuits retain the amplitude of the last value from the previous
demodulator activation. If this method were not employed, the system gain would
have to be twice as high since it is a time sampled system. The samples must be
integrated over time (averaged) to produce the desired output. In summary, this
method improves the signal-to-noise ratio of the system.
Since the DET signal is driven at the same frequency as the transmitted signal, any
return signal of the same frequency will be averaged and produce either 0 V or a dc
offset at the output of the demodulator; this is not seen by the main filter driven by
the demodulator since it is AC coupled by capacitors C253 and C262. Therefore, a
difference frequency (Doppler shift frequency) must be present to produce an output
from the demodulator. The output of the track-and-hold circuit of Channel 1 at U46
(pin 7) is switched to the Channel 1 main filter through U39 (pin 11) to U39 (pins 6
and 10).
Telemetry (if present) is switched to the Channel 1 main filter through U39 (pin 7)
to U39 (pins 6 and 10). Telemetry FECG (if present) is switched by U39 (pin 3) to
U39 (pins 2 and 15) to the analog-to-digital converter. The main filter is a band-pass
amplifier. Its 3 dB points are 120 Hz and 300 Hz, respectively. The bandwidth
slopes are greater than 40 dB/octave. The maximum gain of the filter is 46 dB with
peaking of approximately 48 dB at 250 Hz. The nominal gain in the system is
approximately 36 dB and is controlled by R454. The Channel 1 main filter is
comprised of U51 and associated components.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-29
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Filtering
The main filter is a band-pass amplifier with 3 dB points at 120 Hz and 300 Hz,
respectively. The band width slopes are greater than 40 dB/octave. The maximum
gain of the filter is 46 dB with peaking of approximately 48 dB at 250 Hz. The
nominal gain in the system is approximately 36 dB and is controlled by R454. The
Channel 1 main filter is comprised of U51 and associated components.
The output of the track-and-hold circuit of Channel 2 at U46 (pin 1) is connected
directly to the Channel 2 main filter. The main filter is a band-pass amplifier with 3
dB points are 120 Hz and 300 Hz, respectively. The band width slopes are greater
than 40 dB/octave. The maximum gain of the filter is 46 dB with peaking of
approximately 48 dB at 250 Hz. The nominal gain in the system is approximately
36 dB and is controlled by R467. The Channel 2 main filter is comprised of U52
and associated components. Integrated circuit U40 switches the output of either the
Channel 1 demodulator, the Channel 2 demodulator, or telemetry audio to the fetal
movement band-pass filter. This filter has a gain of 3.5 and corner frequencies of
15 Hz. and 39 Hz, respectively. It is comprised of U41 and associated components.
The output of the fetal movement filter is input to the analog-to-digital converter.
The output of the main filters are input to U10 through capacitors C44 and C45. The
input impedance of these inputs is 10 kΩ, thus producing a high-pass filter at 72 Hz.
A tone is also one of the inputs to U10 through a high-pass filter at 15 Hz and a gain
reduction of –21 dB. The components comprising the filter are C47 and R223. U10
is a quad digital potentiometer with 255 step producing a gain range from 0 to
–48 dB. It is controlled by the serial peripheral interface (SPI) system bus.
Ultrasound Audio
Ultrasound audio (Channel 1 and Channel 2) is output on U10 (pin 8) and U10 (pin
4), respectively. These outputs are buffered by U11 (pin 7) and U11 (pin 8),
respectively. The buffered outputs are high-pass filtered at 80 Hz by C57/R236 and
C58/R237. They are then half-wave rectified by U13 (pin 8) and its associated
components. The output of the rectifier is band-pass filtered from 43 to 260 Hz at a
gain of 7.3 by U13 (pin 1) and its associated components. This effectively doubles
the frequency which is necessary because the transducer operates at a low RF
frequency (1.151 MHz); and the frequencies produced from the fetal heart would not
produce acceptable audio quality.
The output of U13 (pin 1) is input to summing amplifier U11 (pin 14). The tone
output of U10 (pin 18) is also summed by U11 (pin 14) which is a low-pass filter at
2600 Hz with a slope of –12dB/octave. The output of U11 (pin 14) is high-pass
filtered at 72 Hz by C52/R231 to the audio power amplifier.
The audio power amplifier U12 is a bridge type configuration with a gain of 2.5 and
capable of delivering 1.5 W of power into 8 Ω. Figure 5-18 provides block diagram
of the audio module.
5-30
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Summing
Amplifier
Tone Bit
Channel 1
US Audio
Bridge
Amplifier
Digital
Potentiometers
for Volume
Control (x3)
Channel 2
US Audio
Summing
Amplifier
Ultrasound
Audio
Doubler
Serial Clock and Data
Figure 5-18. Audio Module Block Diagram
Ultrasound Envelopes
The outputs of the main filters are also input to U32 and U35. The input to U35 is
through high-pass filters at 63 Hz. The high pass components for Channel 1 and
Channel 2 are C154/R338 and C159/R357, respectively. The output of the main
filters are also input to U32; this integrated circuit, in conjunction with U35, forms
an AGC (automatic gain control) circuit for both ultrasound channels.
Each of these AGC circuit has a maximum gain of 200 with a dynamic range of 46
dB. Each of the AGC outputs are high-pass filtered by
C169/R343 at 90 Hz with a gain of one, then input to a half-wave detector U36 (pin
7) with a gain of 1.47. The output of the detector circuits are low-pass filtered by
U36 (pin 1)at 20 Hz at gain of ten.
These envelopes are then input to the analog-to-digital converter U38. Other inputs
to the analog-to-digital converter are the telemetry TOCO signal. This signal is
scaled and offset to provide –100 to +400 relative UA units.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-31
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Uterine Activity
Integrated circuit U33, with a gain of 200, and U34 (pin 7), with a gain of 1.25,
provide a total gain of 250 for the on-board tocotransducer pressure channel. The
output of U34 (pin 7) is offset +0.5 V, providing a dynamic range of –80 to +400
relative units. Each relative unit represents 20 µV at the input of U33 through
resistors R318 and R320.
Integrated circuit U42, and its associated components, comprise a charge pump that
converts the +3.3 V to –3.3 V. U38 (pin 11) and U34 (pin 1) comprise a 2.5 V
reference voltage. U71 (pin 7) provides a reference voltage which is half the 2.5 V
reference, called VREF/2. Integrated circuit U56 (pin 7), and associated
components, provides the +4 V required for the tocotransducer.
Figure 5-19 provides a block diagram of the antepartum uterine activity section.
Pressure
Differential
Amplifier
to Data Bus
Gain
Stage
Pressure
Telemetry TOCO
+4 V Reference
+4 V
Reference
Amplifier
A/D
+2.5 V
Reference
Figure 5-19. Antepartum UA Module Block Diagram
5-32
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Power Supplies
Integrated circuit U60 is a voltage comparator that senses that the power has been
removed, and inhibits battery RAM access and recorder printing when the supply
drops to approximately 10 V.
Integrated circuit U58 forms an R-S flip-flop. U58 (pin 6) is set high when the
Power button is pressed. Q19 collector also goes to a logic 1 whenever the Power
button is pressed. When U58 (pin 6) is pulled high, it enables the SYNC signal at
U59 (pin 4) which is inverted by U59 (pin 3) to reach all the switching power
supplies. The sync frequency is 575 kHz and is derived, and hence synchronized to
the ultrasound system. U62 and its associated components comprise a buck
converter with an output voltage of +5.8 V. This is used as the pre-regulator for
linear regulators U65, U66, U68, and U69. U65 provides the system +5 V. U66
provides the +5 V for the recorder motor. U67 provides the +5 V for the audio
amplifier. U68 provides +3.3 V for the analog circuitry. U69 provides the +3.3 V for
the digital circuitry. U61, and its associated components, comprise a linear regulator
with an output voltage of +7.5 V. This is used as the pre-regulator for the linear
regulator U55 which provides the +6 V for the ultrasound front end; it also powers
U53 which provides the –6 V and powers U56 which is used to generate the +4 V
for the tocotransducer circuitry. U64, and its associated components, comprise a
boost converter with an output voltage of +24 V.
Integrated circuit U70, under microprocessor control, is used to control the +24 V
for the recorder printhead. The +24 V output is current limited by Q20, Q21, and
associated components. The power output is limited to 17 W.
Figure 5-20 provides a block diagram of the power supply section.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-33
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
Power Status Comparator
5 V Linear Regulator
for Audio
5 V Linear Regulator
for Motor
5 V Linear Regulator
for Digital Logic
Switching Pre-Regulator
3.3 V Linear Regulator
for Digital Logic
+12 V
Input
3.3 V Linear Regulator
for Analog Circuitry
–6 V
for
Ultrasound
+7.5 V Linear Pre-Regulator
+6 V
for
Ultrasound
+5 V
for
Ultrasound
Switching Regulator for
Recorder
• +24 V
• Shutdown digital control
• Sync input from ultrasound
timing
Low Power +3.3 V Regulator
from Power Switch
Power Off Control
Power Switch Flip-Flop
Switching Regulator Shutdown
Figure 5-20. Power Supply Section Block Diagram
5-34
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: Main Board Theory of Operation
FECG/IUP Board Interface
J16 and J15 provide the interface to the FECG/IUP Board. J15 is patient isolated.
RA, LA, RL
FECG
Connector
Pressure
Connector
Telemetry
Connector
±PRESS
4V REF
Telemetry
FECG In
IUP
FECG/IUP
Board
12-Bit A/D
Converter
FECG
Telemetry
FECG Out
to Data Bus
Telemetry
Switch
Figure 5-21. FECG/IUP Board Interface Block Diagram
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-35
Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
Isolated Power Supply
Patient isolation for the FECG and the IUP catheter is accomplished by providing
floating power supplies to power the FECG and IUP front end electronics.
Integrated circuit U12 provides non-overlapping drive signals to dual FET U9 which
in turn drives the primary of transformer T1. Resistor R94 and capacitor C12
provide dampening for the primary of T1 so as to limit the voltage at the drains of
U9 to a level below their breakdown voltage. The frequency at which the primary of
T1 is switched is 35968.75 Hz which is derived by dividing the signal 144 kHz by
four. The actual frequency of this signal is 143875 Hz and is derived from the PAL
U50 in the ultrasound circuit. Thus the transformer switching frequency is
synchronized to the ultrasound circuit. The secondary of transformer T1 drives
rectifiers D9 and D10. These rectifiers are filtered by C8 and C10 for the positive
power supply, and by C9 and C11 for the negative power supply. Integrated circuit
U3 and its associated components provide a regulated positive voltage (+10 V for
Model 173; +9.3 V for Model 174), while integrated circuit U4 provide a regulated
negative voltage (–10 V for Model 173; –9.3 V for Model 174). Integrated circuit
U1 is a positive precision 2.5 volt reference. The output of U1 is input to the non
inverting input of amplifier U2 (pin 3). The output of this amplifier U2 (pin 1) drives
the emitter follower Q1. The gain of the amplifier-emitter follower is 1.6 and is set
by resistors R3 and R4. The output of Q1 emitter is 4 V (1.6 x 2.5). This voltage is
used to power either an IUP transducer or tocotransducer. Resistor R1 in the
collector of Q1 is used to sense the current drain from other manufacturers of IUP
transducers who don't have an IUP enable associated with them. When the voltage at
the junction of resistors R36 and R37 falls below 1.164 V
(4 mA) the output of the voltage comparator U16 (pin 8) switches from a high state
to a low state, which in turn causes transistor Q3 to turn on and transfer the IUP
enable across the isolated barrier. This signal is named IUPEN*. However If a
tocotransducer is present, this signal is ignored. Transistor Q3 can also be turned on
by the signal PEN*.
For Model 173 and 174 Monitors, integrated circuit U33 and associated components
provide regulation of the power supplied to the FECG/IUP Board circuitry (+12 V
for Model 173; +11.6 V for Model 174).
For a Model 174 only, the CLEAR signal synchronizes the counter in the PAL; this
in effect stops the power supply during the receive cycle of the ultrasound process
for noise reduction purposes.
5-36
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
Pressure Channel
The input to the pressure channel is to resistors R9 and R10 with the signal names of
–PRESS and +PRESS respectively. Resistors R9 through R12 and capacitors C16
through C18 provide RF filtering, and in conjunction with diode limiters D1 and D2,
provide protection from electro-static discharge.Instrumentation amplifier U5
provides a gain of 248 which is given by (49.4E3/R13)+1. The output of U5 which
is inverting with respect to the signal –PRESS, drives the inverting amplifier U6 (pin
1). This amplifier has a gain of –4.99 and rolls off at approximately 32 Hz. The
output of U6 (pin 1) drives U6 (pin 5) with a division of two formed by resistors R18
and R19. The operation of this amplifier is best understood if analyzed from its
quiesent condition of no input signal. Under this condition U6 (pin 5) is at zero
volts, therefore U6 (pin 6) must also be at zero volts. This forces a quiesent current
of 75 µA through R20. This current is produced by U6 (pin 7) driving the LED that
illuminates the photodiode at U10 (pins 3 and 4) which is the feedback path. The
LED also illuminates the photodiode at U10 (pins 5 and 6) which are on the nonisolated side. The current transfer ratio of this photodiode with respect to the
photodiode on U10 (pins 3 and 4) is 0.85 to 1.05. The tocotransducer and the IUP
transducer have the transfer function of 5µV/UA-Unit/Volt-excitation. Therefore
since the excitation voltage is 4 V, the input voltage is 0.002V/100UA-Units. This
corresponds to 2.475 V at U6 (pin 1) and 1.2375 Vat U6 (pin 5). This causes a delta
current of 9.3 µA through R20, which is also transferred across the barrier with the
same transfer ratio of 0.85 to 1.05. This current is input to U13 (pin 6) through R32.
Potentiometer R25 sets the gain at U13 (pin 8) to 0.5 V/100UA-Units. Potentiometer
R30 sets the initial offset voltage to +0.5 V. The output amplifier U13 (pin 8) is a
unity gain amplifier with 3 poles of filtering with its 3 dB frequency of 3 Hz. Since
the system analog-to-digital converter has an input range of 0 to 2.5 V, the dynamic
range is from –100 to +400UA-Units.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-37
Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
FECG Channel
The input to the FECG channel is two resistors R42 and R43 with the signal names
of RA and LA respectively. Resistors R42, R43, R45, and R462 and capacitors C38
through C40 provide RF filtering, and in conjunction with diode limiters D3 through
D6 provide protection from electro-static discharge. Resistors R40, R41, and R44
cause amplifier U7 to saturate when the FECG cable is not connected to a fetus.
This disables the FECG channel from counting noise and flashing LEDs and causing
tones to be generated by the speaker. Instrumentation amplifier U7 provides a gain
of 13.7 which is given by (49.4E3/R54)+1. Amplifier U2 (pins 5, 6, and 7) is an
integrator which has high gain at DC with reducing gain as frequency increases.
Amplifier U2 (pin 7) drives amplifier U2 (pin8). Amplifier U2 (pin 8) is noninverting and is patient protected in the event of a failure of this device. The two
sections of U2 provide the right leg drive circuit. The right leg drive is a feedback
circuit that provides drive in the opposite polarity to a common mode voltage. Its
purpose is to cancel DC offset from the electrode, and to help reject 50 and 60 Hz
components. The output of U7, which is inverting with respect to the signal RA,
drives the non-inverting amplifier U2 (pin 12) through a high-pass filter of 10 Hz.
Resistor R58 and diode D7 provide voltage limiting at U2 (pin 12). This amplifier
has a gain of 22.5 and rolls off at approximately 224 Hz. The output of U2 (pin 14)
drives U8 (pin 3) through R64. Resistor R64 and diode D8 provide voltage limiting
at U8 (pin 3). This amplifier has a gain of 22.5 and rolls off at approximately 224
Hz. The composite bandwidth and gain at this point is from 10 Hz to 320 Hz with a
gain of 6936. The output of U8 (pin 1) drives amplifier U8 (pin 5) with a division of
10/11 formed by resistors R67 and R68. The operation of this amplifier is best
understood if analyzed from its quiesent condition of no input signal. Under this
condition U8 (pin 5) is at zero volts, therefore U8 (pin 6) must also be at zero volts.
This forces a quiesent current of 75 µA through R69. This current is produced by U8
(pin 7) driving the LED that illuminates the photodiode at U11 (pins 3 and 4) which
is the feedback path. The LED also illuminates the photodiode at U11 (pins 5 and 6)
which are on the un-isolated side. The current transfer ratio of this photodiode, with
respect to the photodiode, on U11 (pins 3 and 4) is 0.85 to 1.05. The input voltage
required to drive U8 (pin 1) to either of its power supply limits is approximately
±1.44 mV peak. This corresponds to approximately ±5 V at U8 (pin 1) for ±0.72 mV
input, and ±4.55 V at U8 (pin 5). This causes a delta current of 34.2 µA through
R69, which is also transferred across the barrier with the same transfer ratio of 0.85
to 1.05. This current is input to U15 (pin 3) with resistor R75 being the load resistor
that produces a voltage proportional to the current transferred to it. Amplifier U15
(pin 7) produces an offset voltage of –1.97 V. The quiesent current of 75 µA flowing
through R75 will produce a voltage of approximately +1.25 V at U15 (pin 3). A
0.72 mV signal peak-to-peak at the input will produce approximately 1.26 V at U15
(pin 1). Thus ±1.44 mV at the input will produce ±2.52 V at U15 (pin 8). Amplifier
U15 (pin 14) is a non-inverting amplifier with a gain of one. It also provides 3
sections of high-pass filtering at 25 Hz. Amplifier U15 (pin 8) is a non-inverting
amplifier with a gain of one. It also provides 3 sections of low-pass filtering at 90
Hz.
Mode Enables
The FECG enable ties resistor R87 to the floating ground when the FECG cable is
attached. This causes approximately 4.5 mA to flow in the LED of opto-coupler
U17. The current transfer function of the coupler is 19% typically which causes 860
µA to flow in the photo-transistor of U17 in turn causing R103 to be pulled to
5-38
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
ground on the non-floating side of the barrier. It is then sensed by the system
microprocessor.
The IUP enable ties resistor R97 to the floating ground when the IUP transducer
cable is attached. This causes approximately 4.5 mA to flow in the LED of optocoupler U17. The current transfer function of the coupler is 19% typically which
causes 860 µA to flow in the photo-transistor of U17 in turn causing R104 to be
pulled to ground on the non-floating side of the barrier. It is then sensed by the
system microprocessor. The tocotransducer enable ties resistor R100 to the floating
ground when the IUP transducer cable is attached. This causes approximately 4.5
mA to flow in the LED of opto-coupler U17. The current transfer function of the
coupler is 19% typically which causes 860 µA to flow in the photo-transistor of
U17in turn causing R105 to be pulled to ground on the non-floating side of the
barrier. It is then sensed by the system microprocessor.
For a Model 174 only, the ultrasound enable ties resistor R109 to the RL when the
ultrasound cable is attached. This causes approximately 4.5 mA to flow in the LED
of opto-coupler U17. The current transfer function of the coupler is 19% typically
which causes 860 µA to flow in the photo-transistor of U17 in turn causing P16 (pin
6) to be pulled to ground on the non-floating side of the barrier. It is then sensed by
the system microprocessor. In summary, the US1 enable isolated one channel of US
from the Main Board along with a mode enable from the FECG/IUP Board.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-39
Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
To Main Board A/D
Converter for Processing
To Main Board Front End
FECG/IUP Connector
Isolated Side
Connector
Unisolated Side
Connector
RA
LA
RL
–PRESS
+PRESS
• FECG Low Noise
Differential
Amplifier with
Protection Circuitry
• RL Drive Circuitry
• High-Pass Filter
Optical
Isolation
Pressure Differential
Amplifier with
Protection Circuitry
Optical
Isolation
Filtering
and Gain
Stages
• Gain and Offset
Adjustments
• Filtering Stages
• +4 V Reference
• IUP Detection
Circuitry
–4 V
To TOCO Enable
FECGEN
FECGEN
IUPEN
TOCOEN
US1EN (174 only)
IUPEN
Model Line Optical
Isolation for FECG,
IUP, US1 (174 only)
and TOCO
TOCOEN
US1EN (174 only)
+12 V (173); +11.6 V (174)
144 KHz (173 only)
Isolated
Supplies
Isolated Power
Supply
Q, Q*
Power Supply
Control PAL
144 KHz
CLEAR*
174 Only
Figure 5-22. FECG/IUP Board Block Diagram
5-40
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
Table 5-20. FECG/UA Unisolated Output (P16), Models 173/174 Only
Signal Type
(Relative To Main
Board)
Signal Description
1
+12 V (173)
+11.6V (174)
Output
+12 V for FECG Isolated Power Supply
(Model 173 only)
+11.6 V for FECG Isolated Power Supply
(Model 174 only)
2
GND
Output
Digital Ground
3
+5V
Output
+5 V Supply
4
+7.5V
Output
+7.5 V Supply
5
2.5VREF
Output
2.5 V Reference
6
IUPEN*
Input
IUP Enable Output
7
+3.3VANA
Output
+3.3 V for Analog
8
144KC
Output
144 KHz for Isolated Power Supply
9
–3.3VANA
Output
–3.3 V for Analog
10
AGND
Output
Analog Ground
11
FECGOUT
Input
FECG Analog Output
12
PRESSOUT
Input
Pressure Analog Output
13
FECGEN*
Input
FECG Enable
14
CLR*
Output
Ultrasound Sync Timing Line
(Model 174 only)
15
TOCOEN*
Input
TOCO Enable
16
US1EN*
Input
US1 Mode Enable
(Model 174 only)
Pin Number
Signal Name
* Active low.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
5-41
Theory of Operation: FECG/IUP Board Theory of Operation
Table 5-21. FECG/UA Isolated Output (P15), Models 173/174 Only
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Type
(Relative To Main
Board)
Signal Description
1
RA
Output
Right Arm Input from Patient Connector
2
LA
Output
Left Arm Input from Patient Connector
3
RL
Input
Right Leg Drive Signal from FECG Board
4
SHIELDF
Output
Isolated Shield
5
–PRESS
Output
UA Channel Negative Input
6
+PRESS
Output
UA Channel Positive Input
7
ISO4V
Input
Isolated 4 V Reference
8
ECGEN*
Output
Enable for FECG Cable
9
4VISOGND
Input
Isolated 4 V Reference Ground
10
PEN*
Output
Isolated IUP Enable
11
USEN* (174 only)
Output
US1 Mode Enable
(Model 174 only)
12
ENTOCO*
Output
Isolated TOCO Enable
* Active low.
5-42
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 6
Functional Checkout
Procedure
6
Like all electronic monitoring devices, internal and external components are subject
to fatigue, wear, and the potential for failure over time and under varying conditions
of use. Additionally, events such as dropping the monitor, spilling liquids on the
monitor, or crimping the lead wires or patient cables can cause damage which may
affect the overall system performance.
This chapter contains the following:
Equipment Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Monitor Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Front Panel Pushbutton Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Connecting the Simulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
FECG Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Legplate Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Ultrasound Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Fetal Movement Detection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Ultrasound Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Uterine Activity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Tocotransducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Strain Gauge Transducer Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Pattern Memory Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-1
Functional Checkout Procedure: Equipment Required
Equipment Required
Table 6-1 provides a complete listing of equipment required for a functional
checkout procedure.
Table 6-1. Equipment Required
Test
Equipment
Model 325 Simulator (14203A/B)
Monitor Interconnect Cable (14212A/B)
FECG
„
Legplate
„
Legplate for Qwik Connect Plus with round connector
(1590AAO)
US/FMD
„
Model 325 Simulator (14203A/B)
Monitor Interconnect Cable (14212A/B)
US Transducer
„
Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer
(5700GAX–5700MAX Series)
TOCO/IUP
„
Model 325 Simulator (14203A/B)
Monitor Interconnect Cable (14212A/B)
Tocotransducer
„
„
„
„
Nautilus Tocotransducer
(2264GAX–2264MAX Series)
Reusable Strain Gauge with holder (4007BAX); or
Reusable Strain Gauge without holder (4007LAX); or
„ Disposable Strain Gauge (4009AAX)
NOTE: These items are no longer sold by GE. However,
transducers in the field are compatible with the 170
Series Monitor.
„
„
Strain Gauge Transducer
Pattern Memory
„
Dual Heart Rate (FECG/US)
„
„
„
Model 325 Simulator (14203A/B)
Monitor Interconnect Cable (14212A/B)
Model 325 Simulator (14203A/B)
Monitor Interconnect Cable (14212A/B)
Two Model 325 Simulators (14203A/B) with two sets
of Monitor Interconnect Cables (14212A/B); or
„ Two Nautilus Ultrasound Transducers
5700GAX–5700MAX Series)
„
Dual Heart Rate (US/US2)
„
Alarms
6-2
„
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Model 325 Simulator (14203A/B)
Monitor Interconnect Cable (14212A/B)
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: General
General
Between Factory Service visits it is necessary that the proper operation of each
monitor be verified by performing the functional checkout procedure described in
this section. This procedure should be completed prior to initially placing the
monitor on a patient, when monitor performance needs to be verified, on a semiannual basis, or more frequently as dictated by your equipment maintenance and
management policies.
NOTE: Read each step of this procedure thoroughly before actually performing the
test.
Visually inspect the monitor, patient cables, and other accessories for cracks,
fissures, or other signs of wear or damage. Do not use any monitor or accessory
which appears to be worn or damaged. If unsure, contact your GE Service
Representative to arrange for evaluation, replacement, or repair of the suspect
item(s).
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-3
Functional Checkout Procedure: Monitor Self-Test
Monitor Self-Test
The 170 Series Monitor contains test routines which verify the unit’s calibration and
internal circuitry. These routines are initiated by each time the monitor is turned on.
The test results are printed on the strip chart recorder paper, verifying the integrity of
the unit.
This information is covered in detail in “Monitor Self-Test Routines” on page 4-8.
6-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Front Panel Pushbutton Test
Front Panel Pushbutton Test
This procedure ensures the functionality of the front panel pushbuttons.
1.
Disconnect all transducers from the front panel.
2.
Enter the service setup mode (see page 4-10) and set the recorder speed to 1 cm/
min.
3.
Press the Setup button to exit the setup mode.
4.
Press the monitor’s Power button to turn on the monitor.
5.
Press the monitor’s Record button and verify the following:
‹
The yellow indicator next to the button illuminates continuously.
‹
The recorder paper advances at a rate of 1 cm/min.
‹
The recorder prints the correct time and date information on the strip chart
paper. (If an incorrect time or date is listed, refer to “Chapter 4, Setup
Procedures” in this manual.)
‹
The recorder prints the messages CARDIO INOP and UA INOP, indicating
that no ultrasound or uterine activity transducers are plugged into the front
panel US, US2, or UA connectors.
‹
The recorder prints the message 1 CM/MIN, indicating the selected chart
speed.
6.
Press the monitor’s front panel Paper Advance pushbutton and verify that the
recorder paper advances at a rate of 36 cm/min.
7.
Press the Paper Advance pushbutton again and verify that the recorder prints
the message 1 CM/MIN.
8.
Access the service setup mode and set the recorder speed to
3 cm/min.
9.
Press the Setup button to exit the service setup mode.
10. Press the monitor’s Power button to turn the monitor back on.
11. Verify that the recorder paper advances at a rate of 3 cm/min and that after
approximately 40 seconds, the message 3 CM/MIN prints on the recorder paper.
(The time, date and monitoring modes also print again.)
12. Press the Mark button and verify that an event mark ( ) prints on the bottom
two lines of the recorder paper.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-5
Functional Checkout Procedure: Connecting the Simulator
Connecting the Simulator
This part of the procedure prepares the simulator for use.
NOTE: You must use a Model 325 Simulator for the functional checkout
procedure. (Monitors in the 170 Series do not work with Model 305
Simulators.)
1.
Ensure the Model 325 Power switch is in the off position.
2.
Connect the Model 325 Simulator’s power cord to the power receptacle on the
rear panel of the simulator; plug the other end of the power cord into a properly
grounded wall outlet of appropriate voltage.
3.
Ensure the 170 Series Monitor is turned off.
4.
Connect the simulator interconnect cable’s 50-pin end to the simulator’s Fetal
Monitor connector.
6-6
5.
Connect the sub-cables of the other end of the simulator interconnect cable into
the color-coded connectors on the monitor/adapter: US and UA (as required by
the procedure).
6.
Turn on the Model 325 Simulator. Verify that the green Power indicator
illuminates.
7.
Turn on the 170 Series Monitor.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test
FECG Test
This portion of the functional checkout procedure ensures the integrity of the FECG
circuitry and the heart rate channel of the recorder.
1.
Connect the Model 325 Simulator’s ECG sub-cable to the FECG receptacle on
the monitor
2.
Set the switches on the Model 325 Input Simulator according to Table 6-2.
3.
If not already on, press the monitor’s Record button.
4.
Turn the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob fully counterclockwise and verify
the following on the monitor:
„
The FHR1 value is 30 BPM.
„
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
„
The ECG “beep” volume of the rear panel speaker can be increased or
decreased using the Volume buttons. (Set the volume to the desired level.)
„
The recorder prints a continuous line at 30 BPM on the top grid of the strip chart
paper.
‹
5.
Revision C
) flashes at a rate of 30 times per minute.
The recorder prints the message FECG on the center margin of the strip
chart paper after approximately 20 seconds.
Turn the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to input an FECG signal of
approximately 120 BPM. Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value is 120 BPM.
‹
FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
‹
The ECG “beep” volume of the rear panel speaker can be increased or
decreased using the Volume buttons. (Set the volume to the desired level.)
‹
The recorder prints a continuous line at 120 BPM on the strip chart paper.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
) flashes at a rate of 120 times per minute.
6-7
Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test
Table 6-2. Model 325 Simulator Settings for FECG Test
Section
Switch
Setting
Main
RATE
Rate
MANUAL
Mode
FECG
QRS Amplitude
15 µV
QRS Polarity
+
Pattern Memory
OFF
Main
CMR
Mode
TOCO
FECG/MECG
GENERAL
UA
6.
Repeat step 5 for each of the following rates: 60, 210, and 240 BPM.
7.
Change the simulator’s QRS Polarity switch from + to –. Verify that the monitor
does not skip any beats.
8.
Set the simulator’s ECG Rate switch to the RAMP setting. Verify that the
monitor’s FHR1 value counts between approximately 30 and 240 BPM and that
the FHR1 trend is a ramp between the same values on the strip chart paper.
(See Figure 6-1.)
9.
Access the Service Setup Mode and disable ECG Artifact Elimination.
10. Set the simulator’s ECG Rate switch to the ∆15 position. Verify the following on
the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value oscillates by 15 BPM.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
‹
The ECG “beep” is heard from the rear panel speaker.
‹
The FHR trend oscillates 15 BPM between 115 and 130 BPM on the top
grid of the strip chart paper. (See Figure 6-2.)
) flashes for each input signal.
11. Repeat step 10 for rate values of ∆22 and ∆27. The results should be the same
except that the FHR1 value oscillates by either 22 or 27 BPM and the FHR
trend is an oscillation of 22 or 27 BPM. The top value is always at
approximately 130 BPM. (Refer to Figure 6-2.)
12. Access the Service Setup Mode and enable ECG Artifact Elimination.
6-8
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test
13. Set the simulator’s ECG Rate switch to the ∆15 position. Verify the following on
the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value oscillates by 15 BPM.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
‹
The ECG “beep” is heard from the rear panel speaker.
‹
The recorder prints an oscillation of 15 BPM between 115 and 130 BPM on
the top grid of the strip chart paper. (Figure 6-2. shows the strip chart paper
results.)
) flashes for each input signal.
14. Repeat step 13 for the rate value of ∆22. The result should be the same as step
13 except that the FHR1 value oscillates by 22 BPM and the trend is an
oscillation of 22 BPM between the 108 and 130 BPM on the strip chart paper.
15. Set the simulator’s ECG Rate switch to the ∆27 position. Verify the following on
the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value oscillates by 27 BPM.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
‹
The ECG “beep” is heard from the rear panel speaker.
‹
The trend does not indicate any oscillation.
) flashes for each input signal.
16. Access the Service Setup Mode and disable ECG Artifact Elimination.
17. Set the simulator’s ECG Rate switch to the MANUAL position and the Manual
Adjustment knob to the fully counterclockwise position. Disconnect the ECG
simulator sub-cable from the monitor’s FECG receptacle. Verify the following
on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value is blank.
‹
The FHR1 trend stops plotting on the strip chart paper.
‹
After approximately 30 seconds, the message CARDIO INOP prints on the
center margin of the strip chart paper.
18. Set the simulator’s ECG Mode switch to the OFF position.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-9
Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test
Figure 6-1. FECG Ramp
6-10
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: FECG Test
Figure 6-2. FECG Artifact Elimination
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-11
Functional Checkout Procedure: Legplate Inspection
Legplate Inspection
Inspect the legplate as follows:
6-12
1.
Check for a proper seal around the ground plate.
2.
Ensure that no contaminants are present on either the ground plate or the
push posts.
3.
Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and connector pins.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Test
Ultrasound Test
This portion of the functional checkout procedure ensures the integrity of the
ultrasound circuitry and the heart rate channel of the recorder.
1.
Connect the simulator’s US sub-cable to the US receptacle on the monitor.
2.
Set the switches on the Model 325 Input Simulator according to Table 6-3.
3.
If not already on, press the monitor’s Record pushbutton.
4.
Turn the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to input an ultrasound signal of
approximately 120 BPM. Verify the following on the monitor:
5.
6.
‹
The FHR1 value is 120 BPM.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
minute.
‹
Ultrasound audio volume from the rear panel speaker can be increased or
decreased using the left pair of Volume pushbuttons. (Set the volume to
the desired level.)
‹
The recorder prints a continuous line at 120 BPM on the top grid of the
strip chart paper.
‹
The recorder prints the message US on the center margin of the strip chart
paper after approximately 20 seconds.
) flashes at a rate of 120 times per
Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to increase the heart rate value
by less than 13 BPM from the 120 BPM baseline. Verify the following on the
monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value immediately reflects this new input rate.
‹
The strip chart recorder immediately reflects this new input rate.
‹
Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to decrease the heart rate
value by more than 13 BPM from the 120 BPM baseline. Verify the
following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value immediately reflects this new input rate.
‹
The strip chart recorder prints at the last input rate for an additional 3
seconds before blanking the heart rate data and printing a continuous line at
the new input rate.
Set the simulator’s US Rate switch to the RAMP position. Verify that the
FHR1 value counts between approximately 50 and 210 BPM and that the
recorder prints a ramp between the same values. (Refer to Figure 6-3.)
Table 6-3. Ultrasound Test Simulator Settings
Section
US/FMD
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Switch
Setting
Mode
US
Signal Level
MED
Rate
MANUAL
6-13
Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Test
Table 6-3. Ultrasound Test Simulator Settings
Section
Switch
Setting
General
Pattern Memory
OFF
Main
CMR
Mode
TOCO
UA
7.
6-14
Place the simulator’s US Rate switch in each of the individual rate settings (50,
60, 120, and 210 BPM). Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value reflects the simulator setting ± 1 BPM.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
‹
Ultrasound audio is heard coming from the rear panel speaker.
‹
The recorder prints a continuous line at the respective value ± 3 BPM on
the top grid of the strip chart paper.
) flashes at the simulator setting.
8.
Repeat step 4 through step 7 using the second ultrasound channel.
9.
Place the simulator’s US Mode switch in the OFF position. Verify the
following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value is blank.
‹
The recorder stops printing the fetal heart rate trace.
‹
The recorder prints the message CARDIO INOP on the center margin of the
strip chart paper after approximately 20 seconds.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Test
Figure 6-3. Ultrasound Ramp
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-15
Functional Checkout Procedure: Fetal Movement Detection Test
Fetal Movement Detection Test
This portion of the functional checkout procedure ensures the integrity of the fetal
movement detection circuitry and the heart rate channel of the recorder. (Refer to
Figure 6-4.)
NOTE: Fetal movement detection is an option which must be installed and enabled
for use on your monitor.
1.
Connect the simulator’s US sub-cable to the US receptacle on the monitor.
2.
Set the switches on the Model 325 Input Simulator according to Table 6-4.
3.
If not already on, press the monitor’s Record pushbutton.
4.
Turn the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to input an ultrasound signal of
approximately 120 BPM. Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value is 120 BPM.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
minute.
‹
Ultrasound audio volume from the rear panel speaker can be increased or
decreased using the left pair of Volume pushbuttons. (Set the volume to
the desired level.)
‹
The recorder prints a continuous line at 120 BPM on the top grid of the
strip chart paper.
‹
Fetal movement markers
are shown on for a duration of one second,
then off for eight seconds, then on for one second, etc.
‹
The recorder prints the messages US and FMD
on the center margin
of the strip chart paper after approximately 20 seconds.
) flashes at a rate of 120 times per
Table 6-4. Fetal Movement Detection Test Simulator Settings
Section
US/FMD
General
UA
6-16
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Switch
Setting
Mode
US/FMD
Signal Level
MED
Rate
MANUAL
Pattern Memory
OFF
Main
CMR
Mode
TOCO
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Fetal Movement Detection Test
Figure 6-4. Fetal Movement Detection
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-17
Functional Checkout Procedure: Ultrasound Transducer Test
Ultrasound Transducer Test
1.
Inspect a Model 116/118/120/170 ultrasound transducer as follows:
‹
Ensure there are no cracks around the transducer face.
‹
Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and connector pins.
2.
Disconnect the simulator’s ultrasound cable from the front panel of the 170
Series Monitor.
3.
Connect the ultrasound transducer to either US input receptacle on the front
panel of the monitor. Verify the following on the monitor:
4.
5.
‹
The value shows three steady dashes “– – –” in the FHR1 display.
‹
The recorder prints the message US on the center margin of the strip chart
paper after approximately 20 seconds.
Gently rub each crystal of the ultrasound transducer rhythmically. (There are
nine crystals. Eight are arranged around the circumference of the transducer;
one is in the center.) Verify the following:
‹
Good sensitivity is apparent.
‹
The monitor’s FHR1 value follows the input rate.
‹
The recorder follows the input rate.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
‹
Ultrasound audio is heard coming from the monitor’s rear panel speaker.
) flashes for each input.
Disconnect the ultrasound transducer from the front panel of the monitor.
Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value and heartbeat indicator are both blank.
‹
The recorder stops printing the fetal heart rate trace.
‹
The recorder prints the message CARDIO INOP on the center margin of the
strip chart paper after approximately 20 seconds.
ABOUT LATCHING ALARMS
The fetal heart rate alarms are latching alarms which means that
a clinician must acknowledge the alarm using the monitor’s
Alarm Silence button in order to clear the alarm.
Active Threshold Alarm: Press the Alarm Silence button to
cancel the audio component of an active threshold alarm. The
visual indications remain present until the FHR value returns to
within the defined acceptable range. (This is tested in steps 14
to 16 for a high alarm, and steps 22 to 24 for a low alarm.)
6-18
Unsilenced, Resolved Threshold Alarm: If a threshold alarm
condition is resolved, prior to be silenced (clinical
acknowledgement), the visual and audible indications both
remain present. Press the Alarm Silence button to cancel both
the audible and visual indications. (This is tested in steps 17 to
19 for a high alarm and 25 to 27 for a low alarm.)
NOTE: For continuous limit violations: a high alarm activates
after 5 minutes; a low alarm activates after 30 seconds.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Uterine Activity Test
Uterine Activity Test
This portion of the functional checkout procedure tests the uterine activity section of
the 170 Series Monitor.
1.
Set the switches on the Model 325 Simulator according to Table 6-5.
2.
Connect the simulator’s UA sub-cable to the UA receptacle on the monitor.
3.
Access the service setup mode and note the UA reference default value. (The
monitor is shipped from the factory with this value set at 10 relative units;
however, your unit may have been custom configured.) Exit the service mode.
4.
Press the monitor’s Power button to turn on the monitor.
5.
Press the monitor’s Record pushbutton.
6.
Briefly press the monitor’s UA Reference pushbutton. Verify the following on
the monitor:
‹
The UA value matches the default setting.
‹
The recorder prints a continuous line at the default value on the uterine
activity channel of the strip chart paper.
‹
The recorder prints the messages TOCO and UA REF on the strip chart
paper.
7.
Press and hold the UA Reference button on the monitor to cycle through the
available selections for UA reference: 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25 relative units. Test
each of these reference settings. Verify that the UA value is displayed
accordingly and that the recorder prints a continuous line at the corresponding
value on the uterine activity channel of the strip chart paper.
8.
Place the simulator’s UA Level switch at each of the level settings: 0, 10, 50,
and 100 relative units. Verify that the UA value is displayed accordingly and
that the recorder prints a continuous line at the corresponding value on the heart
rate channel of the strip chart paper.
Table 6-5. Uterine Activity Test Simulator Settings
Section
Switch
Setting
General
Pattern Memory
OFF
Main
LEVEL
Level
0 mmHg
Mode
TOCO
UA
9.
Press the UA Reference button to reference to 10 relative units. If the default is
set to a different value, press and hold the UA Reference button to cycle to 10.
10. Place the simulator’s UA Level switch to the RAMP position. Verify that the
UA value measures a ramp between 10 and 100 relative units and that the
recorder prints a ramp between the same values. Refer to Figure 6-5.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-19
Functional Checkout Procedure: Uterine Activity Test
11. Disconnect the Model 325 Simulator’s uterine activity sub-cable from the UA
input receptacle on the front panel of the monitor. Verify the following on the
monitor:
‹
The UA value is blank.
‹
The recorder stops printing the uterine activity trace.
‹
The recorder prints the message UA INOP on the center margin of the strip
chart paper after approximately 20 seconds.
Figure 6-5. Uterine Activity Ramp
6-20
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Tocotransducer Test
Tocotransducer Test
1.
Inspect a Nautilus tocotransducer as follows:
‹
Check for any cracks or contaminants on the tocotransducer especially on
the diaphragm located on the bottom of the tocotransducer.
‹
Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and connector pins.
2.
Connect the tocotransducer to the UA input receptacle on the front panel of the
170 Series Monitor.
3.
Access service setup mode and note the default TOCO reference setting.
4.
Exit the service setup mode.
5.
Press the monitor’s Power button to turn the monitor back on.
IMPORTANT
TRIMLINE TOCOTRANSDUCERS—If you are using an older
Trimline Tocotransducer for this test, be advised of the following.
If the monitor is on when you connect or re-connect a Trimline
Tocotransducer to the UA connector, you must wait at least 10
seconds before pressing the UA Reference button. If the monitor
is off, you must wait at least 10 seconds from the time the monitor
is powered on.
6.
Revision C
Momentarily press the monitor’s UA Reference pushbutton. Verify the
following:
‹
The UA value shows the default setting.
‹
The recorder prints the messages UA REF and TOCO on the strip chart
paper.
7.
Apply gentle pressure to the tocotransducer diaphragm and verify that the UA
value responds to the pressure input. Increasing force should produce an
increasing value and vice versa.
8.
Remove the tocotransducer from the monitor’s UA input receptacle. Verify the
following on the monitor:
‹
The UA value is blank.
‹
The recorder stops printing the uterine activity trace.
‹
The recorder prints the message UA INOP on the center margin of the strip
chart paper after approximately 20 seconds.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-21
Functional Checkout Procedure: Strain Gauge Transducer Test
Strain Gauge Transducer Test
1.
2.
3.
6-22
Inspect a strain gauge as follows:
‹
Unscrew the plastic dome from the transducer and check for any cracks or
contaminants on the transducer.
‹
Visibly assess the condition of the cable, strain relief, and the connector
pins.
Connect the strain gauge to the UA input receptacle on the front panel of the
monitor. Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The UA value may read negative numbers indicating baseline pressure is
off scale. In this case, the message BASELINE PRESSURE OFF SCALE prints on
the strip chart paper.
‹
After approximately 20 seconds, the message IUP prints on the center
margin of the strip chart paper.
Select the monitor’s UA Reference button and verify the following on the
monitor:
‹
The UA value is 0 mmHg.
‹
The UA trend is a continuous line at 0 mmHg on the strip chart paper.
‹
The message UA REF prints on the strip chart paper.
4.
Apply gentle pressure on the strain gauge diaphragm and verify that the UA
value and trend respond to the input. Increasing force should produce an
increasing value and vice versa.
5.
Disconnect the strain gauge from the front panel of the monitor. Verify the
following on the monitor:
‹
The UA value is blank.
‹
The UA trend stops plotting on the strip chart paper.
‹
After approximately 20 seconds, the message UA INOP prints on the strip
chart paper.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Pattern Memory Test
Pattern Memory Test
The pattern memory of the simulator can be used to test any of the following mode
combinations of the monitor.
‹
FECG/TOCO
‹
FECG/IUP
‹
US/TOCO or US2/TOCO
‹
US/IUP or US2/IUP
‹
US/FMD/TOCO
‹
US/FMD/IUP
‹
FECG/US/TOCO
‹
FECG/US/IUP
NOTE: US/US2 cannot be tested simultaneously unless two Model 325 Simulators
or two ultrasound transducers are used. Do not attempt to test dual
ultrasound using one Model 325 Simulator and one ultrasound transducer
or a conflict between enable lines will occur.
NOTE: Although dual heart rate can be verified using the pattern memory, an
additional procedure is given in this functional checkout procedure.
To check any of the mode combinations listed above:
1.
Connect the appropriate simulator sub-cables to the corresponding receptacles
on the monitor.
2.
Enable the modes on the simulator.
3.
Set the simulator’s Pattern Memory switch to the ON position.
4.
If not already on, press the monitor’s Record pushbutton.
5.
Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
Each heart rate display (FHR1 and FHR2) responds accordingly for value
and heartbeat indicator.
‹
The UA display responds accordingly for the value.
‹
The recorder responds appropriately in both trending and message
information.
NOTE: Refer to the “Model 325 Simulator Product Manual” for illustrations of the
patterns to be expected on the monitor.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-23
Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern)
Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern)
FECG/US Modes
6-24
1.
Connect the Model 325 Simulator’s ECG sub-cable to the monitor’s FECG input
receptacle.
2.
Connect the simulator’s US sub-cable to the monitor’s US input receptacle.
3.
Set the switches on the Model 325 Simulator according to Table 6-6.
4.
If not already on, select the monitor’s Record button.
5.
Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value reads 120 BPM.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
minute.
‹
The FHR2 value varies between approximately 50 and 210 BPM.
‹
The FHR2 heartbeat indicator (
value.
‹
The messages FECG and US print on the center margin of the strip chart
paper.
‹
The FHR1 trend is a continuous plain black line (
) on the 120 BPM
mark on the top grid of the strip chart paper. (Refer to Figure 6-6.)
‹
The FHR2 trend is a bold black ramp trace (
) between 50 and 210
BPM on the top grid of the strip chart paper. (Refer to Figure 6-6.)
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
) flashes at a rate of 120 times per
) flashes at a rate consistent with the
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern)
Table 6-6. Model 325 Simulator Settings for FECG/US Test
Section
FECG/MECG
ULTRASOUND/FMD
General
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Switch
Setting
Main
RATE
Rate
120 BPM
Mode
FECG
QRS Amplitude
50 µV
QRS Polarity
+
Mode
US
Level
MED
Rate
RAMP
Pattern Memory
OFF
6-25
Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern)
Figure 6-6. Dual Heart Rate, FECG and US
6-26
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Dual Heart Rate Test (Non-Pattern)
Dual Ultrasound Modes
As stated previously, the dual ultrasound mode of the 170 Series Monitor cannot be
tested unless two Model 325 Simulators are used or two Nautilus ultrasound
transducers. Do not attempt to test dual ultrasound using one Model 325 Simulator
and one ultrasound transducer. This procedure details using two transducers since it
is more practical for a test site.
1.
If not already on, press the monitor’s Record pushbutton.
2.
Plug one ultrasound transducer into the monitor’s US input receptacle and the
other into the monitor’s US2 receptacle. Verify the following on the monitor:
3.
4.
Revision C
‹
The FHR1 value shows three steady dashes “– – –.”
‹
The FHR2 value shows three steady dashes “– – –.”
‹
The recorder prints the messages US and US2 on the center margin of the
strip chart paper.
Use your finger to rub the face of the ultrasound transducer connected to the
monitor’s US input receptacle; try to maintain a steady rate and verify the
following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR1 value responds to the rubbing.
‹
The FHR1 heartbeat indicator (
‹
The recorder prints the heart rate tracing corresponding to the rate and the
trace is plain black (
).
) responds to the input.
Use your finger to rub the face of the ultrasound transducer connected to the
monitor’s US2 input receptacle; try to maintain a steady rate and verify the
following on the monitor:
‹
The FHR2 value responds to the rubbing.
‹
The FHR2 heartbeat indicator (
‹
The recorder prints the heart rate tracing corresponding to the rate and the
trace is bold black (
).
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
) responds to the input.
6-27
Functional Checkout Procedure: Alarm Test
Alarm Test
This portion of the test ensures the integrity of the audio alarms and tests the alarm
limit software.
1.
Connect the Model 325 Simulator’s US sub-cable to the monitor’s US input.
2.
Press and hold (for three seconds) Setup to enter the monitor’s setup mode.
3.
Set the FHR alarm enable to on.
4.
Set the FHR high alarm limit value to 180 BPM.
5.
Set the FHR low alarm limit value to 100 BPM.
6.
Set the FHR audio alarm to a level you can easily hear.
7.
Press the Setup button to exit the setup mode.
8.
Press the monitor’s Record button.
9.
Verify that the FHR high and low limits print in the annotation area of the strip
chart paper.
10. Turn off the monitor’s recorder.
11. Set the switches on the Model 325 Input Simulator according to Table 6-7.
12. Using the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob, input an US signal of 179
BPM as indicated on the monitor. Verify that there is no alarm tone sounding
from the monitor’s speaker.
13. Using the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob, increase the US rate to 180
BPM. Again, verify that there is no alarm tone sounding from the monitor’s
speaker.
14. Using the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob, increase the US rate to 181
BPM. After five minutes, verify the following on the monitor:
‹
An alarm tone is emitted from the monitor’s speaker (alternating high/low
tones).
‹
The Alarm indicator flashes.
‹
The affected heart rate numerics flash.
15. Press the monitor’s front panel Alarm Silence pushbutton and verify that the
alarm tone silences but the visual indications remain present.
6-28
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Functional Checkout Procedure: Alarm Test
Table 6-7. Alarm Test Simulator Settings
Section
Switch
Setting
Main
RATE
Rate
MANUAL
Mode
US
Pattern Memory
OFF
US
General
16. Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to decrease the US rate to 180
BPM. Verify that the Alarm indicator goes out and the heart rate numerics stop
flashing.
17. Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to increase the US rate to 181
BPM to set off the alarm once more. It will take five minutes for the alarm
appear.
18. Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to decrease the US rate to 180
BPM. Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The alarm tone continues sounding.
‹
The Alarm indicator continues flashing.
‹
The affected heart rate numerics continue flashing.
19. Press the monitor’s front panel Alarm Silence pushbutton. Verify that the
visual and audio alarm indications disappear.
20. Using the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob, input an US signal of 101
BPM. Verify that there is no alarm tone sounding from the monitor’s speaker.
21. Using the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob, decrease the US rate to 100
BPM. Again, verify that there is no alarm tone sounding from the monitor’s
speaker.
22. Using the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob, decrease the US rate to 99
bpm. After 30 seconds, verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The alarm tone is emitted from the monitor’s speaker.
‹
The Alarm indicator flashes.
‹
The affected heart rate numerics flash.
23. Press the monitor’s front panel Alarm Silence pushbutton. Verify that the
visual and audio alarm indications disappear.
24. Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to increase the US signal to 100
BPM. Verify that the Alarm indicator goes out and the heart rate numerics stop
flashing.
25. Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to decrease the US signal to 99
BPM to set off the alarm one more time. It will take 30 seconds for the alarm to
appear.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
6-29
Functional Checkout Procedure: Alarm Test
26. Use the simulator’s Manual Adjustment knob to increase the US signal to 100
bpm. Verify the following on the monitor:
‹
The alarm tone continues sounding.
‹
The Alarm indicator stops continues flashing.
‹
The affected heart rate numerics continue flashing.
27. Press the monitor’s front panel Alarm Silence pushbutton. Verify that the
visual and audio alarm indications disappear.
28. This concludes the functional checkout procedure.
6-30
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 7
Serviceable Assemblies 7
This chapter provides information to aid in performing routine service and
maintenance on a 170 Series Monitor. This section of the manual is not intended as
a substitute for proper professional training, or familiarity with the 170 Series
Monitor. Only qualified service personnel should attempt servicing a 170 Series
Monitor.
This chapter contains the following information:
General Anti-Static Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Transducer Plug Replacement Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Removing the Monitor Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Tocotransducer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Nautilus Transducer Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Replacing the Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Replacing a Front Panel Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Servicing the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-1
Serviceable Assemblies: General Anti-Static Handling Precautions
General Anti-Static Handling Precautions
The following guidelines should be followed when handling circuit boards or
assemblies containing circuit boards. Following these procedures helps resist
damage that can be caused by static electricity.
7-2
‹
Discharge any static charge you may have built up before handling parts.
‹
Wear a grounded, anti-static wristband at all times.
‹
Use a static-free work surface.
‹
Store items in anti-static bags or boxes.
‹
Do not remove items from anti-static containers until needed.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Refer to Table 7-2 and ensure you have the correct kit. Unpack the kit and ensure it
contains the items listed in Table 7-1. If something is missing, contact your GE
Service Representative immediately.
Table 7-1. Kit Summary
Plug Type
Plug Kit
Cat. No. (REF)
Tocotransducer Cable:
„ Trimline, 2260 Series
„ Nautilus, 2264 Series
6158J
„
Ultrasound Transducer Cable:
Standard, 5700 Series
„ Nautilus, 5700 Series
8675A
FECG Cable/Legplate
6158F
Table 7-2. Packing List
Item
Quantity
Contact Pin, male, #24 AWG, 16.5 mm
11
Contact Pin, male, #24 AWG, 18 mm
1
Gripper of appropriate size:
3-5 mm for smaller cables
(TOCO)
„ 5-7 mm for larger cables
(US, FECG)
1
Plastic Ring 21.8 x 4 mm
1
Retaining Ring
1
Strain Relief Clamp, 3-7 mm
1
Screw (for above clamp), M 2.6 x 10
2
„
Half-Shell with Clamp of appropriate size:
3-5 mm for smaller cables
„ 5-7 mm for larger cables
1
Half-Shell with Tongue
1
Color-Coded Connector Plug, 12-pin
1
Oetiker Clampa
1
„
a
Revision C
The Oetiker clamp is used only for Nautilus Tocotransducers
(2264 Series).
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-3
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Handling Precautions
Transducers are delicate measuring instruments and must be handled accordingly.
Transducer damage can be avoided by taking the following precautions:
„
Avoid banging or dropping transducers.
„
Refrain from wrapping transducer cables around transducer body.
„
Do not immerse transducers in aqueous cleaning solutions.
„
Do not pull on cables when removing transducer plugs from the monitor frontpanel connectors; remove plugs by grasping the gripper.
Equipment Required
You will need the following equipment:
„
Green1 Stranded Wire (approximately 6 inches)
‹
#24 AWG for tocotransducers and ultrasound transducers
‹
#26 AWG for FECG cable/legplates
„
#26 AWG Blue Stranded Wire (approximately 4 inches) for FECG Cable
„
Wire Cutter/Stripper
„
Soldering Iron and Solder
„
Shrink Tubing
„
Oetiker Pincers (for Nautilus Tocotransducers only)2
1
The color green is specified for consistency with factory builds and the wiring charts contained in this
document.
2 This tool is required to place an Oetiker clamp on a 2264 Series Nautilus Tocotransducer. You can
order the Standard Pincers (No. 1098) or Side Jaw Pincers (No. 1099) from Oetiker, Inc., P.O. Box 93,
Livingston, NJ 07039. The telephone number is: 201-992-1920.
7-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Tocotransducer Cable Preparation
Refer to Figure 7-1 and Table 7-3 while following these steps:
1.
Cut #24 AWG green wire (not supplied) to 1-1⁄2 inches long and strip each end
1
⁄8 inch. This will be used as a jumper wire.
2.
Cut #24 AWG green wire to 2 inches long. Strip one end 3⁄4 inch.
3.
Route the transducer cable through the gripper. Slide the gripper, followed by
the retaining ring, down the cable until they are out of the way.
4.
For Nautilus Tocotransducers only: Slide Oetiker clamp over end of cable. This
clamp is not necessary for Trimline Tocotransducers.
5.
Score around grey cable jacket 1 inch. Peel and remove jacket. Trim filler flush
to jacket.
6.
For Nautilus Tocotransducers only: Cut vent tubing flush with jacket being
careful not to restrict air flow. The vent tubing is not present in Trimline cables.
7.
Pull back the braided shield and twist into pigtail.
8.
9.
Solder the 2-inch prepared green wire to the shield, wrapping the
strip on to the shield. Cut wire flush with other conductors of the cable.
3⁄4-inch
Install shrink tubing over the solder joint of the shield.
10. Strip all conductors 1⁄8 inch. Twist and tin conductors.
11. Locate the grounding contact pin (longer pin) in the kit. Solder this pin to the
shield wire.
12. Solder a short pin to the yellow wire and one end of the green jumper wire.
Both wires share this pin.
13. Solder a short pin to the free end of the green jumper wire.
14. Solder a short pin to each of the other conductors.
15. For Nautilus Tocotransducers only: Crimp Oetiker clamp over cable jacket 1⁄8
inch from end.
16. Continue with “Plug Assembly” on page 7-13.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-5
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
1²
¤8²
¤8²
1
1
Vent Tube (Nautilus only)
yellow
Oetiker Clamp
(Nautilus only)
1 1¤2² #24 AWG Green Jumper Wire
Shield
Shrink Tubing
1²
#24 AWG Green Wire
Figure 7-1. Tocotransducer Cable Preparation
Table 7-3. Tocotransducer Cable Wiring
7-6
Pin Number
Pin Length
Description
Wire Color
1
short
+PRESS
Red
2
short
–PRESS
White
3
short
—
—
4
short
+4 V
Blue
5
short
—
—
6
short
Reference/Enable
#24 AWG Green Jumper and Yellow
7
LONG
Shield Ground
#24 AWG Green
8
short
—
—
9
short
—
—
10
short
—
—
11
short
—
—
12
short
TOCO Enable
#24 AWG Green Jumper
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Ultrasound Transducer Cable Preparation
Refer to Figure 7-2 and Table 7-4 while following these steps:
1.
Cut #24 AWG green wire (not supplied) to 1-1⁄2 inches long and strip each end
inch. This will be used as a jumper wire.
1⁄8
2.
Cut #24 AWG green wire to 4 inches long and strip each end 3⁄4 inch.
3.
Route the transducer cable through the gripper. Slide the gripper, followed by
the retaining ring, down the cable until they are out of the way.
4.
Score around grey jacket of cable 1 inch. Peel and remove jacket.
5.
Pull back the outer braided shield and twist into pigtail.
6.
Solder the 4-inch prepared green wire to the outer shield, wrapping the 3⁄4-inch
strip onto shield. Cut wire flush with other conductor(s) of cable. Retain
remaining piece of wire for inner shield.
7.
This step varies according to the ultrasound transducer type:
‹
Standard Ultrasound Transducer: This cable is a dual-coaxial cable. Cut off
black coaxial cable and fillers flush to jacket.
‹
Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer: This cable is a single-coaxial cable. Trim
fillers flush to jacket.
8.
Score around the white jacket leaving 3⁄16 inch of the jacket remaining.
9.
Pull back the inner shield and twist into a pigtail. The clear dielectric is now
exposed.
10. Solder remaining piece of green wire to inner shield, wrapping the 3⁄4 inch strip
onto shield. Cut wire flush with other conductors.
11. Install shrink tubing over the solder joint between the white coaxial cable and
the inner shield.
12. Strip the three conductors 1⁄8 inch (clear and both green). Twist and tin
conductors.
13. Locate the grounding contact pin (longer pin) in the kit. Solder this pin to the
inner shield.
14. Solder a short pin to the clear conductor and the outer shield.
15. Solder a short pin to each end of the green jumper wire (1-1⁄2 inches long).
16. Continue with “Plug Assembly” on page 7-13.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-7
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
1²
„
Score around length of jacket 1inch. Peel
jacket and remove.
Separate outer braided shield and twist.
For Standard ultrasound transducers, the
cable is a dual coaxial cable.
„ For Nautilus ultrasound transducers, the
cable is a single coaxial cable.
„
„
If present, cut black coax and fillers flush
with grey jacket.
„ Solder #24 AWG green wire to outer shield.
„
¤16²
3
„
„
„
Score around white jacket leaving 3⁄16 inch.
Separate inner braided shield and twist.
Solder #24 AWG green wire to inner shield.
Apply shrink tubing over clear wire and
solder joint of inner shield.
1
„ Strip conductors ⁄8 inch. Twist and tin
conductors.
„ Solder contact pins to conductors and
jumper wire.
„
Figure 7-2. Ultrasound Transducer Cable Preparation
7-8
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Table 7-4. Ultrasound Cable Wiring
Revision C
Pin Number
Pin Length
Description
Wire Color
1
short
—
—
2
short
—
—
3
short
Overall Shield
#24 AWG Green
4
LONG
US Transmit/Receive Shield
#24 AWG Green
5
short
White Coax
—
6
short
—
—
7
short
—
—
8
short
—
—
9
short
—
—
10
short
—
—
11
short
US Enable
#24 AWG Green Jumper
12
short
US Enable Ground
#24 AWG Green Jumper
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-9
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
FECG Cable Preparation
Refer to Figure 7-3 and Table 7-5 while following these steps:
1.
Cut #26 AWG green wire (not supplied) to 2 inches long. Strip one end 3⁄4 inch.
2.
Cut #26 AWG blue wire (not supplied) to 1-1⁄2 inches long and strip each end 1⁄8
inch. This will be used as a jumper wire.
3.
Route the transducer cable through the gripper. Slide the gripper, followed by
the retaining ring, down the cable until they are out of the way.
4.
Score around cable jacket 1 inch. Peel and remove jacket. Trim filler flush to
jacket.
5.
Pull back the braided shield and twist into pigtail.
6.
Strip black conductive coating back to the outer jacket.
7.
Solder the 2-inch prepared green wire to the shield, wrapping the
strip onto the shield. Cut the wire flush with other conductors of cable.
3⁄4-inch
8.
Install shrink tubing over the solder joint of the shield.
9.
Strip all conductors 1⁄8 inch. Twist and tin conductors.
CAUTIONS
CABLE IDENTIFICATION—Identify each cable as it is stripped
since colors will be difficult to determine once the sleeving
contracts.
HEAT—Avoid excess heat when tinning ends and soldering
braids since the polyethylene inner insulation melts very easily.
10. Slide shrink tubing over cable.
11. Locate the grounding contact pin (longer pin) in the kit. Solder this pin to one
end of the blue jumper wire.
12. Solder a short pin to the blue wire and the free end of the blue jumper wire.
Both wires share this pin.
13. Solder a short pin to each of the other conductors,
14. Continue with “Plug Assembly” on page 7-13.
7-10
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
1²
¤8²
¤8²
1
1
blue
1 1¤2² #26 AWG Blue Jumper Wire
Shrink Tubing
Shield
Shrink Tubing
1²
#26 AWG Green Wire
Figure 7-3. FECG Cable Preparation
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-11
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Table 7-5. FECG Cable Wiring
7-12
Pin Number
Pin Length
Description
Wire Color
1
short
—
—
2
short
ECG Enable
Blue and #26 AWG Blue Jumper
3
LONG
Ground
#26 AWG Blue Jumper
4
short
—
—
5
short
—
—
6
short
LA (red terminal)
White/Black
7
short
RA (green terminal)
White
8
short
Shield
#26 AWG Green
9
short
—
—
10
short
—
—
11
short
—
—
12
short
RL (plate)
White/Red
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
Plug Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-4 while replacing a transducer plug. Note that the strain relief
clamp (3) orientation is different between tocotransducers and all other transducers
(ultrasound, FECG). In addition, the Oetiker clamp (11) is used for Nautilus
Tocotransducers only.
Figure 7-4. Transducer Plug Construction
1.
Remove the old plug.
2.
Follow cable preparation procedures earlier in this document: “Tocotransducer
Cable Preparation”, “Ultrasound Transducer Cable Preparation”, or “FECG
Cable Preparation”.
3.
Insert pinned wires into corresponding positions in the pin housing according to
the wiring table in each of the above listed sections. Push in each pin until it
bottoms out and is retained by the pin spring fingers which prevent it from
backing out of the hole.
NOTE: If a pin is removed from the sprocket housing, it must be discarded
and replaced.
4.
Revision C
Insert remaining pins into unused positions in the pin housing.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-13
Serviceable Assemblies: Transducer Plug Replacement Kits
5.
Insert the pin housing into the corresponding recess of the half-shell (with
strain-relief mounting holes). Position the housing so that the two dots at the
back are visible and at right angles to the plane of the half-shell. Push the cable
into the strain-relief slot. Ensure the slot surrounds a portion of the cable with
the outer covering intact.
6.
Fasten the strain-relief clamp to the half-shell using the two metric screws.
Refer to inset of Figure 7-4.
‹
Tocotransducer: the indent of the strain relief should
face outward.
‹
Ultrasound and FECG Transducers: the indent of the strain relief should
face inward.
7.
Place the half-shell (with tongue) on the pin housing, aligning it with the two
dots on the back of the housing. The half-shells should snap together evenly.
Slip the retaining ring over them to hold the assembly together.
8.
Slide the gripper back up the cable and align the two projections at the rear of
the plug assembly with the two recesses at the rear of the gripper.
NOTE: Do not allow projections and recesses to become misaligned while
sliding the gripper onto the plug or the gripper will not seat properly.
Position the tongue opposite the gripper boot through which the cable
extends. This ensures that the cable will extend downward once the
plug is inserted into the monitor.
CAUTION
KINKING—When sliding the gripper over the plug assembly,
pull the cable through the boot to prevent any kinking inside the
gripper.
9.
7-14
Install the plastic ring on the front of the plug.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement
Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement
You can replace the cable on a Nautilus Tocotransducer or Ultrasound Transducer
using one of four kits. Refer to Table 7-6 and ensure you have the correct kit. The
text of the instruction sheet is repeated here for informational purposes. Unpack the
kit and ensure it contains the items listed in Table 7-7. If something is missing,
contact your GE Service Representative immediately.
NOTE: Transducers are available in 5-, 8-, and 10-foot cable lengths. However, the
cable assembly included in a replacement kit is available in an 8-foot
length only.
Table 7-6. Kit Summary
Nautilus Transducer
Type and Cat. No. (REF)
Cable Kit
Cat. No. (REF)
Loop-Style Ultrasound Transducer, 5700 KAX/LAX/MAX
2003659-001
Button-Style Ultrasound Transducer, 5700 GAX/HAX/JAX
2003660-001
Loop-Style Tocotransducer, 2264 DAX/EAX/FAX/KAX/LAX/MAX
2003661-001
Button-Style Tocotransducer, 2264 AAX/BAX/CAX/GAX/HAX/JAX
2003662-001
Table 7-7. Packing List
Item
Transducer Case Top
1
Cable Assembly, 8-ft
1
Flat-Seal O-Ring
1
Sealing Screw, #4-40 x 5/16 in
6
Screw Cap, Curved
4
Screw Cap, Flat
1
Belt Knoba
1
a
Revision C
Qty
The belt knob is included in button-style
kits 2003660-001 and 2003662-001
only.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-15
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement
Equipment Required
You will need the following equipment:
„
Phillips Head Torque Driver
„
Screw Cap Extraction Tool (cat. no. 2004084-001)
„
Soldering Iron and Solder (ultrasound transducers only)
„
Loctite Adhesive #454 (recommended)
„
Anti-Static Wristband
„
Static-Free Work Surface
Reference Figures
Refer to Figure 7-5 and Figure 7-6 while using the cable replacement kit.
Flat Screw Cap
Button-Style
Loop-Style
Figure 7-5. Sealing Screw Caps
Self-Tapping
Screws
Cable Nut
Set Screw
Tocotransducer
2264 AAX/BAX/CAX/DAX/EAX/FAX
Tocotransducer
2264 GAX/HAX/JAX/KAX/LAX/MAX
Cable Nut
Set Screw
Green Wire
(Shield)
Clear Wire
(Center Conductor)
Green Wire
(Ground)
Ultrasound Transducer
Figure 7-6. Nautilus Transducers—Cover Removed
7-16
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement
Procedure
1.
Unplug the transducer from the monitor or telemetry transmitter.
2.
Use the screw cap extraction tool to pry off the five screw caps (Figure 7-5).
Discard all caps.
CAUTION
HANDLING–Take care not to damage the base sealing groove.
3.
Remove the five sealing screws and discard.
4.
Remove the transducer cover and flat-seal o-ring. Discard both items.
5.
Remove the cable connector according to the transducer type (Figure 7-6):
Tocotransducer
a.
If the PC board header is on the underside of the board (2264 GAX/HAX/
JAX/KAX/LAX/MAX only), remove the three self-tapping screws from
the board to gain access. Set aside screws.
b.
Observe the orientation of the cable connector in the PC board header, then
unplug.
Ultrasound Transducer
a.
Unscrew the green cable ground wire from the PC board. Set aside screw.
b.
Unsolder the green and clear cable wires from the PC board.
6.
Loosen the cable nut set screw, then unscrew the cable from the cable nut. Set
aside screw and cable nut.
7.
Remove the cable from the transducer base.
CAUTION
CABLE HANDLING–Do not place undue stress on cable wires
and shielding. Do not damage the cable o-ring or the hole in the
transducer base.
8.
Revision C
Feed the connector end of the new cable through the hole in the transducer base.
The cable o-ring should be seated in hole.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-17
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Cable Replacement
9.
Secure the molded strain relief end of the cable in the cable nut:
a.
Place the flat side of the cable nut against the case base.
b.
Rotate the cable assembly into the cable nut; continue threading until the
two are completely seated. Ensure the o-ring is seated in the hole and one
of the cable’s four set screw holes is centered under the hole in the cable
nut.
c.
Tighten the set screw until flush with the cable nut.
10. Connect cable according to transducer type (refer to Figure 7-6):
Tocotransducer
CAUTION
PRESSURE SENSITIVE BUTTON–Do not turn the pressure
sensitive button. Doing so will change the button height and affect
the tocotransducer calibration.
a.
Plug the cable connector into the PC board header conforming to the
keying observed earlier.
b.
If removed earlier, replace the PC board and tighten the three self-tapping
screws in the transducer base.
CAUTION
OVERTIGHTENING–Do not overtighten the screws. Doing so
could damage the threads in base.
Ultrasound Transducer
a.
Solder the green and clear cable wires to the PC board (Figure 7-6).
b.
Replace and tighten the green ground wire on the PC board.
11. Install new flat-seal o-ring.
12. Nautilus Tocotransducers only: Prior to replacing the case top, it is
recommended that you calibrate the transducer. Refer to “Tocotransducer
Calibration” on page 7-20 prior to completing the cable replacement procedure.
13. Follow the instructions for “Nautilus Transducer Reassembly” on page 7-32.
7-18
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Removing the Monitor Top Cover
Removing the Monitor Top Cover
1.
Unplug the AC adapter from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Remove the four bottom panel screws.
CAUTION
TOP COVER—The top cover remains tethered to the main
board via the display board and membrane switch panel cables.
Do not attempt to remove the monitor cover without first
disconnecting these cables.
Revision C
3.
Partially lift the top cover and slide it partways back to reveal the cables
connecting to the main board.
4.
Disconnect the display board cable from J18 on the main board.
5.
Disconnect the membrane switch panel cable from J19 on the main board.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-19
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
Tocotransducer Calibration
Any of the following three transducers can be used with the 170 Series Monitor:
‹
Corometrics Nautilus Tocotransducer
‹
Corometrics Trimline Tocotransducer
‹
Corometrics Large-Button Tocotransducer
+P
Pin 1*
–P
Pin 2*
+4 V
Pin 4*
475 W
REF
Pin 6*
*Front Panel UA Connector
Figure 7-7. CMR Test Jack
Table 7-8. CMR Test Jack Components
7-20
Part Description
Catalog Number
Pressure Connector
6158J
475 Ω, 1/8 W, 1% Resistor
472127
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
Nautilus Tocotransducers
Calibrating a Nautilus Tocotransducer requires a Calibration Kit. Refer to Table 7-9
to order the correct kit. Unpack the kit and ensure it contains the items listed in
Table 7-10. If something is missing, contact your GE Service Representative
immediately. The text of the instruction sheet is repeated here for informational
purposes.
Table 7-9. Kit Summary
Nautilus Transducer
Type and Cat. No. (REF)
Cable Kit
Cat. No. (REF)
Loop-Style Tocotransducer, 2264 DAX/EAX/FAX/KAX/LAX/MAX
2003663-001
Button-Style Tocotransducer, 2264 AAX/BAX/CAX/GAX/HAX/JAX
2003664-001
Table 7-10. Packing List
Item
Qty
Transducer Case Top
1
Flat-Seal O-Ring
1
Sealing Screw, #4-40 x 5/16 in
6
Screw Cap, Curved
4
Screw Cap, Flat
1
Belt Knoba
1
Instruction Sheet
1
aThe belt knob is included in button-style kit 2003664001 only.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-21
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
Equipment Required
IMPORTANT
WEIGHT TYPE—The specified weight, cat. no. (REF) 2003005001, is designed specifically for testing Nautilus Tocotransducers.
You will need the following equipment:
„
Phillips Head Torque Driver
„
Screw Cap Extraction Tool (cat. no. 2004084-001)
„
Digital Voltmeter: DM501 or equivalent with x1 probe or leads
„
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) Test Jack (Figure 7-7 and Table 7-8)
„
Potentiometer Adjustment Tool
„
52.5 gram Weight (cat. no. 2003005-001)
„
Torque Seal
„
Loctite Adhesive #454 (recommended)
„
Anti-Static Wristband
„
Static-Free Work Surface
„
Calibrated 170 Series Monitor
Disassembly
CAUTION
HANDLING—Take care not to damage the transducer base
sealing groove.
7-22
1.
Turn off the monitor.
2.
Unplug the transducer from the monitor.
3.
Use the screw cap extraction tool to pry off the five screw caps (Figure 7-5).
Discard all caps.
4.
Remove the five sealing screws and discard.
5.
Remove the transducer cover and flat-seal o-ring. Discard both items.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
Calibration for Cat. No. (REF) 2264 GAX/HAX/JAX/KAX/LAX/MAX
Refer to Figure 7-6 during calibration.
1.
Set the Gain (R11) and Offset (R6) potentiometers fully clockwise.
2.
Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to TP2 on the Main Board;
connect the negative lead to TP9.
3.
Turn on the monitor.
4.
Plug the CMR Test Jack into the monitor’s UA connector.
5.
Measure the voltage across the test points and record the value.
6.
Replace the CMR Test Jack with the transducer to be calibrated.
7.
Place the tocotransducer on a flat surface so that the button is face up, then
center the 52.5 gram weight on the pressure sensitive button.
8.
Adjust the Offset (R6) potentiometer so that the voltage matches the reading
recorded in step 5 ± 0.04 V. This voltage is referred to as the “weight on”
voltage.
9.
Remove the weight and observe the voltage reading; this voltage is referred
to as the “weight off” voltage. A correctly adjusted transducer will show a
voltage change of +0.115 V ± 0.015 V. If the change is less, adjust the Gain
(R11) potentiometer counterclockwise to increase the gain. If the change is
more, adjust the Gain (R11) potentiometer clockwise to decrease the gain.
10. Repeat step 7 through step 9 until the change in voltage between the “weight
on” and “weight off” conditions falls into specification.
11. Torque seal all potentiometers.
12. Follow the instructions for “Nautilus Transducer Reassembly” on page 7-32.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-23
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
Calibration for Cat. No. (REF) 2264 AAX/BAX/CAX/DAX/EAX/FAX
Refer to Figure 7-6 during calibration.
1.
Set the Gain (R15) and Offset (R5) potentiometers fully counterclockwise.
2.
Set the Offset Trim (R6) potentiometer to its mid-position—approximately
six turns from fully counterclockwise.
3.
Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to TP2 on the Main Board;
connect the negative lead to TP9.
4.
Turn on the monitor.
5.
Plug the CMR Test Jack into the monitor’s UA connector.
6.
Measure the voltage across the test points and record the value.
7.
Replace the CMR Test Jack with the transducer to be calibrated.
8.
Place the tocotransducer on a flat surface so that the button is face up, then
center the 52.5 gram weight on the pressure sensitive button.
9.
Adjust the Offset (R5) and Offset Trim (R6) potentiometers so that the
voltage matches the reading recorded in step 6 ± 0.04 V. This voltage is
referred to as the “weight on” voltage.
‹
The Offset (R5) potentiometer provides course adjustment.
‹
The Offset Trim (R6) potentiometer provides fine adjustment.
10. Remove the weight and observe the voltage reading; this voltage is referred
to as the “weight off” voltage. A correctly adjusted transducer will show a
voltage change of +0.115 V ± 0.015 V. If the change is less, adjust the Gain
(R15) potentiometer counterclockwise to increase the gain. If the change is
more, adjust the Gain (R15) potentiometer clockwise to decrease the gain.
11. Repeat step 8 through step step 10 until the change in voltage between the
“weight on” and “weight off” conditions falls into specification.
12. Torque seal all potentiometers.
13. Follow the instructions for “Nautilus Transducer Reassembly” on page 7-32.
7-24
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
Trimline Tocotransducers
The Corometrics Trimline Tocotransducer must be calibrated using the following
procedure for use with the 170 Series Monitor.
Equipment Required
‹
Digital voltmeter: DM501 or equivalent with x1 probe or leads
‹
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) Test Jack (Refer to Figure 7-7 and Table
7-8.)
‹
Calibrated 170 Series Monitor
‹
Screwdriver or potentiometer adjustment tool
‹
52.5 gram weight (cat. no. 13131AA)
‹
Sealing tape (cat. no. 11043AA)
‹
Torque seal
IMPORTANT
WEIGHT TYPE—The weight (cat. no. 13131AA) is designed
specifically for testing Trimline tocotransducers. The weight’s
bottom lip fits over the transducer’s button.
Procedure
During this procedure, refer to Figure 7-8 for the location of potentiometers in the
Trimline tocotransducer.
CW
CW
–
–
W
W
C
C
+
+
CW
–
–
ZERO TR
IM
ZERO C
TR
GAIN
CW
ZERO TR
IM
ZERO C
TR
GAIN
Button-Top Style
Loop Style
Figure 7-8. Trimline Tocotransducer Potentiometer Locations
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-25
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
NOTE: When performing this procedure, keep in mind that due to the nature of the
circuitry in the Trimline Tocotransducer, there is a stabilization time of
approximately two seconds for any output voltage. After adjusting a
potentiometer, verify that the output has stabilized prior to taking a voltage
reading.
1.
Remove the nameplate and sealing tape from the top cover of the Trimline
Tocotransducer.
2.
Set the GAIN and ZERO CTR potentiometers in the tocotransducer fully
counterclockwise.
3.
Set the ZERO TRIM potentiometer to its mid-position—approximately six
turns from fully counterclockwise.
4.
Locate TP2 and TP9 (ground) on the Main Board in the 170 Series Monitor.
5.
Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to TP2; connect the negative
lead to TP9.
6.
Apply power to the 170 Series Monitor; then plug the CMR Test Jack into the
monitor’s front panel uterine activity connector.
7.
Measure the voltage at TP2 and record the value.
8.
Replace the CMR Test Jack with the tocotransducer to be calibrated.
9.
Place the tocotransducer on a flat surface so that the button is face up, then
center the 52.5 gram weight on the button.
10. Adjust the ZERO CTR and/or the ZERO TRIM potentiometer(s) so that the
voltage measured across TP2 and TP9 matches the reading recorded in step 7, ±
0.04 V. This voltage is referred to as the WEIGHT ON voltage.
‹
The ZERO CTR potentiometer provides course adjustment.
‹
The ZERO TRIM potentiometer provides fine adjustment.
11. Remove the weight and observe the voltage reading; this voltage is referred to
as the WEIGHT OFF voltage. A correctly adjusted transducer will show a
voltage change of +0.115 V ± 0.015 V from the WEIGHT ON to WEIGHT
OFF voltage. If the change is less than 0.1 V, adjust the GAIN potentiometer
counterclockwise to increase the gain. If the change is more than 0.13 V, then
adjust the GAIN potentiometer clockwise to decrease the gain.
12. Repeat step 9 through step 11 until the change in voltage between the WEIGHT
ON and WEIGHT OFF conditions falls into specification.
7-26
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
13. Torque seal all potentiometers. Affix new sealing tape and re-install the
nameplate.
CAUTION
OFFSET VOLTAGES—Due to offset voltages induced by the
circuitry in the Trimline Tocotransducer, it is necessary to adjust
the change in voltage between the WEIGHT ON condition and
WEIGHT OFF condition—instead of simply adjusting the output
voltage for each condition. Adjusting the GAIN potentiometer
while monitoring the voltage at TP2 may show little or no voltage
change as the potentiometer is being adjusted. However, when the
weight is again placed on the button, the output voltage for this
condition may have changed significantly. In summary, it is
necessary to adjust the GAIN potentiometer and then recheck the
voltages during both the WEIGHT ON condition and the
WEIGHT OFF condition to determine the effectiveness of the
adjustment. As stated in step 12, the procedure is repeated until
the voltages fall into specification for both conditions.
14. Refer to “Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US)” on
page 7-34.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-27
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
Large-Button Tocotransducer
The Corometrics Large-Button Tocotransducer must be calibrated using the
following procedure for use with the 170 Series Monitor.
Equipment Required
‹
Digital voltmeter: DM501 or equivalent with x1 probe or leads
‹
Common Mode Rejection (CMR) Test Jack (Refer to Figure 7-7 and Table
7-8.)
‹
Calibrated 170 Series Monitor
‹
Screwdriver or potentiometer adjustment tool
‹
52.5 gram weight (cat. no. 7825AA)
‹
Sealing tape (cat. no. 7730AA)
‹
Torque seal
IMPORTANT
WEIGHT TYPE—The weight (cat. no. 7825AA) is designed
specifically for testing large-button tocotransducers.
Procedure
During this procedure, refer to Figure 7-9 for the location of potentiometers in the
Trimline tocotransducer.
Figure 7-9. Large-Button Tocotransducer Potentiometer Locations
7-28
1.
Remove the nameplate and sealing tape from the top cover of the
tocotransducer.
2.
Set the ZERO TRIM and GAIN potentiometers in the tocotransducer fully
counterclockwise.
3.
Locate TP2 and TP9 (ground) on the Main Board in the 170 Series Monitor.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Tocotransducer Calibration
4.
Connect the positive lead of the digital voltmeter to TP2; connect the negative
lead to TP9.
5.
Apply power to the 170 Series Monitor; then plug the CMR Test Jack into the
monitor’s front panel uterine activity connector.
6.
Measure the voltage at TP2 and record the value.
7.
Replace the CMR Test Jack with the tocotransducer to be calibrated.
8.
Place the tocotransducer on a flat surface so that the button is face up, then
center the 52.5 gram weight on the button.
9.
Adjust the ZERO TRIM potentiometer so that the voltage measured across TP2
and TP9 matches the reading recorded in step 6, ± 0.005 V. This voltage is
referred to as the WEIGHT ON voltage.
NOTE: If the ZERO TRIM potentiometer does not provide enough adjustment,
center the ZERO TRIM potentiometer and adjust the ZERO CENTER
potentiometer to match the reading recorded in step 6, ± 1.0 V. then use the
ZERO TRIM potentiometer to match step 6, ± 0.005 mV.
10. Remove the weight and observe the voltage reading; this voltage is referred to
as the WEIGHT OFF voltage. A correctly adjusted transducer will show a
voltage change of +0.142 V ± 0.015 V from the WEIGHT ON to WEIGHT
OFF voltage. Use the GAIN potentiometer to adjust the GAIN the gain.
11. Repeat step 8 to step 10 until the change in voltage between the WEIGHT ON
and WEIGHT OFF conditions falls into specification.
12. Torque seal all potentiometers. Affix new sealing tape and re-install the
nameplate.
13. Refer to “Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US)” on
page 7-34.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-29
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover Replacement
Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover
Replacement
In order to replace the top cover of a Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer in the field,
you will require one of two kits. Refer to Table 7-11 and ensure you have the correct
kit. Unpack the kit and ensure it contains the items listed in Table 7-12. If
something is missing, contact your GE Service Representative immediately. The
text of the instruction sheet is repeated here for informational purposes.
.
Table 7-11. Kit Summary
Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer
Type and Cat. No. (REF)
Cable Kit
Cat. No. (REF)
Loop-Style Ultrasound Transducer, 5700 KAX/LAX/MAX
2011679-001
Button-Style Ultrasound Transducer, 5700GAX/HAX/JAX
2011680-001
Table 7-12. Packing List
Item
Qty
Transducer Case Top
1
Flat-Seal O-Ring
1
Sealing Screw, #4-40 x 5/16 in
6
Screw Cap, Curved
4
Screw Cap, Flat
1
Belt Knoba
Screw Cap Extraction Tool
a
1
The belt knob is included in button-style
kits 2011680-001 only.
Equipment Required
You will need the following equipment:
7-30
„
Phillips Head Torque Driver
„
Loctite Adhesive #454 (recommended)
„
Anti-Static Wristband
„
Static-Free Work Surface
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Top Cover Replacement
Procedure
1.
Turn off the monitor.
2.
Unplug the transducer from the monitor.
3.
Use the screw cap extraction tool to pry off the five screw caps (Refer to Figure
7-5). Discard all caps.
CAUTION
HANDLING—Take care not to damage the transducer base
sealing groove.
Revision C
4.
Remove the five sealing screws and discard.
5.
Remove the transducer cover and flat-seal o-ring. Discard both items.
6.
Follow the instructions for “Nautilus Transducer Reassembly” on page 7-32.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-31
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Reassembly
Nautilus Transducer Reassembly
CAUTIONS
VISIBLE INSPECTION—Ensure the base sealing groove, flatseal o-ring, sealing surface, and sealing screws are free of visible
surface defects, dust, dirt, and foreign material.
SINGLE-USE COMPONENTS—Do not reuse case top, flat-seal
o-ring, sealing screws, or screw caps. Discard these items each
time a transducer is opened.
SEALS—Wetting of seals is not required.
1.
Install new flat-seal o-ring.
2.
Install case top and tighten five sealing screws. Hand tighten each screw a small
amount going in a clockwise direction, skipping every other screw. Repeat until
all screws are torqued to 48 in-oz.
3.
Apply one drop of Loctite adhesive1 to the perimeter of the hole for the flat
screw cap (Figure 7-5). Insert flat screw cap and press into place.
4.
Apply one drop of Loctite adhesive1 to the perimeter of the hole for a curved
screw cap. Insert the curved screw cap being careful to align it according to the
curvature of the case top; the small burr on the screw cap side should face the
outside edge of the transducer. (See Figure 7-10 and Figure 7-11.) Press the
screw cap firmly into place. Repeat for the remaining three curved screw caps.
5.
For button-style transducers only, install and torque belt knob to
48 in-oz.
6.
Refer to “Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US)” on
page 7-34.
1
7-32
Using Loctite Adhesive #454 is recommended in order to secure the screw caps.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Nautilus Transducer Reassembly
burr
Figure 7-10. Curved Screw Cap Shape, Nautilus Transducer
burr
Figure 7-11. Curved Screw Cap Alignment, Nautilus Transducer
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-33
Serviceable Assemblies: Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US)
Testing a Repaired Transducer (TOCO or US)
CAUTIONS
Following completion of the cable replacement procedure:
LEAKAGE TEST—Perform a leakage and dielectric test on the
transducer per applicable standards.
FUNCTIONAL TEST—Perform a functional response test on the
transducer.
7-34
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Main Board
Replacing the Main Board
Equipment Required
„
Phillips screwdriver
„
Main board
‹
part no. 2000243 (Model 171)
‹
part no. 15269 (Model 172)
‹
part no. 2000324 (Model 173)
‹
part no. 2000973 (Model 174)
Procedure
Revision C
1.
Disconnect the AC adapter from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Remove the monitor top cover, disconnecting the display board cable and
membrane switch panel cable from J18 and J19, respectively.
3.
Disconnect the sensor board cable from J3 on the main board.
4.
Disconnect the printhead cable from J1 on the main board.
5.
Disconnect the motor cable from J2 on the main board.
6.
Disconnect the speaker cable from J4 on the main board.
7.
Remove the nine mounting screws from the main board and carefully place the
board on an anti-static surface.
8.
For Models 173/174, you will need to transfer the FECG/IUP Board to the new
Main Board. Remove the four mounting screws, then carefully detach the
FECG/IUP Board from J15 and J16 on the Main Board. Carefully align the
FECG/IUP Board onto J15 and J16 on the new Main Board and push into place.
Secure to the stand-offs with the four screws removed earlier.
9.
Position the new board in place and follow steps 1–7 in reverse.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-35
Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the FECG/IUP Board
Replacing the FECG/IUP Board
Follow the instructions for “Replacing the Main Board” on page 7-35 with the
following exceptions:
7-36
‹
Retain the existing Main Board
‹
Mount a new FECG/IUP Board onto the existing Main Board
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel
Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel
The membrane switch panel cannot be removed from the top cover without possible
damage to the monitor. You must order a new top cover assembly in order to
replace the membrane switch panel.
Equipment Required
‹
Phillips screwdriver
‹
Wrench
‹
Hand file
‹
Top cover
‹
Rear panel adhesive gasket
‹
Rear panel label
‹
Membrane switch panel
‹
Display overlay
Refer to Table 7-13 for order numbers.
Table 7-13. Top Cover Assembly Order Numbers
Item
Model 171
Model 172
Model 173
Model 174
Top Cover
2004993-003a
2004993-001b
2004993-002c
2004993-004d
Rear Panel Adhesive Gasket
14561AA
Rear Panel Label
2003930-001
Membrane Switch Panel
15323BA
Display Overlay
15324BA
15323AA
15324AA
15324CA
15324DA
a
Replaces older 15453CA top covers.
b
Replaces older 15453AA top covers.
c
Replaces older 15453BA top covers.
d
Replaces older 15453DA top covers.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-37
Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel
Procedure
1.
Disconnect the AC adapter from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” on page 7-19.
3.
Unscrew the top cover standoff and set aside. You may need a wrench to
loosen the standoff.
4.
Remove the two display board bracket screws. Set aside the display board and
screws.
5.
Remove the screw fastening the membrane shield tongue. Set aside the screw.
6.
Remove the rear panel plug in J4 and set aside.
7.
Newer monitors have top covers with tabs which fit into corresponding slots in
the bottom enclosure. (Refer to Figure 7-12 and Figure 7-13.) If you are
installing a newer tabbed top cover onto an older bottom enclosure (without
slots), you must remove the tabs. Use a small hand file or other tool to remove
the plastic tabs.
8.
Apply the new membrane switch panel: peel off the adhesive backing and
position on the new top cover making sure the shield tongue is threaded through
the slot.
IMPORTANT
SHIELD TONGUE—If the shield tongue is caught between the
top cover and the switch panel, the panel cannot be properly
positioned.
9.
Screw the shield tongue in place using the old screw.
10. Replace the display board and secure all four screws.
11. Replace the top cover standoff.
12. Install the rear panel gasket on the inside of the cover: remove the adhesive
backing and align over the rear panel connectors.
13. Install the display overlay: remove the adhesive backing and align on the
outside of the top cover.
14. Install the rear panel label on the outside of the cover: remove the adhesive
backing and align over the rear panel connectors.
15. Re-connect the display board and membrane switch panel cables to J18 and J19
on the main board.
16. If you are installing a tabbed cover onto a bottom slotted enclosure, ensure that
the tabs align with the slots.
17. Secure the top cover with the four bottom panel screws.
18. Discard previous top cover assembly.
7-38
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing the Membrane Switch Panel
alignment tabs
Figure 7-12. Top Cover Alignment Tabs
alignment slots
Figure 7-13. Bottom Enclosure Alignment Slots
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-39
Serviceable Assemblies: Replacing a Front Panel Connector
Replacing a Front Panel Connector
Equipment Required
‹
Screwdriver
‹
Connector (see Table 7-14)
‹
De-soldering tool
‹
Soldering iron
‹
Solder
Table 7-14. Front Panel Connectors
Connector
Color
Part Number
US/US2
Blue
212174
UA (TOCO/IUP)
White
212173
FECG
Dark Grey
212175
COMBI (US/FECG)
Blue and Grey
2003692-001
Procedure
7-40
1.
Disconnect the AC adapter from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” on page 7-19.
It is not necessary to disconnect the cables. You only need access to the front
panel connectors.
3.
Follow the instructions for “Replacing the Main Board” on page 7-35. (There is
no need to remove the FECG/IUP Board.)
4.
Remove the six screws from the front-end connector shield.
5.
De-solder the damaged connector and discard.
6.
Solder a new connector in place.
7.
Replace the connector shield, main board, and top cover.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
Servicing the Recorder
Replacing the Printhead
Equipment Required
‹
Phillips screwdriver
‹
Vernier caliper
‹
Printhead (part no. 2000133-001)
Procedure
1.
Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” on page 7-19.
3.
Pry the printhead cable connectors free from the back of the printhead.
4.
Open the recorder drawer.
5.
Remove the four screws (two per side) holding the printhead in place. The
printhead will drop out.
6.
Insert the new printhead, aligning the edges near the ends flush with the support
plate. Secure with the four screws.
7.
Slowly close the drawer observing the roller and printhead. Ensure that the
roller is parallel to the printhead striking the printhead evenly as the drawer
shuts.
8.
Replace the printhead cable.
9.
Verify that there is a slight gap (0.003 in minimum) between the shoulder nut
standoff and the downstop plate (without paper installed). Adjust accordingly.
10. Follow the instructions for “Aligning the Printhead” on page 7-43.
11. Once the recorder prints satisfactorily, secure the monitor top cover in place.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-41
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
Adjusting the Printhead Current
Equipment Required
‹
Phillips screwdriver
‹
Digital voltmeter
‹
30 Ω, 20 W, 5% resistor
Procedure
CAUTION
RECORDER STATUS—Ensure the recorder remains off during
this procedure.
1.
Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” on page 7-19,
including disconnection of the display board cable and the membrane switch
panel cable from the main board.
3.
Disconnect the printhead cable from J1 on the main board.
4.
Locate resistor R562 and potentiometer R507 on the main board.
5.
Attach the leads of the digital voltmeter across R562.
6.
Re-connect the AC adapter cord to the monitor and turn on the monitor.
7.
Measure the voltage across R562 and record the value.
8.
Turn off the monitor.
9.
Attach a 30 Ω (20 W, 5%) resistor across R562.
10. Turn on the monitor.
11. Adjust potentiometer R507 until the voltage across R562 is 0.5 V less than the
voltage recorded in step 5.
12. Turn off the monitor and remove the voltmeter leads and the 30 Ω resistor.
7-42
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
Aligning the Printhead
‹
Equipment Required
‹
Phillips screwdriver
‹
Vernier caliper
Printing a Continuous Test Pattern
1.
Re-connect the AC adapter cord to the monitor.
2.
Access the service setup mode: press and hold the Setup button
hold the blue Power button; release both buttons.
3.
) to change the number in the UA display
Use the Volume buttons ( or
to 100. (On Model 172 Monitors, use the left set of volume controls.)
4.
Press the UA Reference button to activate the FHR display and start printing
the test pattern. See Figure 7-14.
5.
Follow the instructions under “Left/Right Alignment” and “Front/Back
Alignment”.
6.
Press the Setup button
to exit the service setup mode. The monitor
automatically turns to standby.
1.
Follow the instructions for “Adjusting the Printhead Current” on page 7-42.
2.
Print the recorder test pattern. (See “Printing a Continuous Test Pattern”
above.)
3.
Load paper and close the recorder drawer.
4.
Observe the printing quality under the following conditions:
; press and
Front/Back Alignment
5.
Revision C
‹
Press and hold the door toward the rear of the monitor. If the printing
darkens on either side: loosen the four mounting screws; move the
printhead forward slightly on the affected side; then re-tighten the screws.
‹
Pull and hold the drawer forward slightly. If the printing darkens on either
side: loosen the fours mounting screws; move the printhead back slightly
on the affected side; then re-tighten the screws.
Verify that the print quality is satisfactory when the drawer is latched in place.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-43
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
Figure 7-14. Recorder Test Pattern
7-44
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
Left/Right Alignment
1.
Print the continuous recorder test pattern. (See “Printing a Continuous Test
Pattern” above.)
2.
Check the quality of the printed lines. Verify that the horizontal lines print
evenly. Ideally the distance between the right paper guide at the roller and the
first line printed by the test pattern should be 0.490 in which represents a
nominal value. Use a vernier caliper to measure this distance.
3.
Use the Volume buttons
( or
) to align the printhead left or right,
respectively. A number between 0 and 255 shows in the FHR display. The
number increases or decreased as you make adjustments using the Volume
buttons.
IMPORTANT
ACCURACY—A common mistake in the field is to adjust the
printhead so that the first test pattern line prints at 0 mmHg on the
paper, rather than by measuring the nominal distance. This
method is often inaccurate as it does not account for paper
variations.
For best results:
Revision C
‹
Use only GE paper.
‹
Ensure paper is correctly loaded as instructed on page 4-2.
‹
Use a vernier caliper to adjust the printhead to its nominal position.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-45
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
Replacing the Recorder Motor Assembly
Equipment Required
‹
Phillips screwdriver
‹
Motor assembly (part no. 15136A)
Procedure
1.
Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” on page 7-19.
3.
Follow the instructions for “Replacing the Main Board” on page 7-35.
4.
Remove the two screws holding the motor mount in place.
5.
Remove the two screws holding the motor assembly on the motor mount.
Retain the motor mount and all screws.
6.
Install the new motor on the motor mount and tighten both screws.
7.
Position the new motor in place, aligning the motor gear with the roller gear.
Push the motor assembly slightly forward against the roller gear. There should
be a slight clearance between the teeth. Check clearance by rotating the print
roller back and forth. (There should be a slight rotation.)
8.
Secure the motor mount to the main board mounting plate. Tighten both
screws.
9.
Replace and align the printhead by following the instructions on page 7-41 and
page 7-43.
10. Replace the main board and secure all eight mounting screws.
11. Re-connect all cables.
12. Replace the monitor top cover.
Cleaning the Printhead
The thermal printhead heater elements must be cleaned at regular intervals to
remove any accumulated paper dust. The heater elements may be cleaned with
methanol or isopropyl alcohol. Care must be taken to avoid touching the heater
elements with bare hands.
CAUTION
AIR DRY—Allow to air dry completely prior to using the
monitor.
7-46
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
Replacing the Sensor Board
Equipment Required
‹
Phillips screwdriver
‹
Sensor board (part no. 15231)
‹
Sensor board insulator (part no. 2000147-001)
‹
Cable tie, x2 (part no. 608036)
‹
Cable mount adhesive back, x2 (part no. 608030)
Procedure
1.
Remove the AC line cord from the monitor to completely remove power.
2.
Follow the instructions for “Removing the Monitor Top Cover” on page 7-19.
3.
Follow the instructions for “Replacing the Main Board” on page 7-35.
4.
Note the location of the printhead assembly relative to the notches on each side.
This is the nominal location for when it is replaced later. Remove the four
screws from the printhead assembly downstop plate and set aside.
5.
Remove the three screws from the main board mounting plate and slide back
and out to remove.
6.
Remove the two screws holding the drawer microswitch in place.
7.
Snip the sensor board cable tie located on the monitor bottom panel.
8.
Pull the recorder drawer forward slightly.
9.
Snip the cable tie on the back of the recorder drawer.
10. Pull drawer forward and lift out.
CAUTION
LOOSE ROLLERS—The drawer rollers are normally held in
place by the drawer. Take care not to dislodge them while the
drawer is removed.
11. Turn drawer over and peel off the sensor board insulator.
12. Remove the four flathead screws securing the sensor board. Discard the board,
but retain the screws.
13. Insert the new board, secure all four screws, and cover with a new insulated
sheet.
14. Secure the sensor board cable with a cable tie on the back of the recorder
drawer.
15. Align the drawer over the slot, drop down, and slide into place.
16. Pull drawer fully foward to allow slack on the sensor board cable.
17. Secure the sensor board cable with a cable tie on the monitor bottom panel.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-47
Serviceable Assemblies: Servicing the Recorder
18. Replace the microswitch and secure both screws. Make sure the microswitch
clicks when the drawer is closed.
19. Replace the main board mounting plate, pulling the plate forward, parallel with
the roller while tightening the screws.
20. Return the printhead assembly to its original position as noted in
step 4.
21. Replace the main board, re-connect all cables, and replace the monitor top
cover.
22. Check printing and re-align the printhead as necessary. (See “Aligning the
Printhead” on page 7-43.)
7-48
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Serviceable Assemblies: Boot ROM Error Codes
Boot ROM Error Codes
If the error codes in the following table display during the boot process, cycle
power. If the error codes reappear when you power up, phone GE Technical Support
for assistance.
Table 7-15. Boot ROM Error Codes
Error Code
Revision C
Description
E1
Configuration data incorrect for program target
E2
Configuration data checksum error
E3
Boot code CRC error
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
7-49
Serviceable Assemblies: Boot ROM Error Codes
For your notes
7-50
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 8
Peripheral Devices
8
The 170 Series Monitor allows connection to optional peripheral equipment.
This section discusses the following:
Remote Marks Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Telemetry Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
RS-232 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-1
Peripheral Devices: Remote Marks Connectors
Remote Marks Connectors
Remote Mark, Fetal Acoustic Stimulator
This receptacle is provided for connection to a Corometrics Model 146 Fetal
Acoustic Stimulator.
Remote Mark, Remote Event Marker
This receptacle is provided for connection to an optional Corometrics Remote Event
Marker. A Corometrics Remote Event Marker is used to annotate the strip chart
recorder paper with a mark.
The printed mark can be configured as , commonly used to record an “event”; or it
FM
can be configured as
, commonly used as an indication that the mother has
perceived fetal movement. The monitor is factory set with the mark configured as
FM
. Refer to “Customizing the Monitor” on page 4-10 for more information on
selecting the mark. Refer to the instructions accompanying the Remote Event
Marker for more information about using the accessory.
8-2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: Telemetry Connector
Telemetry Connector
This connector is for future interfacing to the receiver of a Corometrics Model 340
Telemetry System.
NOTE: The monitor, receiver, and transmitter must all be turned on.
NOTE: When any telemetry mode is detected (US or TOCO), all equivalent front
panel modes (US, US2, or TOCO) are ignored. You cannot “mix and
match” telemetry and monitor modes.
The telemetry connected annotation
of the strip chart paper:
‹
upon commencement of telemetry monitoring; and
‹
every 30 minutes along with the modes.
The telemetry disconnected annotation
Revision C
is printed on the bottom line of the top grid
is printed on the strip chart paper if:
‹
you unplug the telemetry receiver from the 170 Series Monitor;
‹
you turn off the receiver;
‹
you turn off the transmitter; or
‹
the receiver does not detect any active mode information from the
transmitter.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-3
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
RS-232 Connectors
Two RS-232C serial interface receptacles (RJ-45) allow connecting the 170 Series
Monitor to the following devices:
‹
Critikon Model 1846/1846SX Blood Pressure Monitor
‹
Quantitative Sentinel/Perinatal System
‹
Nellcor N-400 Fetal Pulse Oximeter
‹
115-Compatible Device
Table 8-1 lists the factory default settings for each port. Refer to Customizing the
Monitor on page 4-10 for information on using the service setup mode to change
these settings.
Table 8-1. Communication Default Settings
RS-232 Port
Intended Device
Mode
Baud Rate
1
QS System
HP
1200
2
Critikon Model 1846/1846SX
ext. BP
600
Baud Rate
Select a baud rate that is compatible with the external device. The available settings:
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, and 384,000 bps.
Mode
Select a communications mode compatible with the external device.
HP or HP with Notes
Select HP or HP w/notes for connecting to a Marquette Quantitative/Perinatal
System or another central system that uses the Hewlett Packard communications
protocol. HP mode does not print central station annotations on the fetal monitor
strip chart, whereas HP w/notes does.
Ext. BP
Select ext. BP for connecting to a Critikon Model 1846/1846SX Blood Pressure
Monitor.
8-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Ext. FSpO2
Select ext. FSpO2 for connecting to a Nellcor Fetal Pulse Oximeter.
Factory
The FACTORY mode is reserved for factory testing only.
115 Update
Select for backward-compatibility so the 170 Series Monitor can operate in a
Model 115-compatible communication mode. This mode outputs all available
information and ignores requests from a host computer system.
115 Transmit/Receive
Select for backward-compatibility so the 170 Series Monitor can operate in a
Model 115-compatible communication mode. This mode only outputs data
requested from a host computer system.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-5
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Critikon Model 1846/1846SX
Critikon Model 1846/1846SX Monitors can be interfaced to a 170 Series Monitor to
provide a printout of NBP values on the strip chart paper.
8-6
1.
Refer to Table 8-2 for the appropriate interface cable. Connect one end to an
available RS-232C port (1 or 2) on the 170 Series Monitor; connect the other
end to the serial communications port on the blood pressure monitor. Refer to
the Critikon documentation for information on the name of the connector.
2.
Access the fetal monitor service setup mode and set the baud rate and mode for
the appropriate port to 600 and ext. BP, respectively; then exit the service setup
mode.
3.
Be aware of the following information specific to Critikon monitors:
‹
The clock on the Critikon Modes 1846/1846SX Monitors must be set to
within 10 minutes of the 170 Series Monitor. If the clocks are not within 10
minutes of each other, the time will print with each blood pressure reading.
‹
Due to the storage capabilities of Critikon monitors, it is recommended that
power be cycled at the beginning of each data session. This ensures that
any previously stored data is cleared.
‹
When using STAT mode on a Critikon monitor, the 170 Series Monitor
does not print the time with each reading due to overcrowding on the strip
chart. Instead the time is printed once every three to five minutes.
‹
The Critikon Model 1846SX discards NBP values after 90 minutes.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Quantitative Sentinel/Perinatal System
Through this interface, the 170 Series Monitor outputs FHR and UA data to a central
information such as GE’s Quantitative Sentinel/Perinatal System. Annotations made
at the central station can be optionally printed on the strip chart paper of the 170
Series Monitor as summarized below:
‹
Each message is preceded by a computer icon ( ).
‹
Messages are restricted to a maximum length of
50 characters.
‹
Lower-case letters are converted to upper-case letters.
‹
Non-standard characters are replaced with spaces.
The 170 Series Monitor can be configured with the remote annotation capability
enabled (HP w/notes mode) or disabled (HP mode). The following is an example of a
remote message sent to a 170 Series Monitor from a central information system using
this serial communications protocol:
<SPW> AVERAGE VARIABILITY
where SPW is an example of a physician’s initials.
To connect a central information system:
Revision C
1.
Refer to Table 8-2 for the appropriate interface cable. Connect one end to an
available RS-232C connector (1 or 2) on the 170 Series Monitor; connect the
other end to the wallplate wired to the central information system. For a
Marquette Quantitative Sentinel/Perinatal System: the interface cable is catalog
number (REF) 1376AAO; the corresponding wallplate connector is labeled RS232 COMMUNICATIONS.
2.
Access the monitor’s service setup mode and set the baud rate and mode to either
HP or HP w/notes mode, respectively; then exit the service setup mode.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-7
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Nellcor Puritan Bennett Model N-400
Fetal Pulse Oximeter
Through this interface, FSpO2 readings provided by an NPB Model N-400 are
printed every five minutes on the strip chart paper of the 170 Series Monitor. The
reading is printed in the annotation area between the top and bottom grids. A solid
diamond marker, above the data, marks the time of the reading and identifies the
data source as an external device. The following is an example annotation:
FSpO2 47%
In addition, the FSpO2 data is trended on the bottom grid of the strip chart paper as a
beaded trace. The trend uses a 0-100% scale. Refer to Figure 8-1.
FSpO2 47 %
9:00 US
US2
TOCO
FSpO2 %
100
12
3 CM/MIN
–100% SpO2
75
10
10
8
8
50
6
4
–50%
25
2
0
12
6
4
2
UA 0 mm Hg–0%
kPa
0
Figure 8-1. FSpO2 Data Example
To connect the Model N-400:
1.
Using interface cable catalog number (REF) 1557AAO/BAO: connect one end
to an available RS-232C port on the 170 Series Monitor; connect the other end to
the Serial Communications port on the pulse oximeter.
NOTE: This cable can be used with both 120/2121is and 170 Series Monitors.
Although the 120/2120is uses 6-pin RJ-11 connectors and the 170 uses 8pin RJ-45 connectors, the latter is center keyed to account for this. The 170
uses RJ-45 connectors to provide for future interface features.
2.
8-8
Access the monitor’s service setup mode and set the baud rate to 2400 and the
mode to ext. FSpO2; then exit the service setup mode.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Table 8-2. External Device Summary
External Device
Parameter(s)
170 Series
Baud Rate
170 Series Mode
Interconnect Cable Cat.
No.
Critikon Model 1846/1846SX
NBP
600
ext. BP
1562AAO (1 foot)
1562BAO (6 feet)
Quantitative Sentinel System
Annotations
(optional)
1200
HP or HP w/notes
1558AAO (10 feet)
1558BAO (20 feet)
Nellcor N-400
FSpO2
2400
ext. FSpO2
1557AAO (1 foot)
1557BAO (6 feet)
NOTE: The interface cables can be used with both 120/2120is and 170 Series
Monitors. Although the 120/2120is uses 6-pin RJ-11 connectors and the
170 uses 8-pin RJ-45 connectors, the latter is center keyed to account for
this. The 170 uses RJ-45 connectors to provide for future interface
features.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-9
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Model 115-Compatible Communications Protocols
Two options provide backward-compatibility so that the 170 Series Monitor can
operate in a Model 115-compatible communication mode:
„
115 Update Mode: The 115 Update mode outputs all available information and
ignores requests from a host computer system.
„
115 Transmit/Receive: The 115 Transmit/Receive mode only outputs data
requested from a host computer system.
When the Model 115 Fetal Monitor was released, many customers developed their
own interfaces for communicating with the monitor. Setting the 170 Series Monitor
to one of these communication modes allows these users to use their existing
interfaces with the 170 Series Monitor as well.
The 170 Series Monitor emulates the Corometrics Model 830 Converter’s
implementation of the 115 Communication Protocols. This protocol is named after
the Corometrics Model 115 Fetal Monitor in which it originated.
NOTE: The baud rate must match the external computer; however, the
recommended baud rate is 9600. Lower baud rates may result in some data
loss.
8-10
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
115 Update Mode
All information is transmitted from the 170 Series Monitor as soon as the
information becomes available.
IMPORTANT
DATA REQUESTS—When set to the 115 Update Mode, the 170
Series Monitor will not respond to any requests for information
sent from an external (host) computer.
Heart rate data is transmitted on a quarter second basis. Uterine activity is
transmitted eight times per second. Modes are transmitted once per minute, and
whenever a mode change occurs. Annotation messages are sent as they are entered
from the Annotations window. Event marks are transmitted each time the Mark
button is selected. Fetal movement data is transmitted four times per second.
Recorder status (PAPER OUT) information is transmitted once per second, when
active, until the condition is resolved.
NOTE: Refer to Requested Data Format on page 8-12 for information about the
response data format. The format is the same for both the 115 Update
mode and the 115 Transmit/Receive mode.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-11
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
115 Transmit/Receive Mode
Once a valid request for data is received, the 170 Series Monitor will send only the
information that is requested. The selection of this information is done by sending a
request stream to the 170 Series Monitor. After processing the request, the 170
Series Monitor will then send only the selected parameters to the external computer.
The information selected by the external computer will be transmitted following the
same criteria described for the 115 Update Mode. The requested parameters may be
changed at any time by the host computer by sending a new request sequence.
NOTE: Refer to Requested Data Format on page 8-12 for information about the
response data format. The format is the same for both the 115 Update
mode and the 115 Transmit/Receive mode.
Requested Data Format
The format of the data requested by the external computer from the monitor is
shown in Figure 8-2.
NOTE: This applies to 115 Transmit/Receive mode only.
The definitions of the bytes are as follows:
Monitor Type
This field contains a 1-byte ASCII value indicating the type of monitor from which
information is being requested. The 170 Series Monitor is set to a fixed value of 9
(39H).
Data Field
This field of 1 to 8 bytes indicates which parameters the external computer wishes to
receive. The values for the bytes are given in Table 8-3.
End of Text
This 1-byte field contains the value 03H. If this byte is sent immediately following
the Monitor ID, then the 170 Series Monitor will cancel transmission of all data.
8-12
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Transmitted Data Format
The format of the information transmitted from the 170 Series Monitor to the
external computer is shown in Figure 8-3.
NOTE: This applies to both 115 Update mode and 115 Transmit/Receive mode.
The definitions of the bytes are as follows:
Monitor Type
This field contains a 1-byte ASCII value indicating the type of monitor sending the
information. The 170 Series Monitor is set to a fixed value of 9 (39H).
Response Type
This 1-byte value indicates the type of information being sent from the 170 Series
Monitor as shown in Table 8-3.
Monitor ID
This 1-byte ASCII value indicates the ID number of the monitor information. The
170 Series Monitor sets this byte to a fixed value of 0 (30H).
Data Field
This field of n-bytes contains the actual data sent from the monitor to the external
computer. The contents of this field for each response is given below:
Revision C
„
Event Mark: This data field is empty whenever the monitor’s Mark button is
selected.
„
Heart Rate: This data field contains two or three ASCII characters representing
the value of the heart rate. A value of 00 (30H, 30H) indicates a penlift
condition. Heart rate data (including penlift data) is transmitted four times per
second.
„
Uterine Activity: This data field contains two or three ASCII characters
representing the value of uterine activity. A value of 128 (31H, 32H, 38H)
indicates a penlift condition. Uterine activity data (including penlift data) is
transmitted eight times per second.
„
Modes: This data field contains two ASCII characters indicating the mode.
The first character is the combined mode of both heart rates according to Table
8-4. The second character is the mode for uterine activity as listed in Table 8-5.
Mode data is transmitted at startup, with each mode change, with each request,
and once every minute.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-13
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
„
Fetal Movement: This field contains one ASCII character representing the
current status of the FM signal: low or high. If the data byte is a 0 (30H), then
the signal is low indicating no movement is detected; if the data byte is 1 (31H),
then the signal is high indicating fetal movement is detected. If the fetal
movement feature is not in the monitor, the data byte is 2 (32H). If the fetal
movement feature is present but not enabled, the data byte is 4 (34H). This data
is transmitted four times per second. (Fetal movement detection circuitry is an
option which can be purchased for the 170 Series Monitor.
„
Recorder Status: This field contains one ASCII character representing the
current status of the PAPER OUT* signal: low or high. If the data byte is a 0
(30H), then the signal is low indicating paper is loaded and the recorder door is
closed; if the data byte is 1 (31H), then the signal is high indicating a paper out
condition. This data is transmitted once per second, when active.
End of Text
This 1-byte field contains the value 03H. If this byte is sent immediately following
the Monitor ID, then the 170 Series Monitor will cancel transmission of all data.
Limitations
The only restriction on the information transmitted during either 115
communication mode occurs when the baud rate is set below 4800 baud. Under this
condition, data loss may occur.
NOTE: The recommended baud rate is 9600.
8-14
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Error Conditions
Transmission Errors
Transmission errors may be detected by the external computer as parity errors,
framing errors (no valid stop bit), or invalid characters. There is no facility in the
170 Series Monitor to re-transmit any information found to contain an error. It is
therefore up to the user to decide what action to take as a result of an error.
Request Errors
These errors apply to the 115 Transmit/Receive Mode only.
Request errors are detected by the monitor as parity errors, framing errors, and
invalid Monitor ID. If the monitor fails to respond properly to a request, it is
suggested that the external computer re-transmit a request sequence.
FIRST
DATA FIELD
MONITOR
TYPE
DATA
FIELD(S)
Nth
DATA FIELD
END OF
TEXT
Figure 8-2. Data Request Format—115 Transmit/Receive Mode Only
MONITOR
TYPE
RESPONSE
TYPE
MONITOR
ID
DATA
FIELD
END OF
TEXT
Figure 8-3. Transmitted Data Format
Table 8-3. Response Type and Data Field Type
Revision C
Response Type
ASCII Character
Hexadecimal Value
Heart Rate 1
`
60
Uterine Activity
a
61
Modes
b
62
Event Mark
d
64
Heart Rate 2
e
65
Fetal Movement
f
66
Paper Out
g
67
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-15
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Table 8-4. Heart Rate Modes
HR1 Mode
HR2 Mode
ASCII Character
Hexadecimal Value
INOP
INOP
0
30
FECG
INOP
1
31
US
INOP
2
32
US
FECG
9
39
US
US2
;
3B
FECG
US
<
3C
INOP
US2
>
3E
Table 8-5. Uterine Activity Modes
8-16
UA Mode
ASCII Character
Hexadecimal Value
INOP
0
30
TOCO
1
31
IUP
2
32
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Cabling Information
Monitor RS-232 Connector
The 170 Series Monitor’s RS-232C Ports each use an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, shown
in Figure 8-4.
The following control signals are supported:
„
Request to Send (RTS): This output line is asserted (+12 V) whenever the 170
Series Monitor is on and operating; it can be used to determine whether the
monitor is powered on.
„
Transmit Data (TXD): This output line provides the serial data sent to the
external computer from the 170 Series Monitor.
„
Clear to Send (CTS): This input line must be asserted in order to enable the
transmission of data from the 170 Series Monitor. Under conditions where no
modem is used, the line can be tied to the RTS line of the monitor. If a modem
is used, this line should be tied to the CTS line of the modem.
„
Receive Data (RXD): This input line provides the serial data sent from the
external computer to the 170 Series Monitor.
Standard RS-232C Rules
The following rules must be observed:
„
When a direct connection is made between a 170 Series Monitor and another
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), a standard null-modem cable must be used.
„
When an indirect connection is made, using a modem, a 170 Series Monitor
requires a normal-modem cable.
Cable Distance
The RS-232C Interface supplied with the 170 Series Monitor is capable of operating
over varying distances depending upon the data rate used and whether the cabling is
shielded or unshielded. Refer to the manufacturer’s specifications.
Data Terminal Equipment Cabling
When the 170 Series Monitor is directly connected to another Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) device, a standard null-modem cable is required as shown in
Figure 8-5.
Data Communications Equipment Cabling
When the 170 Series Monitor is connected to a Data Communications Equipment
(DCE) device (a modem), a standard normal-modem cable is required as shown in
Figure 8-6.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-17
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
Table 8-6. RS-232 Connector 1
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
+5V
200 mA Fused
2
RTS
Request to Send Output from Monitor
3
RXD
Receive Data Input to Monitor
4
GND
Signal Ground
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
TXD
Transmit Data Output from Monitor
7
CTS
Clear to Send Input to Monitor
8
+5V
200 mA Fused
Table 8-7. RS-232 Connector 2
Pin Number
Signal Name
Signal Description
1
GND
Signal Ground
2
RTS
Request to Send Output from Monitor
3
RXD
Receive Data Input to Monitor
4
GND
Signal Ground
5
GND
Signal Ground
6
TXD
Transmit Data Output from Monitor
7
CTS
Clear to Send Input to Monitor
8
GND
Signal Ground
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 8-4. RJ-45 Connector (facing the rear panel from the outside)
8-18
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Peripheral Devices: RS-232 Connectors
170 SERIES MONITOR SIDE
8-PIN
DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (DTE) SIDE
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL NAME
25-PIN
9 PIN
6 PIN
6
TXD
TXD
2
3
2
3
RXD
RXD
3
2
5
2
RTS
RTS
4
7
1
7
CTS
CTS
5
8
6
4
GND
5
GND
GND
7
5
3
Figure 8-5. Standard Null-Modem Cable
170 SERIES MONITOR SIDE
8-PIN
SIGNAL NAME
DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (DTE) SIDE
SIGNAL NAME
25-PIN
9 PIN
6 PIN
6
TXD
TXD
2
3
5
3
RXD
RXD
3
2
2
2
RTS*
RTS
4
7
1
7
CTS*
CTS
5
8
6
4
GND
5
GND
GND
7
5
3
Figure 8-6. Standard Normal-Modem Cable
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
8-19
For your notes
8-20
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 9
Maintenance
9
All equipment, no matter how reliable, needs to be maintained on a regular basis.
This chapter describes general care and cleaning instructions for the 170 Series
Monitor and its accessories. If an accessory is not listed, consult the manufacturer’s
instructions.
This chapter describes the following:
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Preventative Maintenance Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-1
Maintenance: Cleaning
Cleaning
CAUTION
PREPARATION—Unplug the monitor from the AC power
source and detach all accessories from the monitor. Do not
immerse accessories in any liquid. Do not use abrasive cloth
or cleaners on monitor or accessories.
Cleaning the Monitor Exterior
To clean the exterior of the monitor, including the displays and the membrane
switch panel:
9-2
1.
Wipe any fluids from the surface of the monitor.
2.
Dampen a cloth or paper towel with isopropyl alcohol and gently rub soiled
area until clean.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Cleaning
Cleaning the Tocotransducer, Ultrasound Transducer, and
Legplate
CAUTIONS
ABRASION—Do not use abrasive cloth, sharp objects, or abrasive
cleaners.
ALCOHOL—Do not use Alcohol in cleaning solutions.
DISCONNECTION—Detach the transducers/cables/legplate from
the monitor.
IMMERSION—Do not immerse transducers/cables/legplate or
hold under running water.
1.
Revision C
Dampen a cloth or paper towel with one of the following products; then wring
out until only slightly wet:
‹
Sodium Hypochlorite 5.25 % (Bleach) diluted 10:1
‹
Cidex
‹
Sporicidin
‹
Soap and water
2.
Rub soiled area until clean, taking care not to excessively wet the tocotransducer
diaphragm seal or the contact surface of the ultrasound transducer.
3.
Use a cloth dampened with water on the contact surface of the ultrasound
transducer and around the seal of the tocotransducer. Do not use a sharp object
which might damage the seal of the tocotransducer.
4.
Dry all accessories with a soft, dry cloth.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-3
Maintenance: Cleaning
Cleaning the UA Strain Gauge
1.
Remove the plastic dome.
2.
If desired, wash the transducer with sterile water or saline solution.
3.
Carefully clean the diaphragm seal with a cotton swab to remove deposits.
Avoid excessive pressure since this may damage the diaphragm. If there are
excessive stains on the diaphragm or sides of the transducer, remove with a
cotton swab and solvents of increasing strength. Do not use pumice, Ajax, Bon
Ami or other abrasives.
4.
After cleaning, rinse the transducer thoroughly in distilled water and replace the
dome loosely.
5.
Dry the transducer with sterile gauze.
CAUTIONS
AUTOCLAVE—Do not autoclave pressure transducer.
IMMERSION—Do not immerse any part of the electrical
connector of the transducer in the cleaning solution at any time.
Examine the outer sheath of the cable for perforations. If the outer
covering is damaged in any way, do not immerse the cable in the
cleaning solution; this may result in moisture entering the
transducer case, which is vented through the cable.
WARNING
LIQUIDS—If liquids enter the electrical connector, check the
resistance between the electrical element and the transducer case.
A resistance level of greater than 10 M¾ ensures that the leakage
current is within acceptable levels for safe use on patients.
6.
Leave transparent dome attached to the transducer during storage, but slacken the
locking ring at least one quarter of a turn.
CAUTION
STERILIZATION—Prior to patient use, ensure the dome is sterile.
9-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Equipment Required
‹
Digital Multimeter
‹
Dielectric Tester
‹
Leakage Current Tester
‹
Aluminum Foil
‹
Ultrasound Test Body
(ultrasound transducer wrapped in aluminum foil)
‹
Tocotransducer Test Body
(tocotransducer wrapped in aluminum foil)
‹
FECG Test Body for Model 173 or 174 only
(Shorted legplate with all three leads tied together)
‹
IUP Test Body for Model 173 or 174 only
(SensorTip transducer wrapped in aluminum foil)
‹
Anti-Static Wristband
‹
Static-Fee Work Surface
‹
170 Series Operator’s Manual
Visual Inspection
Inspect the following for excess wear and/or signs of damage:
… Power Supply Cord
… AC-to-DC Converter
… AC Line Cord
… Ultrasound Transducer(s)
… Legplate(s)
… IUPC Transducer(s)
… Remote Event Marker
… Monitor Input Receptacles
… Chassis
… Membrane Switch Panel
… Internal Harnesses/Connectors
… Display Panel
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-5
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Cleaning
… Clean the monitor’s exterior. Refer to “Cleaning the Monitor Exterior” on
page 9-2.
… Clean the recorder printhead. Refer to “Cleaning the Printhead” on page 746.
… Clean the monitor’s accessories. Refer to “Cleaning the Tocotransducer,
Ultrasound Transducer, and Legplate” on page 9-3.
… Clean the monitor’s interior using a hand-held vacuum.
Calibration
… Adjust the printhead. Refer to “Aligning the Printhead” on page 7-43.
… Calibrate the tocotransducer(s). Refer to “Tocotransducer Calibration” on
page 7-20.
9-6
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Electrical Safety Tests
Electrical safety tests provide a method of determining if potential electrical hazards
to the patient or operator of the device exist.
Recommendations
GE recommends that you perform all safety tests presented in this chapter:
‹
upon receipt of the device (monitor and its associated equipment)
‹
every twelve months thereafter
‹
each time the main enclosure is disassembled or a circuit board is removed,
tested, repaired, or replaced, and
‹
record the date and results in a Maintenance Repair Log.
These instructions are intended for every component in the system.
WARNING
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE—Failure to implement a
satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment
failure and possible health hazards. Unless you have an Equipment
Maintenance Contract, GE does not in any manner assume the
responsibility for performing the recommended maintenance
procedures. The sole responsibility rests with the individual or
institution using the equipment. GE service personnel may, at their
discretion, follow the procedures provided in this manual as a guide
during visits to the equipment site.
Test Conditions
Electrical safety tests may be performed under normal ambient conditions of
temperature, humidity, and pressure.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-7
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Unit to Primary Leakage
1.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a unit AC line leakage test.
2.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
3.
Verify the following:
… <300 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
4.
Record the primary leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-1. Unit to Primary Leakage Conditions
Neutral
9-8
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Reversed
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Ground Leakage for US
1.
Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel US input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-2. Patient-to-Ground Leakage Conditions for US
Neutral
Revision C
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Reversed
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-9
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Line Leakage for US
1.
Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel US input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-3. Patient-to-Line Leakage Conditions for US
Neutral
9-10
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Ground Leakage for US2
1.
Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel US2 input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-4. Patient-to-Ground Leakage Conditions for US2
Neutral
Revision C
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Reversed
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-11
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Line Leakage for US2
1.
Connect an ultrasound test body to the monitor’s front panel US2 input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-5. Patient-to-Line Leakage Conditions for US2
Neutral
9-12
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Ground Leakage for TOCO
1.
Connect a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s front panel UA input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-6. Patient-to-Ground Leakage Conditions for TOCO
Neutral
Revision C
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Reversed
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-13
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Line Leakage for TOCO
1.
Connect a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s front panel UA input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-7. Patient-to-Line Leakage Conditions for TOCO
Neutral
9-14
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Ground Leakage for IUP
1.
Connect an IUP test body to the monitor’s front panel UA input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-8. Patient-to-Ground Leakage Conditions for IUP
Neutral
Revision C
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Reversed
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-15
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Line Leakage for IUP
1.
Connect an IUP test body to the monitor’s front panel UA input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-9. Patient-to-Line Leakage Conditions for IUP
Neutral
9-16
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Ground Leakage for FECG
1.
Connect an FECG test body to the monitor’s front panel FECG input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a patient leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-ground leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-10. Patient-to-Ground Leakage Conditions for FECG
Neutral
Revision C
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Open
__________ Reversed
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-17
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Line Leakage for FECG
1.
Connect a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s front panel FECG input.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform a line leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
… <50 µA
(132–253 VAC, or at the line voltage at your facility +10%)
5.
Record the patient-to-line leakage for the following conditions:
Table 9-11. Patient-to-Line Leakage Conditions for FECG
Neutral
Ground
Power (Polarity)
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Closed
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Normal
__________ Open
__________ Closed
__________ Reversed
Enclosure Leakage
1.
Wrap the entire monitor enclosure in aluminum foil.
2.
Configure a leakage tester to perform an enclosure leakage test.
3.
Turn ON the monitor using the monitor’s On/Standby button.
4.
Verify the following:
‹
Normal, 0.1 mA
… pass
‹
Single Fault, 0.5 mA
… pass
9-18
… fail
… fail
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Dielectric (Hi-Pot) Tests
CAUTION
POWER OFF—Turn OFF the 170 Series Monitor prior to
performing any of the hi-pot tests.
Patient–to–AC-Line Using DC Voltage for One Minute
NOTE: The hi-pot tester voltage is 5.656 kVdc for these tests.
US
Attach an US test body to the monitor’s front panel US input. Connect from the foil to
line.
… pass
… fail
US2
Attach an US test body to the monitor’s front panel US2 input. Connect from the foil
to line.
… pass
… fail
TOCO
Attach a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s UA input. Connect from foil to line.
… pass
… fail
IUP
Attach an IUP test body to the monitor’s front panel UA input. Connect from foil to
line.
… pass
… fail
FECG
Attach an FECG test body to the monitor’s front panel FECG input. Connect from the
leads to line.
… pass
Revision C
… fail
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-19
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Patient-to-Chassis Using AC Voltage for One Minute
NOTE: The hi-pot tester voltage is 2.5 kVAC for these tests.
IMPORTANT
ENCLOSURE—Wrap the entire monitor enclosure in aluminum
foil for these tests.
US
Attach an US test body to the monitor’s front panel US input. Connect from the test
body foil to the enclosure foil.
… pass
… fail
US2
Attach an US test body to the monitor’s front panel US2 input. Connect from the test
body foil to the enclosure foil.
… pass
… fail
TOCO
Attach a tocotransducer test body to the monitor’s UA input. Connect from the test
body foil to the enclosure foil.
… pass
… fail
IUP
Attach an IUP test body to the monitor’s front panel UA input. Connect from the test
body foil to the enclosure foil.
… pass
… fail
FECG
Attach an FECG test body to the monitor’s front panel FECG input. Connect from the
test body leads to the enclosure foil.
… pass
9-20
… fail
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Maintenance: Preventative Maintenance Inspection
Mains-to-Chassis Using DC Voltage for One Minute
NOTE: The hi-pot tester voltage is 5.656 kVdc for these tests.
IMPORTANT
ENCLOSURE—Wrap the entire monitor enclosure in aluminum
foil for these tests.
Connect from line to enclosure foil.
… pass
… fail
Conductive Parts Isolated from Live Parts and Enclosure Using DC Voltage for
One Minute
NOTE: The hi-pot tester voltage is 2.83 kVdc for these tests.
IMPORTANT
ENCLOSURE—Wrap the entire monitor enclosure in aluminum
foil, avoiding the rear panel connector area, for these tests.
Telemetry Connector
Connect from the telemetry connector metal shell to enclosure foil.
… pass
… fail
Power Entry Connector
Connect from the power entry connector metal shell to enclosure foil.
… pass
Revision C
… fail
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
9-21
For your notes
9-22
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 10
Specifications
10
This section contains a detailed list of the technical specifications for the 170 Series
Monitor.
This chapter lists specifications for the following:
General Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Strip Chart Recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
10-1
Specifications: General Monitor
General Monitor
Table 10-1. General Monitor Technical Specifications
Category
!
!
Technical Specifications
Power Requirements
Nominal Line Voltage:
Line Frequency:
Power Consumption (maximum):
Monitor DC Input:
100–230 VAC
50/60 Hz (operates over 47–63 Hz)
≤30 VA
12 Vdc at 2.5 A
Physical Characteristics
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
5.75 in (14.6 cm)
16.75 in (42.5 cm)
10.0 in (25.4 cm)
8 lbs (3.6 kg) approx.
Environmental Conditions
Monitor:
Ambient Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Strip Chart Papera:
Ambient Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
Certification
UL-2601.1:
CUL:
a
10-2
Operating
Storage
50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C)
10% to 75%, non-condensing
14°F to 131°F (–10°C to 55°C)
10% to 90%, non-condensing
50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C)
30% to 70%, non-condensing
< 80°F (< 26.5°C)
45% to 65%, non-condensing
Designed to meet UL-2601.1
Medical electrical equipment classified by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc., with respect to
fire, shock, and mechanical hazards in accordance with UL-2601.1.
Classified with respect to electric shock, fire, mechanical, and other specified hazards
only, in accordance with CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1
Paper operating environmental conditions are for a period of less than one month. Paper storage environmental conditions are for extended storage.
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Specifications: Operating Modes
Operating Modes
Table 10-2. Operating Mode Specifications
FECG Mode
Technique:
Heart Rate Counting Range:
Heart Rate Resolution:
Artifact Elimination:
Countable Input Signal Range:
Offset Voltage Tolerance (Differential):
Maximum Common Mode Voltage:
Preamplifier Bandwidth:
Common Mode Rejection:
Balanced:
Unbalanced 5kΩ RA or LA:
Input Equivalent Noise:
Input Impedance:
Differential:
Common Mode:
Mains Frequency Rejection:
Leakage Current:
Isolation, Mains-to-Patient:
Ultrasound Mode
Technique:
Transducer Type:
Pulse Repetition Frequency:
Pulse Duration:
Transmitter Frequency:
Spatial-Average Temporal Average
Intensity:
Focal 20 dB Beam Area:
Peak Instantaneous Intensity:
Peak-Negative Acoustic Pressure:
Heart Rate Counting Range:
Leakage Current:
Uterine Activity Mode
Range:
Resolution:
Bandwidth:
Excitation Voltage:
Zero Set Temperature Drift:
Leakage Current:
Revision C
Peak detecting, beat-to-beat cardiotachometer
30–240 BPM
±1 BPM
Selectable, ±25 BPM artifact rejection
15 µV to 2 mV peak-to-peak
±300 mVdc maximum
20 V peak-to-peak
1–100 Hz
> 120 dB at mains frequency, with patient cable
> 110 dB at mains frequency
< 10 µV peak-to-peak
> 10 MΩ
> 20 MΩ
> 40 dB
< 60 µA at 254 VAC, electrically isolated
> 4 kVAC
Pulsed Doppler with autocorrelation processing
9-crystal
2 kHz (all modes)
92 µs
1.151 MHz
Isata < 5 mW/cm2
16.6 cm2, at a range = 7 cm
1.8 mW/cm2
p < 10.0 kPa
50–210 BPM
Complies with IEC 601.1 and/or IEC 601.1.1 harmonized national standard
Strain Gauge
Tocotransducer
0–100 mmHg
0–100 relative units
1 mmHg
1 relative unit
dc to 3Hz
dc to 0.5 Hz
+4.0 Vdc
< 0.1 mmHg/°C (0.013 kPa/°C), excluding transducer
Complies with IEC 601.1 and/or IEC 601.1.1 harmonized national standard
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
10-3
Specifications: Strip Chart Recorder
Strip Chart Recorder
Table 10-3. Strip Chart Recorder Technical Specifications
Heart Rate Scale
Chart Width:
Scaling:
Range:
Resolution:
Domestic
International
7 cm
30 BPM/cm
30–240 BPM
1 BPM
8 cm
20 BPM/cm
50–210 BPM
1 BPM
Uterine Activity Scale
Chart Width:
Scaling:
Range:
Resolution:
Strain Gauge
4 cm
25 mmHg/cm
0–100 mmHg
1 mmHg
Tocotransducer
4 cm
25 relative units/cm
0–100 relative units
1 relative unit
Recorder Drive
Speeds:
Speed Accuracy:
1, 2, and 3 cm/min
±1 %
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
10-4
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Chapter 11
Parts Lists
11
This chapter of the manual provides parts lists and block diagrams.
NOTE: GE makes every effort possible to provide the most up-to-date reference
documentation for your Corometrics equipment. However, in special cases
involving field-installed upgrades, a drawing or parts list in this manual
may not reflect the revision level of your unit’s subassemblies. When
discrepancies are found, contact the GE Service Department at one of the
numbers found on the back cover of this manual.
Revision C
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
11-1
Parts Lists: 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly
2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly
Table 11-1. Model 171 Final Assembly, 200268-188
11-2
Item
Number
Part Number
1
2000281-001
2
15451AA
3
140173
4
Description
Qty
ENCL BOTTOM SHIELDED 170 SERIES
1
COVER SPEAKER
1
FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H
4
15222AA
BRG DRAWER
2
5
15212AA
PIN BEARING-170
2
6
15200A
ASSY ROLLER
1
7
250096
BEARING,FLANGED,.187 BORE
2
8
11717AA
ROLLER GEAR-120REC
1
9
15207A
ASSY DRAWER, WELDED
1
10
15224AA
SPACER DRAWER
1
11
15223AA
PLASTIC 9 CM PARTITION
1
12
15231A
ASSY PCB SENSOR BOARD
1
13
2000147-001
SENSOR INSULATOR 170 SERIES
1
14
250099
SPRING COMPRESSION,.24 OD,,.38L
1
15
2000222-001
SPRING CPRSN .3 OD .022WIRE SS
2
16
15136A
MOTOR STEPPER ASSY
1
17
15202AA
MOUNT MOTOR
1
18
15201AA
PLATE PC MOUNTING
1
19
2000133-001
PRINTHEAD 8 DOTS/MM 216MM WIDE
1
20
15203AA
PLATE HEAD MOUNTING
1
21
2000223-001
SPRING CPRSN .56L .240 OD
.024 WIRE
2
22
15204AA
BRACKET HEADSTOP
1
23
280201
STANDOFF,1/4HEX,1/8SL,4-4,0 THD
2
24
281501
NUT,HEX,4-40,5/64 X 1/4
2
25
2000234-001
CABLE ASSY RIBBON RECORDER
170 SERIES
1
26
2000235-001
CABLE ASSY SPEAKER WIRE
170 SERIES
1
27
2000146-001
CLIP GROUND
2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Parts Lists: 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly
Table 11-1. Model 171 Final Assembly, 200268-188 (Continued)
Revision C
Item
Number
Part Number
28
2000243-004
29
Description
Qty
PCB MAIN SINGLE
U/S COMPLETE
1
284105
SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM
7
30
284072
SCR 4-40 PH 5/16L PHL LL STRIP
29
31
284285
SCR 4-40 FH UNDERCUT 3/16
PHIL 2PS NYLON PATCH
4
32
289516
SCR M3X5 PH PHIL ZP
W/NYLOK PATCH
4
33
2000220-001
SCR PH #2 1/2L PHIL ZPS PLASTITE
2
34
2000221-001
SCR #4 PH 1/4L TYPE F PHIL ZPS
4
35
2000142-001
SPRING FRONT GROUND
1
36
15301A
ASSY PCB DISPLAY BOARD
1
37
15461AA
GASKET REAR PANEL
1
38
15453CA
PAD PRINT,TOP COVER-MODEL175
1
39
15323BA
KYBD MEMBRANE US1
1
40
15324BA
LABEL DISPLAY OVERLAY US1
1
41
14943AA
CLIP, SPEAKER,
2
42
2000178-001
PLUG CALL LIGHT
1
43
2000359-001
STANDOFF M-F 440 1IN LG ALUM
1
44
2000246-001
PLUG TELEMETRY
1
45
2000186-001
PLUG NICOLAY CONN
1
46
2000240-001
LABEL CUSTOM REAR PANEL
OVERLAYS 170
1
47
284031
SCR 4-40 BH 1/4 LG SLTD N YLON
2
49
608030
CABLE MOUNT ADHESIVE BACK
2
50
608036
TYRAPS CABLE TIES
2
51
7714AAT
POWER SUPPLY 12V 30W
EXTERNAL SUPPLY
1
52
600028
ASSY LINE CORD IEC
1
55
2000890-001
PACKAGING RIGHT CAP 170 SERIES
1
56
2000891-001
PACKAGING LEFT CAP 170 SERIES
1
57
2000892-001
PACKAGING BOXES 170 SERIES
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
11-3
Parts Lists: 2000268-188, Model 171 Final Assembly
Table 11-1. Model 171 Final Assembly, 200268-188 (Continued)
11-4
Item
Number
Part Number
58
2000893-001
59
Description
Qty
PACKAGING SLOTTED TRAY
170 SERIES
1
13984AA
LBL PACKING LIST 340
1
60
2000555-001
SHLD SPEAKER - 170
1
61
410066
POLY BAG 23X26X.006
1
62
410097
TAPE SHIPPING 3IN WIDE
4
63
4281CA
LBL SERIAL# UL APPV’D-155
1
64
4281DA
LABEL C-UL HAZZARD TAG120 SERIES
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Parts Lists: 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly
2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly
Table 11-2. Model 172 Final Assembly, 2000268-189
Revision C
Item
Number
Part Number
1
2000281-001
2
15451AA
3
140173
4
Description
Qty
ENCL BOTTOM SHIELDED 170 SERIES
1
COVER SPEAKER
1
FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H
4
15222AA
BRG DRAWER
2
5
15212AA
PIN BEARING-170
2
6
15200A
ASSY ROLLER
1
7
250096
BEARING FLANGED .187 BORE
2
8
11717AA
ROLLER GEAR-120REC
1
9
15207A
ASSY DRAWER WELDED
1
10
15224AA
SPACER DRAWER
1
11
15223AA
PLASTIC 9 CM PARTITION
1
12
15231A
ASSY PCB SENSOR BOARD
1
13
2000147-001
SENSOR INSULATOR 170 SERIES
1
14
250099
SPRING COMPRESSION .24 OD .38L
1
15
2000222-001
SPRING CPRSN .3 OD .022WIRE SS
2
16
15136A
MOTOR STEPPER ASSY
1
17
15202AA
MOUNT MOTOR
1
18
15201AA
PLATE PC MOUNTING
1
19
2000133-001
PRINTHEAD 8 DOTS/MM 216MM WIDE
1
20
15203AA
PLATE HEAD MOUNTING
1
21
2000223-001
SPRING CPRSN .56L .240 OD
.024 WIRE
2
22
15204AA
BRACKET HEADSTOP
1
23
280201
STANDOFF 1/4HEX 1/8SL 4-4 0 THD
2
24
281501
NUT HEX 4-40 5/64 X 1/4
2
25
2000234-001
CABLE ASSY RIBBON RECORDER
170 SERIES
1
26
2000235-001
CABLE ASSY SPEAKER WIRE
170 SERIES
1
27
2000146-001
CLIP GROUND
2
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
11-5
Parts Lists: 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly
Table 11-2. Model 172 Final Assembly, 2000268-189 (Continued)
11-6
Item
Number
Part Number
28
15269E
PCB ASSY MAIN PCB
DUAL US COMP
1
29
284105
SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM
7
30
284072
SCR 4-40 PH 5/16L PHL LL STRIP
29
31
284285
SCR 4-40 FH UNDERCUT 3/16 PHIL 2PS
NYLON PATCH
4
32
289516
SCR M3X5 PH PHIL ZP
W/NYLOK PATCH
4
33
2000220-001
SCR PH #2 1/2L PHIL ZPS PLASTITE
2
34
2000221-001
SCR #4 PH 1/4L TYPE F PHIL ZPS
6
35
2000142-001
SPRING FRONT GROUND
1
36
15301A
ASSY PCB DISPLAY BOARD
1
37
15461AA
GASKET REAR PANEL
1
38
15453AA
PAD PRINT TOP COVER-MODEL 170
1
39
15323AA
KYBD MEMBRANE US2
1
40
15324AA
LABEL DISPLAY OVERLAY US2
1
41
14943AA
CLIP SPEAKER
2
42
2000178-001
PLUG CALL LIGHT
1
43
2000359-001
STANDOFF M-F 440 1IN LG ALUM
1
44
2000246-001
PLUG TELEMETRY
1
46
2000240-001
LABEL CUSTOM REAR PANEL
OVERLAYS 170
1
47
284031
SCR 4-40 BH 1/4 LG SLTD N YLON
2
49
608030
CABLE MOUNT ADHESIVE BACK
2
50
608036
TYRAPS CABLE TIES
2
51
7714AAT
POWER SUPPLY 12V 30W
EXTERNAL SUPPLY
1
52
600028
ASSY LINE CORD IEC
1
55
2000890-001
PACKAGING RIGHT CAP 170 SERIES
1
56
2000891-001
PACKAGING LEFT CAP 170 SERIES
1
57
2000892-001
PACKAGING BOXES 170 SERIES
1
58
2000893-001
PACKAGING SLOTTED TRAY
170 SERIES
1
Description
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
Revision C
Parts Lists: 2000268-189, Model 172 Final Assembly
Table 11-2. Model 172 Final Assembly, 2000268-189 (Continued)
Revision C
Item
Number
Part Number
59
13984AA
LBL PACKING LIST 340
60
2000555-001
SHLD SPEAKER - 170
61
410066
POLY BAG 23X26X.006
1
62
410097
TAPE SHIPPING 3IN WIDE
4
63
4281CA
LBL SERIAL# UL APPV’D-155
1
64
4281DA
LABEL C-UL HAZZARD TAG120 SERIES
1
Description
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
.0001
1
11-7
Parts Lists: 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly
2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly
Table 11-3. Model 173 Final Assembly, 2001972-037
11-8
Find Num
Item Number
1
2007385-001
2
15451AA
3
140173
4
Item Description
Qty
ENCL ,BOTTOM, SHIELDED-170 SERIES
1
COVER SPEAKER
1
FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H
4
15222AA
BRG DRAWER
2
5
15212AA
PIN BEARING-170
2
6
15200A
ASSY ROLLER
1
7
250096
BEARING,FLANGED,.187 BORE,
2
8
11717AA
ROLLER GEAR-120REC,
1
9
15207A
ASSY DRAWER, WELDED
1
10
15224AA
SPACER DRAWER
1
11
15223AA
PLASTIC 9 CM PARTITION
1
12
15231A
ASSY PCB SENSOR BOARD
1
13
2000147-001
SENSOR INSULATOR 170 SERIES
1
14
250099
SPRING COMPRESSION,.24 OD,,.38L
1
15
2000222-001
SPRING CPRSN .3 OD .022WIRE SS
2
16
15136A
MOTOR STEPPER ASSY
1
17
15202AA
MOUNT MOTOR
1
18
15201AA
PLATE PC MOUNTING
1
19
2000133-001
PRINTHEAD 8 DOTS/MM 216MM WIDE
1
20
15203AA
PLATE HEAD MOUNTING
1
21
2000223-001
SPRING CPRSN .56L .240 OD .024 WIRE
2
22
15204AA
BRACKET HEADSTOP
1
23
2002433-001
STANDOFF 1/4 HEX SWAGE 4-40
2
24
281501
NUT,HEX,4-40,3/32 X 1/4
2
25
2000234-001
CABLE ASSY RIBBON RECORDER 170
SERIES
1
26
2000235-001
CABLE ASSY SPEAKER WIRE 170 SERIES
1
27
2000146-001
CLIP GROUND
2
28
2000324-007
PCB ASSY MAIN FECG/PRS COMP V3.20173
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
Parts Lists: 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly
Table 11-3. Model 173 Final Assembly, 2001972-037 (Continued)
Revision C
Find Num
Item Number
Item Description
29
284105
SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM
7
30
284072
SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,PHL,LL,STRIP
33
31
284285
SCR,4-40,FH UNDERCUT 3/16,PHIL 2PS
NYLON PATCH
4
32
289516
SCR,M3X5,PH,PHIL,ZP,W/NYLOK PATCH
4
33
2000220-001
SCR PH #2 ,1/2L PHIL ZPS PLASTITE
2
34
2000221-001
SCR #4 PH 1/4L TYPE F PHIL ZPS
2
35
2001894-001
SPRING FRONT GROUND-173
1
36
15301A
ASSY PCB DISPLAY BOARD
1
37
15461AA
GASKET REAR PANEL
1
38
2004993-002
PAD PRINT,TOP COVER, MODEL 173
1
39
15323AA
KYBD MEMBRANE US2
1
40
15324CA
LABEL DISPLAY OVERLAY FECG MODEL
173
1
41
14943AA
CLIP, SPEAKER, ACCESS HOME MONITOR
2
42
2000178-001
PLUG CALL LIGHT
1
43
2000359-001
STANDOFF M-F 440 1IN LG ALUM
1
44
2000246-001
PLUG TELEMETRY
1
45
15287AP
PCB ASSY FECG/UA BOARD-PURCH
1
46
2003930-001
LABEL REAR PANEL 170 SERIES
1
47
284031
SCR,4-40,BH,1/4 LG,SLTD,N,YLON
2
49
608030
CABLE MOUNT,ADHESIVE BACK,
2
50
608036
TYRAPS,CABLE TIES
2
51
7714AAT
POWER SUPPLY 12V 30W EXTERNAL
SUPPLY
1
55
2000890-001
PACKAGING RIGHT CAP, 170 SERIES
1
56
2000891-001
PACKAGING LEFT CAP, 170 SERIES
1
57
2000892-001
PACKAGING BOXES , 170 SERIES
1
58
2000893-001
PACKAGING SLOTTED TRAY, 170 SERIES
1
59
410010
PACKING LIST ENVELOPES,
1
60
2000555-001
SHLD SPEAKER - 170
1
61
410066
POLY BAG 23X26X.006,
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
11-9
Parts Lists: 2001972-037, Model 173 Final Assembly
Table 11-3. Model 173 Final Assembly, 2001972-037 (Continued)
11-10
Find Num
Item Number
Item Description
62
410097
TAPE,SHIPPING,3IN WIDE,
4
63
4281DA
LABEL,C-UL HAZZARD TAG120,SERIES
1
64
4281EA
LABEL SERIAL NUMBER, UL & MODEL
NUMBER
1
65
408230-008
LABEL CE MARK
1
66
160019
SEALANT MED BLUE,
0
67
2000741-001
LABEL TRANS & STOR COND 170 SERIES
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
Revision C
Parts Lists: 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly
2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly
Table 11-4. Model 174 Final Assembly, 2001972-038
Revision C
Find Num
Item Number
1
2007385-001
2
15451AA
3
140173
4
Item Description
Qty
ENCL ,BOTTOM, SHIELDED-170 SERIES
1
COVER SPEAKER
1
FOOT RUBBER .50D .26H
4
15222AA
BRG DRAWER
2
5
15212AA
PIN BEARING-170
2
6
15200A
ASSY ROLLER
1
7
250096
BEARING,FLANGED,.187 BORE,
2
8
11717AA
ROLLER GEAR-120REC,
1
9
15207A
ASSY DRAWER, WELDED
1
10
15224AA
SPACER DRAWER
1
11
15223AA
PLASTIC 9 CM PARTITION
1
12
15231A
ASSY PCB SENSOR BOARD
1
13
2000147-001
SENSOR INSULATOR 170 SERIES
1
14
250099
SPRING COMPRESSION,.24 OD,,.38L
1
15
2000222-001
SPRING CPRSN .3 OD .022WIRE SS
2
16
15136A
MOTOR STEPPER ASSY
1
17
15202AA
MOUNT MOTOR
1
18
15201AA
PLATE PC MOUNTING
1
19
2000133-001
PRINTHEAD 8 DOTS/MM 216MM WIDE
1
20
15203AA
PLATE HEAD MOUNTING
1
21
2000223-001
SPRING CPRSN .56L .240 OD .024 WIRE
2
22
15204AA
BRACKET HEADSTOP
1
23
2002433-001
STANDOFF 1/4 HEX SWAGE 4-40
2
24
281501
NUT,HEX,4-40,3/32 X 1/4
2
25
2000234-001
CABLE ASSY RIBBON RECORDER 170
SERIES
1
26
2000235-001
CABLE ASSY SPEAKER WIRE 170 SERIES
1
27
2000146-001
CLIP GROUND
2
28
2000973-005
PCB ASSY MAIN FECG/PRS DUAL U/S-174
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
11-11
Parts Lists: 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly
Table 11-4. Model 174 Final Assembly, 2001972-038 (Continued)
11-12
Find Num
Item Number
Item Description
29
284105
SCREW #4 PH 1/4L THD FORM
7
30
284072
SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,PHL,LL,STRIP
33
31
284285
SCR,4-40,FH UNDERCUT 3/16,PHIL 2PS
NYLON PATCH
4
32
289516
SCR,M3X5,PH,PHIL,ZP,W/NYLOK PATCH
4
33
2000220-001
SCR PH #2 ,1/2L PHIL ZPS PLASTITE
2
34
2000221-001
SCR #4 PH 1/4L TYPE F PHIL ZPS
2
35
2001894-001
SPRING FRONT GROUND-173
1
36
15301A
ASSY PCB DISPLAY BOARD
1
37
15461AA
GASKET REAR PANEL
1
38
2004993-004
PAD PRINT,TOP COVER, MODEL 174
1
39
15323AA
KYBD MEMBRANE US2
1
40
15324DA
LABEL DISPLAY OVERLAY FECG MODEL
174
1
41
14943AA
CLIP, SPEAKER, ACCESS HOME MONITOR
2
42
2000178-001
PLUG CALL LIGHT
1
43
2000359-001
STANDOFF M-F 440 1IN LG ALUM
1
44
2000246-001
PLUG TELEMETRY
1
45
2000952-001
PCB DUAL U/S FECG-174
1
46
2003930-001
LABEL REAR PANEL 170 SERIES
1
47
284031
SCR,4-40,BH,1/4 LG,SLTD,N,YLON
2
49
608030
CABLE MOUNT,ADHESIVE BACK,
2
50
608036
TYRAPS,CABLE TIES
2
51
7714AAT
POWER SUPPLY 12V 30W EXTERNAL
SUPPLY
1
55
2000890-001
PACKAGING RIGHT CAP, 170 SERIES
1
56
2000891-001
PACKAGING LEFT CAP, 170 SERIES
1
57
2000892-001
PACKAGING BOXES , 170 SERIES
1
58
2000893-001
PACKAGING SLOTTED TRAY, 170 SERIES
1
59
410010
PACKING LIST ENVELOPES,
1
60
2000555-001
SHLD SPEAKER - 170
1
61
410066
POLY BAG 23X26X.006,
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
Revision C
Parts Lists: 2001972-038, Model 174 Final Assembly
Table 11-4. Model 174 Final Assembly, 2001972-038 (Continued)
Revision C
Find Num
Item Number
Item Description
62
410097
TAPE,SHIPPING,3IN WIDE,
4
63
4281DA
LABEL,C-UL HAZZARD TAG120,SERIES
1
64
4281EA
LABEL SERIAL NUMBER, UL & MODEL
NUMBER
1
65
408230-008
LABEL CE MARK
1
66
160019
SEALANT MED BLUE,
0
67
2000741-001
LABEL TRANS & STOR COND 170 SERIES
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
11-13
Parts Lists: 2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotranducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotranducer
Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
Table 11-5. 2264AAX, Button-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
11-14
Find
Num
Item Number
1
14894A
TOCO CBL ASSY OB 5' LG,WATERTIGHT
1
4
15079AA
MARKING CASE BUTTON TOP-TOCO,WATERTIGHT
1
6
14790B
CASE BOTTOM ASSY TOCO OB,WATERTIGHT
1
7
14594AA
FLAT SEAL TOCO U/S WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
8
14640AA
CABLE MOUNTING NUT TOCO US WATERTIGHT
1
9
284106
SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,W/SEAL,PHIL,SS,LL
5
10
14638AA
SCREW CAP WATERTIGHT
4
11
15254AA
SCREW CAP FLAT MARING,WATERTIGHT SCUCERS
1
12
7529DA
KNOB,TOCO-KNOB TOP XDCR K,IT116
1
13
281260
SCR SET 2-56 1/8L OVAL PT SS
1
17
8974AA
ABD STRAP-BUTTON STYLE BE,LT
1
18
14855AA
WARNING TAG CABLES WATERTIGHT
1
19
13658FA
LBL,CE,CAUTION IP68,WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
20
440011
LABEL,2.25X.75,SELF-LAM,WHITE
1
21
4991AA
ACC PACKER,
1
22
410069
PACK MATERIAL ST
1
23
410112
BAG,AIRCAP, 6 X 8-1/2,
1
24
15264AA
SHIPPING LBL, 2264AAX WATERTIGHT XDUCERS
1
30
13434AA
LBL,SHIP CRTN CE MARK-VAR,
1
31
160034
LOCTITE,SUPERBONDE,
0
32
162004
OIL,SILICONE,3ML TUBE,
0
Item Description
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
Revision C
Parts Lists: 5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound
Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
Table 11-6. 5700GAX, Button-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
Revision C
Find
Num
Item Number
1
14895A
U/S CBL ASSY 5' OB,WATERTIGHT
1
4
15081AA
MARKING,CASE BUTTON TOP U/S,WATERTIGHT
1
6
14791A
CASE BOTTOM ASSY U/S,WATERTIGHT
1
7
14594AA
FLAT SEAL TOCO U/S WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
8
14640AA
CABLE MOUNTING NUT TOCO US WATERTIGHT
1
9
284106
SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,W/SEAL,PHIL,SS,LL
5
10
2008660-001
SCR CAP, TOCO, U/S
4
11
15254AA
SCREW CAP FLAT MARING,WATERTIGHT SCUCERS
1
12
7529EA
KNOB TOP, NAUTILUS WATERTIGHT TOCO
1
13
281260
SCR SET 2-56 1/8L OVAL PT SS
1
17
8974AA
ABD STRAP-BUTTON STYLE BE,LT
1
18
14855AA
WARNING TAG CABLES WATERTIGHT
1
19
13658FA
LBL,CE,CAUTION IP68,WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
20
440011
LABEL,2.25X.75,SELF-LAM,WHITE
1
22
4991AA
ACC PACKER,
1
23
410069
PACK MATERIAL ST
1
24
410113
BAG,AIRCAP, 8 X 11-1/2,
1
25
15265AA
SHIPPING LBL, 5700GAX WATERTIGHT XDUCERS
1
31
13434AA
LBL,SHIP CRTN CE MARK-VAR
1
32
160103
ADHESIVE,454
0
33
162004
OIL,SILICONE,3ML TUBE
0
34
OBSER-003
ADDENDUM,WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
35
14957AA
WARNING LABEL KIT U/S TOCO WATERTIGHT
1
36
14897AA
INSTRUCTION SHEET,WATERTIGHT TOCO
1
37
474045
NETWORK,RES,SIP,47 OHM,9,RES
1
Item Description
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
11-15
Parts Lists: 5700KAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
5700KAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound
Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
Table 11-7. 5700LAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Ultrasound Transducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
11-16
Find
Num
Item Number
1
14895A
U/S CBL ASSY 5' OB,WATERTIGHT
1
5
15082AA
MKG CASE TOP U/S,WATERTIGHT
1
6
14791A
CASE BOTTOM ASSY U/S,WATERTIGHT
1
7
14594AA
FLAT SEAL TOCO U/S WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
8
14640AA
CABLE MOUNTING NUT TOCO US WATERTIGHT
1
9
284106
SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,W/SEAL,PHIL,SS,LL
5
10
2008660-001
SCR CAP, TOCO, U/S
4
11
15254AA
SCREW CAP FLAT MARING,WATERTIGHT SCUCERS
1
13
281260
SCR SET 2-56 1/8L OVAL PT SS
1
16
7514DA
ABDOMINAL STRAP-BLUE
1
18
14855AA
WARNING TAG CABLES WATERTIGHT
1
19
13658FA
LBL,CE,CAUTION IP68,WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
20
440011
LABEL,2.25X.75,SELF-LAM,WHITE
1
22
4991AA
ACC PACKER
1
23
410069
PACK MATERIAL ST
1
24
410113
BAG,AIRCAP, 8 X 11-1/2
1
28
15265DA
SHIPPING LBL, 5700KAX WATERTIGHT XDUCERS
1
31
13434AA
LBL,SHIP CRTN CE MARK-VAR
1
32
160103
ADHESIVE,454
0
33
162004
OIL,SILICONE,3ML TUBE
0
34
OBSER-003
ADDENDUM,WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
35
14957AA
WARNING LABEL KIT U/S TOCO WATERTIGHT
1
36
14897AA
INSTRUCTION SHEET,WATERTIGHT TOCO
1
37
474045
NETWORK,RES,SIP,47 OHM,9,RES
1
Item Description
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
Revision C
Parts Lists: 2264DAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
2264DAX, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer
Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
Table 11-8. 2264, Loop-Style Nautilus Tocotransducer Assembly Parts List (5-ft cord)
Revision C
Find
Num
Item Number
1
14894A
TOCO CBL ASSY OB 5' LG,WATERTIGHT
1
5
15080AA
MARKING CASE TOP TOCO,WATERTIGHT
1
6
14790B
CASE BOTTOM ASSY TOCO OB,WATERTIGHT
1
7
14594AA
FLAT SEAL TOCO U/S WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
8
14640AA
CABLE MOUNTING NUT TOCO US WATERTIGHT
1
9
284106
SCR,4-40,PH,5/16L,W/SEAL,PHIL,SS,LL
5
10
14638AA
SCREW CAP WATERTIGHT
4
11
15254AA
SCREW CAP FLAT MARING,WATERTIGHT SCUCERS
1
13
281260
SCR SET 2-56 1/8L OVAL PT SS
1
16
7514CA
ABDOMINAL STRAP-GRAY
1
18
14855AA
WARNING TAG CABLES WATERTIGHT
1
19
13658FA
LBL,CE,CAUTION IP68,WATERTIGHT XDCR
1
20
440011
LABEL,2.25X.75,SELF-LAM,WHITE
1
21
4991AA
ACC PACKER
1
22
410069
PACK MATERIAL ST
1
23
410112
BAG,AIRCAP, 6 X 8-1/2
1
27
15264CA
SHIPPING LBL, 2264CAX WATERTIGHT XDUCERS
1
30
13434AA
LBL,SHIP CRTN CE MARK-VAR
1
31
160034
LOCTITE,SUPERBONDE
0
32
162004
OIL,SILICONE,3ML TUBE
0
227
15264DA
SHIPPING LBL, 2264DAX WATERTIGHT XDUCERS
1
Item Description
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Qty
11-17
Parts Lists: 1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List
1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate
Assembly Parts List
Table 11-9. 1509AAO/BAO, Qwik Connect Plus Legplate Assembly Parts List
11-18
Find
Num
Item Number
1
2000532-001
2
Item Description
Qty
CABLE STRAIN RELIEF 8 FEET
1
210227
CONTACT,MALE,24AWG,16.5MM,LG
11
3
210180
HALF-SHELL,W/CLAMP,3-5MM
1
4
210181
CLAMP,3-7MM
1
5
210176
RING
1
6
210183
GRIPPER,3-5MM
1
7
210182
SCREW,CLAMP,M 2.6 X 10
2
8
608048
SHRINK TUBING,1/4 BLK,
.021
9
605105
WIRE,#24 STRANDED,GRN,
.125
10
210179
HALF-SHELL,W/TONGUE
1
11
210178
RING,PLASTIC,21.8 X4
1
12
212133
PLUG,12 CKT GREY/BRN,A-D,
1
13
210226
CONTACT,MALE,24AWG,18MM L,G
1
14
2000528-001
COVER INTERFACE CABLE
1
15
2002641-001
O-RING .101 ID, .070THK, 70DUR, SILICONE
1
16
2000529-001
PIN COAX RECEPTACLE
1
17
2000527-001
CABLE BASE INTERFACE
1
18
2000429-003
PCB LEG PLATE BD
1
19
2000208-001
SPRING WIRE,LEG PLATE SNAP .125 STUD
1
20
440011
LABEL,2.25X.75,SELF-LAM,WHITE
1
22
2000595-001
LABEL SHIPPING FOR 1590AAO
1
23
410112
BAG,AIRCAP, 6 X 8-1/2
1
24
605106
WIRE,#24 STRANDED,BLUE
25
2002357-001
26
13658AA
.083
SPACER SPRING QWIK CONNECT PLUS
1
LABEL,CE MARK-ACCESSORIES,WATERPROOF
1
170 Series Monitor
2000947-004
Revision C
0459
gemedical.com
World Headquarters
GE Medical Systems
Information Technologies, Inc.
8200 West Tower Avenue
Milwaukee, WI 53223 USA
Tel: + 1 414 355 5000
1 800 558 5120 (US only)
Fax: + 1 414 355 3790
European Representative
GE Medical Systems
Information Technologies GmbH
Munzinger Straße 3-5
D-79111 Freiburg
Germany
Tel: + 49 761 45 43 - 0
Fax: + 49 761 45 43 - 233
Asia Headquarters
GE Medical Systems
Information Technologies Asia; GE (China) Co., Ltd.
24th Floor, Shanghai MAXDO Center,
8 Xing Yi Road, Hong Qiao Development Zone
Shanghai 200336, P.R. China
Tel: + 86 21 5257 4650
Fax: + 86 21 5208 2008

Operator’s Manual for GE Corometrics 170 Series Measuring Instruments, Medical Equipment (112 pages)

Specifications:

2101/2101975-corometrics_170_series.pdf file (18 Mar 2023)

Accompanying Data:

GE Corometrics 170 Series Measuring Instruments, Medical Equipment PDF Operator’s Manual (Updated: Saturday 18th of March 2023 04:31:39 PM)

Rating: 4.1 (rated by 42 users)

Compatible devices: Bently Nevada 3300/16, Corometrics 126, PanaFlow Z1G, MAC 5000, LOGIQ P6 Series, eBike BASIC, Vivid P3, DewPro MMY 245.

Recommended Documentation:

Text Version of Operator’s Manual

(Ocr-Read Summary of Contents of some pages of the GE Corometrics 170 Series Document (Main Content), UPD: 18 March 2023)

  • 30, 3-4 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors: Front Panel Controls Setup Button Pressing and holding this button while the monitor is on enters a user setup mode for configuring the monitor. Refer to “Chapter 4, Setup Procedures” for instructions. Pressing and holdi…

  • 24, GE Corometrics 170 Series 2-2 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001 Introduction: Indications for Use Indications for Use Models 171 and 172 Models 171 and 172 Fetal Monitors are indicated for use: in antepartum testing of fetal well-being, particularly in the high-risk pregnancy; and for routine non- invasive monit…

  • 15, Revision D 170 Series Monitor 1-3 2003023-001 Safety: Definitions of Terminology Definitions of Terminology Six types of special notices are used throughout this manual. They are: Danger, Warning, Caution, Contraindication, Important, and Note. (See Table 1-1.) The warnings and cautions in thi…

  • 44, 4-2 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001 Setup Procedures: Loading Strip Chart Paper Loading Strip Chart Paper The required paper for use with the 170 Series Monitor is:  catalog number (REF) 4305AAO/CAO (HR scale of 30–240 BPM); or  catalog number (REF) 4305BAO/DAO (HR scale of 50–210 BPM). Ref…

  • 25, GE Corometrics 170 Series Revision D 170 Series Monitor 2-3 2003023-001 Introduction: Risk Conditions Risk Conditions NOTE: There may be other factors or conditions that place a patient at risk. The goal of electronic fetal monitoring for antepartum testing is to differentiate the fetus who is tolerating the intrauterine environment w…

  • 88, 7-10 170 Series Monitor Revision D 2003023-001 Strip Chart Recorder: Annotations Fetal Heart Rate Alarm Status/Limits. For example: HI=160 LO=120 This annotation prints at startup indicating the fetal heart rate alarm status and limits. The bell icon indicates that the alarm function is enabled. HI represen…

  • GE Corometrics 170 Series User Manual

  • GE Corometrics 170 Series User Guide

  • GE Corometrics 170 Series PDF Manual

  • GE Corometrics 170 Series Owner’s Manuals

Recommended: 911.46248 Series, RF-302, Ninja A91

  • BINMASTER DPM-200

    DPM-200 Digital Panel Meter Instruction Manual BINMASTER Division of Garner Industries 7201 North 98th Street, Lincoln, NE 68507 USA Tel (800) 278-4241 • Fax: (402) 434-9133 www.binmaster.com • 1/8 DIN Digital Panel Meter with NEMA 4X, IP65 Front • 4-20 mA, ± 10 V, TC & RTD Field Selecta …

    DPM-200 46

  • D-tect Systems MiniRad-DX

    INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE RADIATION DETECTION SYSTEM D-tect Systems Group Visionary Products Inc. 11814 South Election Road, Suite 200 Draper, UT 84020 www.dtectsystems.com …

    MiniRad-DX 28

  • Fora GTel

    Multi-Functional Monitoring System Sistema de monitoreo multifuncional Owner’s Manual Manual del Propietario This device is not intended for use in healthcare or assisted-use settings such as hospitals, physician offices, or long-term care facilities because it has not been cleared by FDA for use in the …

    GTel 64

  • Kedida CT-6021A

    1 CT-6021A Pen pH Meter Instruction Manual Caution Please read the manual carefully before using the meter. The glass electrode …

    CT-6021A 3

Popular Right Now:

Operating Impressions, Questions and Answers:

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Coresatin крем инструкция по применению желтый
  • Coresatin barrier lotion инструкция на русском
  • Corega таблетки для очищения зубных протезов инструкция по применению взрослым
  • Core it стоматологический материал инструкция по применению
  • Cordyceps militaris инструкция по применению